ANNEX A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MIPP/NPL/CPB6/RFP-2016-008 Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
ANNEX A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PART I, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page i
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
Table of Contents 1. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...... 3 2. ACCESS, WORK AREA, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE ...... 5 3. SUBMITTALS ...... 8 4. PRE-CONSTRUCTION WORKS ...... 12 5. LAYOUT OF WORK AND SURVEY ...... 14 6. QUALITY CONTROL ...... 15 7. HEALTH AND SAFETY ...... 19 8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL ...... 30 9. NOTICE BOARD ...... 34 10. SITE MEETINGS ...... 35 11. DEMOBILIZATION ...... 36
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page ii
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
1. PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1.1. GENERAL 1.1.1. Introduction Department for International Development has been supporting Nepal to fulfil its commitment to provide safety and security to its citizens as expressed in the National Human Rights Action Plan. The activities are under an Integrated Program for Strengthening Security and Justice in Nepal coordinated by a board convened by the Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of Nepal. Out of the program, among others certain infrastructure development part has been entrusted to UNOPS. Consequently Police Stations, Area Police Offices, District Police Office and barracks are being constructed in certain districts by UNOPS through Modernization and Improvement of Policing Project. The works are divided in a number of packages.
1.1.1. Scope of Works The general scope of works for each package shall be as follows: a) Civil construction works, including but not limited to demolition, ground strengthening, excavation, backfilling, concreting, brickwork, woodwork, metal works, plastering, painting, flooring, tiling, road works, landscaping, etc. b) Sanitary works, including plumbing for water supply, rainwater collection and ground recharge system, wastewater and soil collection, treatment and disposal, installations of sanitary fittings, etc. c) Internal and external electrification, including connection to city power grid.
1.1.2. Sites The work sites will be as follows: Dhading District a) Area Plice Office (APO) Building, Gajuri, b) Police Barrack, Dhading Besi Gorkha District c) Police Station (PS), Ghylchowk d) Police Station (PS), Ghympesal
In addition, the quarry area, material stockpiling area, spoil dump area and material testing facilities will also be considered as work sites.
1.2. NOTE ON EMPLOYER-SUPPLIED DATA AND INFORMATION 1.2.1. Drawings, Specifications and Instructions a) The drawings enclosed with the Tender Documents show the general arrangement and main dimensions of the project structures. During the progress of the work, additional construction drawings will be issued by the Engineer, as necessary, to set forth details shown on the drawings issued to the Contractor at award of the Contract. Such additional drawings shall become part of the Contract. b) The Contractor shall be governed by figured dimensions given on the drawings. When required dimensions are not shown on the construction drawings, the Contractor shall obtain such dimensions from the Engineer before proceeding with the construction of the portion of the work to which they refer. In every case, construction drawings shall take precedence over tender drawings. c) Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each other so that, if anything is shown on the drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, it is to be followed and built as though specifically set forth in both. d) If drawings conflict with specifications in any particular way, the specifications shall govern. e) The Engineer may, from time to time, issue additional detailed drawings, specifications and instructions for the performance of the work and, upon issue, such shall be deemed incorporated in the Contract. The Contractor shall immediately review such drawings and promptly inform the Engineer of any errors, discrepancies or conflict with other parts of the Contract before proceeding with the work. f) The Contractor shall, at all times, keep at least one copy of the drawings and specifications in proper binding and filing for format at each project site. Such drawings must be the latest revised issue and must bear the Engineer’s “Issued for Construction” label.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 3
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements g) All drawings and specifications and copies thereof, furnished by the Engineer, shall remain the Employer’s property and are not to be copied/Xeroxed and used on other works.
1.2.2. Patented Materials Whenever any material is specified in the Specifications or on the Drawings by patent or proprietary name or by the name of the manufacturer, such specifications shall be considered as used for the purpose of describing the material desired and the degree of excellence required and shall be considered as if followed by the words or approval equivalent, whether or not such words appear.
1.2.3. Standards, Codes or Designations Unless specifically provided otherwise, all references in the Contract to standards, codes or designations shall refer to the latest edition of the publication on the date of the submission of the tender.
1.2.4. Costs The Contractor will receive, free of charge, one print of each construction drawing, one copy of each revised drawing and one copy of the specifications. However, the Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, at no additional cost to the Employer, additional copies of drawings and specifications, or necessary portions thereof, to its own personnel, sub-contractors and material suppliers, as required.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 4
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
2. ACCESS, WORK AREA, TRANSPORTATION AND STORAGE 2.3. ACCESS The project sites under this package are located at various locations of the district to which the package relates. The degree of accessibility of the sites are different.
2.4. SPACE FOR OFFICE, KITCHEN, DINING AND RESIDENTIAL PURPOSE During the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable site office and lunchroom facilities for the use of the Contractor and its sub-contractors. He shall arrange accommodation for its and its sub-contractor’s staff outside of the project premises. The locations of such facilities shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
2.5. PARKING FACILITIES A parking area for the vehicles of the Contractor, sub-contractors and their employees shall be provided by the Contractor outside the project work area as authorized by the Engineer. No private vehicles will be allowed on site.
2.6. CONSTRUCTION POWER The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for construction power supply. He shall be required to provide a construction power distribution system, connected to the city grid or generated at site, and shall include transformers, poles, cables and other accessories, needed for supply of power to the construction sites, offices and camps. Contractor shall have available at the site generators to ensure non-interrupted construction power and to ensure the safety of the Works. The locations for installing generators shall be approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the right, at all times, to inspect the Contractor’s electrical installations. Those installations that are unsatisfactory shall be modified immediately by the Contractor to the Engineer’s satisfaction at no additional cost to the Employer.
2.7. STORAGE FACILITIES The Contractor shall maintain adequate storage facilities at the site for material, plant and equipment to be employed in the works. The facilities shall conform to specific storage requirements mentioned for different materials mentioned in the technical specifications and in the Sections GR-090 (Health and Safety) and GR-100 (Environmental Control). The Contractor’s storage facilities shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
2.8. TOILET FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide toilet facilities at the site for the use of its employees and its sub-contractor’s employees. These facilities should include sewage collection, treatment and disposal facilities. The construction site shall be kept clean and serviceable at all times during the contract period.
2.9. FIRST AID FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide adequate first aid facilities on-site acceptable to the Engineer. Failure of the Contractor to ensure the availability of first aid facilities on-site will result in an immediate ‘stop work’ order being issued. All costs and time delays resulting from any such ‘stop work’ order shall entirely be the Contractor’s responsibility.
2.10. SECURITY The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for security at the site for the purpose of protecting its stores, equipment, material, persons and property and for enforcing regulations normal to an operation of this type and size. He shall cooperate fully with the Engineer to ensure the overall security and safety of the Works. However, security of the Works will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor until such work is completed and turned over to and accepted by the Employer. Duties of the Contractor shall include but not be limited to: . Provisions and maintenance of all necessary fencing. . Property security. . Lighting.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 5
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
. Guards, etc. . Safety of contractor’s employees at work etc. And all other measures for the protection of the whole of the Works, all material delivered to site and all persons employed in connection with the Works continuously, including nights and holidays for the duration of the Contract.
2.11. GARBAGE DISPOSAL The Contractor shall maintain a safe, healthy and tidy worksite at all times. He shall be responsible for the collection and disposal of all garbage and refuse for itself and its subcontractors. Proper and sufficient receptacles for refuse shall be provided. Collection of refuse and garbage shall be made at least once per week, and disposal shall be acceptable to the Engineer as per the local authority rules, regulations and in an environmentally friendly way. The contractor shall be fully responsible for garbage management at his own cost. The dumping of refuse or any contaminant into the any stream or other watercourse shall not be permitted. No trees, part of a tree, refuse, debris substance, other material or contaminant shall be permitted to be thrown, deposited or dumped into any lake, river or upon the bed, shores or banks thereof.
2.12. TRANSPORTATION OF MATERIALS a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the transportation of all materials from the point of manufacture or supply to storage areas or directly to the Site. b) The Contractor shall investigate and respect the size and weight limitations along the transportation routes. He shall allow for all costs of transportation in his Contract Price. c) The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any of the roads or bridges on the routes to the Site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of the Contractor or any of his sub-contractor. d) If any damage occurs to any bridge or road arising from the transport of materials or Plant, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer with a copy to the Employer, as soon as he becomes aware of such damage or as soon as he receives any claim from such authority entitled to make such claim. e) The Contractor shall indemnify the road authority against damage. The Employer shall not be liable for any costs, charges or expenses in respect thereof or in relation thereto. f) The Contractor shall bear the risk of loss or damage to all materials, equipment, plant etc. prior to acceptance by the Employer.
2.13. PACKAGING AND SHIPPING a) The Contractor shall wrap, pack and crate all materials and Plant included in the Works or part thereof, suitable for shipment according to the site climatic conditions, and in a manner which facilitates handling and protects the material or Plant from damage in rail, truck, ocean or air shipment as applicable, and within the size and weight limitations imposed by the carrier. An approved drying agent, such as silica gel, shall be packed in containers or packages holding materials and Plant that may be adversely affected by moisture or excessive humidity. The Contractor shall check right of way clearances and weight limitations and make all shipping arrangements. Plant and material shall be shipped in proper sequence for efficient installation. b) All Plant parts shall be marked to facilitate erection. All packing crates shall be clearly and indelibly marked before shipping to indicate the Contract number and shipping address, volume, weight, name, number and unit number of the contents, slinging and weight bearing points. c) Each packing crate shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope. Three copies of the packing list shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to dispatch. Parts shall be described and also identified by their numbered markings in the packing lists. All shipping documents shall be prepared in English and all dimensions, weights and other measurement shall be given in metric units. d) Each package shall be marked with the Employer’s identification mark, details of which will be provided by the Employer after order to commence the works.
2.14. SITE HANDLING AND STORAGE a) The Contractor shall ensure that all material and Plant shall be protected during site handling and storage against loss, corrosion, weather damage, deformation or distortion and contamination by dirt.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 6
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
b) Part on which the final alignment and running clearances of the equipment depend shall be adequately blocked and protected to prevent distortion during storage, handling and erection. c) If the equipment is received at the Site before it is to be erected, the Contractor shall store the equipment as packed, in a clean and well-protected place. d) Installed plant shall be covered with clean tarpaulins and tied shot to prevent ingress of dust and dirt during construction, as required by the Engineer. e) For the duration of the Works on Site, the Contractor shall provide covered storage facilities, weatherproof shelters, loading and unloading facilities as required for the material and Plant. f) All deliveries of materials and Plant shall be checked and discrepancies noted and reported in writing to the Engineer. Lost items shall be replaced. Damaged items shall be replaced (or repaired if permitted by the Engineer) to conform to the Specifications.
2.15. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement or separate payment shall be made for work under this section. The costs for all the above requirements shall be deemed to be covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 7
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
3. SUBMITTALS 3.1. GENERAL This Section covers the preparation and submission of the Contractor’s drawings, design calculations, samples, manufacturer’s literature and brochures, photographs, installation instructions, operation and maintenance manuals, schedules and reports as specified herein and in the various other sections of the Specifications. All submittals shall be in the English language. All dimensions and drawings shall be in metric units, with the exception of manufactured components not readily available in metric units.
3.2. SHOP DRAWINGS a) The Contractor shall provide, where necessary, shop drawings of the various structures of the project. Such details shall be to the extent necessary for review, checking and approval by the Engineer, fabrication, assembly, delivery, site erection and safe operation under the conditions described in the Specifications, including working drawings and specifications prepared by other manufacturers. All drawings for load-bearing and water-retaining structures shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer experienced in this kind of work. The drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show: i. The general arrangement and dimensions of all parts and size of each and every part of the work to be supplied under the Contract. ii. The nature of the material from which the various parts are to be made. iii. All connections. The Contractor shall submit the shop drawings in duplicate to the Engineer for review and comment. All drawings submitted to the Engineer for review and approval shall be signed, checked and approved by the Contractor prior to submission. The Engineer, unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be allowed 15 days to examine, review and comment upon such drawings or prints. b) Work described by the shop drawings shall not commence without authorization having been granted, in writing by the Engineer, and Employer will not accept or pay for this work unless such authorization shall have first been granted. c) All drawings shall bear the following title: United Nations Office for Project Services, Modernization and Improvement of Policing Project (MIPP) in Nepal d) All shop drawings on which changes are made shall have the revisions clearly marked. e) No change shall be made to any shop drawing accepted by the Engineer without permission of the Engineer. Subsequent changes shall be requested by sending another set of two copies of each reviewed drawing to the Engineer for review and comment. f) Review and comment of the Contractor’s drawings and design by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for correctness thereof, or for results arising from errors or omissions, or for faults or defects, or for failure in the matter of guarantees, which may become evident during construction or subsequent operation. g) After review and approval of the drawings by the Engineer, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer, free of charge, two copies of all final drawings.
3.3. CONTRACTOR’S DESIGN CALCULATIONS The Contractor shall submit copies of his design notes and calculations for those structures for whose design he is responsible (shoring, formwork, scaffolding, bar-bending schedule, etc.). These calculations shall be carried out under the supervision of an engineer experienced in similar types of work. The cover page of the calculations should bear the stamp and signature of this engineer verifying the completeness and correctness of the design(s). If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide information on his designer's education and experience. At the time of tender, these notes and design calculations should be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to evaluate the overall adequacy of the design. To meet these requirements, the design calculations should be sufficient to demonstrate how loads on the major structural elements were determined. Later, before the Contractor orders materials or commences manufacturing, detailed design calculations and notes shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review. The Engineer will require two weeks for these reviews; therefore, the Contractor shall plan his work accordingly.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 8
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
3.4. MATERIALS, DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS a) Unless specified elsewhere in the Contract, materials incorporated into the work shall be new, of an acceptable quality, and of the most suitable grades of their respective kinds for their intended use, and the decision of the Engineer as to the quality and suitability of material shall be final and binding. b) Ownership of all material incorporated into the work or upon arrival at site, whichever occurs first, shall be with the Employer. Any plant delivered by the Contractor to the site may not be removed during the period of this Contract without the approval of the Engineer. c) During the progress of the work, the Contractor may offer material with equal or better qualities and performance in substitution for those specified, which it considers, will be in the Employer’s interest to accept. Any such offer shall be made in writing to the Engineer for its consideration sufficiently in advance of the time at which the Contractor wished to order the said material for use in the work, so that no delay in the construction schedule occurs. The Contractor shall include, in duplicate with its offer and at its own expense, complete data and samples that, together with any other data the Engineer may require, will enable the Engineer to assess the acceptability of the said material. The use of any material so offered will be permitted only after written acceptance by the Engineer. Such acceptance by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for efficiency, sufficiency, quality and performance of the substitute material. d) When the equivalent material necessities changes to or coordination with any other portion of the work, the data submitted shall include drawings and details showing all such changes, and the Contractor shall perform these changes, at its own expense, as part of any acceptance of substitute material. e) If the accepted equivalent material is of less value to the Employer or involves less cost to the Contractor than the materials specified, an adjustment shall be made in favour of the Employer on the basis of prices stated in the written acceptance from the Engineer. In no case shall payment in excess of the prices entered in the Bill of Quantities be made because of substitution of any material in place of another under the provisions of this clause.
3.5. SAMPLES The Contractor shall furnish two samples of the various materials intended to be used on or in the Work, together with the technical specifications whenever requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be sent to the Engineer in a sample bard with the carriage prepaid. After the Engineer has performed his review and analysis of samples, he will return one sample to the Contractor, along with the Engineer’s comments. Samples not approved shall be resubmitted until approved as satisfactory by the Engineer. Approval of a sample shall not be taken in itself to change or modify any Contract requirements. Each sample shall be identified completely as to product, manufacture trade name, style, and model, location of use as well as names of the Contractor, Supplier and Project. Field samples shall be prepared at the Site by the Contractor in the manner and number requested by the Engineer.
3.6. TESTS AND TEST REPORT 3.6.1. General The Contractor shall submit four copies of all detailed programs and procedures for testing and/or commissioning of all materials and plant supplied under this Contract to the Engineer for approval, not later than one month prior to the scheduled commencement of these activities. Such programs and procedures shall include all the tests specified in this Specification. The details should include the tests proposed to be carried out, recommended test procedures, proposed sequence of testing with anticipated duration of each test and a sample copy of the test result reports proposed to be used. Programs of all these tests shall be incorporated into construction, manufacturing and erection schedules.
3.6.2. Tests on Plants Prior to the acceptance of plants or part of the plant by the Employer, the Contractor shall carry out Tests on Completion in accordance with the approved test programs and procedures referred to above. The Contractor shall maintain a logbook at the Site and record the performance of all tests therein and verified by the engineer. In cases where doubt exists regarding the manufacturer’s tests, the Engineer may request repetition of such tests in his presence. All re-tests, if required, shall be done by the Contractor at no extra cost in the event of defective materials or workmanship. The Employer reserves the right to witness any tests, and the Contractor shall provide reasonable notice thereof. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 9
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
3.6.3. Tests on Materials The materials, parts and assemblies shall be tested to comply with Indian Standard (IS) or other standards specified. The tests and trials shall be recorded and certified by the Contractor. The test records for materials shall identify the component parts in which the materials are to be used, and the certificate shall be prepared in such a way that it can easily be determined if the applicable Specifications or standards have been complied with. All radiographs, test specimens and test records shall become the property of the Employer.
3.6.4. Shop or Mill Orders As soon as practicable after receipt by the Contractor of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of each mill or shop order for materials purchased by the Contractor for use in the fabrication of the steel work prescribed under this Specification, and which will require inspection at points other than the Contractor’s premises. The copies of the orders shall state the place at which the materials are to be manufactured. All such mill or shop orders shall quote the pertinent reference to specifications for the materials to be furnished.
3.6.5. Test Reports After completion of each and every test required as proof of compliance with the Specifications and/or each and every specified test, including commissioning tests, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two signed copies of a report covering such tests. The test reports shall indicate the tests performed, the results obtained, and instruments used, names of test personnel and provide for witnesses’ signatures. They shall also be numbered and dated. Format of these reports shall be submitted at the same time as the test procedures.
3.7. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS a) Within ten calendar days from Notice of Award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for revision and comment and acceptance by the Engineer, a detailed construction program which shall include: . A network diagram Construction Schedule completely detailing the Contractor’s proposed operation and schedule for construction of the work. The critical path method network chart shall indicate the early and late start and completion date for the various activities. . A Material Delivery Schedule showing the source of the material, alternate sources, route of transportation and site delivery date. The schedule should tally with the Construction Schedule above and the Construction Method below. . A narrative report which shall describe, in detail, the Contractor’s proposed Construction Methods of carrying out each phase or portion of the work, the number of men and the number, type and size of major pieces of plant required for the work. b) The network diagram construction schedule shall show all activities represented by the items listed in the Bill of Quantities and all related operations such as delivery and erection of plant, construction of temporary roads, preparation of borrow areas, etc. c) In addition to construction activities, the network diagram construction schedule shall show required dates of any material supplied by the Employer. d) The Contractor’s network diagram construction schedule shall show and take into account the key dates listed in Section GR-010 (Project Description). e) The Contractor shall update and resubmit the network diagram construction schedule to the Engineer on a monthly and on ad hoc basis. From time to time during the period of the Contract, the Engineer will furnish the Contractor with information on activities and events, whereupon the Contractor shall amend and revise its network to include such information. f) The construction program, as outlined above, when accepted by the Engineer, shall form part of the Contract, and all work will be monitored by the Engineer and shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the program. In the event that individual activities are not started by the late start date indicated on the accepted schedule or when activities are not completed by the late completion date indicated on the accepted schedule or, if the Contractor fails to maintain the scheduled progress as indicated on the accepted schedule, the Contractor shall be required to work extra shifts, Saturdays and holidays or take other necessary emergency action, acceptable to the Engineer, to ensure that the Contractor returns to the accepted construction program within a period of not more than five (5) calendar
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 10
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
days or the Engineer’s written notice to the Contractor. All such work to complete late activities will be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer.
3.8. INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall provide an instruction manual for guidance during installation and testing of each item of equipment supplied by the Contractor and for subsequent incorporation into the Employer’s operating and maintenance manual. The manual shall describe and illustrate in detail the construction and recommended procedures for assembling, disassembling, maintaining and operating the equipment. The manual, as a minimum, shall include the following information: a) Index of manual and Specifications reference. b) General description: Technical and design data, including weights and dimensions of major components of the work. c) Installation procedures: Pertinent information including installation procedures issued at the site for construction. d) Operating Instructions: Complete information related to operation and performance of the equipment. e) Maintenance instructions: Complete details for maintenance, including frequency of lubrication an recommended lubricants; dismantling and reassembling instructions; details of protective coatings, paint materials, and application instructions; and a list of spare parts with manufacturer’s parts numbers. f) Contractor’s Drawing List: Complete list of shop drawings (where applicable) issued by contractor. g) Manufacturer’s bulletins: All pertinent bulletins instruction manuals and performance curves prepared by the various manufacturers of component parts of the Work. h) Addresses for ordering of spare parts. The Contractor shall submit three draft copies of the manual to the Engineer for review. The Engineer will review and return the manual within 21 days of receipt. Following final review, the Contractor shall forward two final copies of the complete manual to the Employer. If revision of the manual becomes necessary as a result of information gained during installation, testing, or initial operation, the Contractor shall immediately make the appropriate revision and submit two copies of the revised pages and/or drawings, suitably dated.
3.9. PHOTOGRAPHS During manufacture and delivery, the Contractor shall provide photographs of every major component of the work. Subsequently, during the construction and installation stage, the Contractor shall provide progress photographs of the works on a monthly and on ad-hoc basis. All the photographs must be adequately identified with brief descriptions of the works, dates and locations.
3.10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement or separate payment shall be made for tasks, other than laboratory tests, under this section. The costs for all the above requirements shall be deemed to be covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 11
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
4. PRE-CONSTRUCTION WORKS 4.1. GENERAL This Section covers the works to be performed by the Contractor prior to commencing the construction activities at the Site.
4.2. CONDITION-IN SURVEY The Engineer and the Contractor shall carry out a joint condition-in survey using video or digital photographs to record the condition of the Site upon handover to the Contractor. This survey shall determine the state of the Site that the Contractor must hand back upon completion of the Works (refer Part I, Section 8: Environmental Control).
4.3. SITE FAMILIARIZATION Prior to mobilization, the Contractor shall acquaint himself with the existing physical and working conditions at the Site, in particular the following: a) Existing structures, facilities and amenities at the Site, including occupied areas of the Site or buildings. b) Any limitations and restrictions on access on to and within the Site, use of the Site for temporary works and construction plant, including working and storage areas, location of offices, workshops, sheds, roads and parking. c) Any limitations and restrictions on working times. Based on this study, the Contractor shall prepare a site plan showing his proposed locations and alignments of construction facilities, stock yards and labour camps and submit it to the Engineer for his review and approval.
4.4. PROVISIONS FOR OCCUPIED AREAS OF SITE OR BUILDINGS For the parts of Site designated as occupied areas, the Contractor shall, in consultation with the Engineer, make the following provisions to allow occupants to continue using the area during the entire construction period or part thereof, as required: a) Make available safe access for occupants. b) Arrange work to minimize nuisance to occupants and ensure their safety. c) Protect occupants against weather, dust, dirt, water or other nuisance by such means as temporary screens.
4.5. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY The Contractor shall plan and implement the following protection measures for persons and property on and adjacent to the Site in order to minimize the number and duration of interruptions: a) Provide and maintain required barricades, guards, fencing, shoring, temporary roadways, footpaths, signs, lighting and traffic flagging. b) Protect and maintain access ways (roadways and footpaths) and existing services (drains, watercourses etc.) that are in use on or adjacent to the Site. On-site services that are to be continued shall be repaired, diverted or relocated as required while those to be abandoned shall be cut and sealed or disconnected and made safe. c) Protect property that is to remain on or adjacent to the Site, including adjoining property encroaching onto the Site. The Contractor shall submit proposals to the Engineer for action on existing services before starting this work.
4.6. CONDITION SURVEY OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall, in the presence of the Engineer and owners/occupants of adjoining properties, carry out a survey of these properties to record their pre- commencement condition. As part of the survey, the Contractor shall make detailed records of conditions existing within the properties, especially structural defects and other damage or defacement. The Contractor shall arrange for at least two copies of each record, including drawings, written descriptions and photographs, to be endorsed by the owners and occupants, or their representatives, as evidence of conditions existing before commencement of work and submit one endorsed copy of each record to the Engineer. The Contractor shall keep the other endorsed copy.
4.7. DOCUMENT SUBMISSION Prior to mobilization to the Site, the Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Engineer for his review and approval: a) Results of Condition-in Survey. b) Site Survey as per Part I, Section 5: Layout of Work and Survey.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 12
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
c) Result of condition survey of adjoining property. d) Work Method Statement if differ from that proposed in the Bid. e) Construction Program as per Part I, Section 3: Submittals. f) Contractor’s Quality Assurance/ Quality Control (QA/QC) Plan, as per the minimum requirements set out in Part I, Section 6: Quality Control. g) Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan (HSP), as per the minimum requirements set out in Part I, Section 7: Health and Safety. h) Contractor’s Environmental Protection Plan, as per the minimum requirements set out in Part I, Section 8: Environmental Control. i) Schedule of Materials and Installed Equipment. A pre-construction meeting will be held between the Engineer and the Contractor to review the above documentation. If the documentation is incomplete, the Contractor will have three calendar days to revise and resubmit the documentation for approval.
4.8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement or separate payment shall be made for work under this section. The costs for all the above requirements shall be deemed to be covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 13
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
5. LAYOUT OF WORK AND SURVEY 5.1. GENERAL This section of the Specifications covers the requirements and procedures for layout of work, quantity survey, quality control and verifying dimensions of existing structures. The survey shall include, but may not be limited to, the following main activities: a) Establishing the location, layout and setting dimensions of the new project structures. b) Surveying, measuring and recording the actual layout, dimensions and conditions of existing structures and their components, where modification to or extension of them are planned. c) Monitoring the behaviour of existing structures during the excavation and construction of the adjacent new structures. d) Measurements and dimensional checks during construction of concrete structures and erection of structural steel for quality control.
5.2. BENCHMARKS Prior to start of construction, the Engineer shall provide benchmarks to the Contractor in the vicinity of project structures.
5.3. SURVEY POINT MARKERS Utilizing the benchmark and existing structural features, the Contractor shall fix necessary survey lines, points and elevations for each structure as the construction work proceeds and shall verify all dimensions needed for his design or for control of construction. Survey point markers shall be durable, fixed firmly to rock or concrete and be adequately protected. Each survey points shall be designated by a clearly legible and durable inscription, which shall be provided and preserved by the Contractor. The Contractor shall take all measures required, at his own cost, for the adequate protection and preservation of the basic survey points.
5.4. SURVEY EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL The Contractor’s instruments and other survey equipment shall be accurate, suitable for the surveys required in accordance with recognized professional standards and in proper condition and adjustment at all time. Surveys shall be performed only by qualified, properly trained and experienced personnel. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the correctness of his survey work and for the actions of personnel engaged in it.
5.5. FIELD NOTES AND RECORDS The Contractor shall record the surveys in proper field notebooks. A copy of such records, measurement and calculations, properly indexed, shall be furnished to the Engineer when completed.
5.6. USE BY THE ENGINEER The Engineer may, at any time, use line and grade points markers established by the Contractor. The Contractor’s surveys are a part of the Work and may be checked by the Engineer or the representative of the Engineer at any time. The Contractor shall be responsible for any lines, grades or measurements which do not comply with specified or proper tolerances, or which are otherwise defective, and for any resultant defects in the Work. The Contractor will be required to conduct re-surveys or check surveys to correct errors indicated by review of the field notebooks.
5.7. RESPONSIBILITY Any check or control by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy of structures or parts of them with regard to their positions and dimensions, or for the accuracy of the erection work executed by the Contractor or its sub- contractor.
5.8. SURVEY OF EXISTING STRUCTURES The Contractor shall conduct survey, measurement and observations of existing structures on the Site to the extent as necessary to establish relevant dimensions and conditions required for the design and construction of the adjacent or interconnected new structures or structural components.
5.9. MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENTS No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section. The unit rates and lump sum prices offered for civil works shall be deemed to cover all the Contractor’s necessary layout and survey works.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 14
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
6. QUALITY CONTROL 6.1. GENERAL The intent of this Section is to enable the Contractor to establish a necessary level of quality control that will: a) Adequately provide for the production of acceptable quality materials. b) Provide sufficient information to assure both the Contractor and the Engineer that the specification requirements can be met. c) Allow the Contractor as much latitude as possible to develop his or her own standard of control. Although guidelines are established and certain minimum requirements are specified herein and elsewhere in the Technical Specifications, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for accomplishing the stated purpose. The quality control requirements contained in this section and elsewhere in the technical specifications are in addition to and separate from the acceptance testing requirements. Acceptance testing requirements are the responsibility of the Engineer.
6.2. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAM 6.2.1. General Description The Contractor shall establish, provide and maintain an effective Quality Control Program (QCP) that details the methods and procedures that will be taken to assure that all materials and completed construction required by this Contract conform to contract plans, technical specifications and other requirements, whether manufactured by the Contractor or procured from sub- contractors or vendors. The QCP shall describe procedures to perform inspection and testing of all items of work required by the technical specifications, including those performed by sub-contractors. It shall ensure conformance to applicable specifications and plans with respect to materials, workmanship, construction, finish and functional performance. The QCP shall be effective for control of all construction work performed under this Contract and shall specifically include surveillance and tests required by the technical specifications, in addition to other requirements of this section and any other activities deemed necessary by the Contractor to establish an effective level of quality control.
6.2.2. Quality Control Program The Contractor shall describe the QCP in a written document that shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to the start of any production, construction or off-site fabrication of materials to be incorporated into the completed work. The Engineer shall choose an adequate period for the review, this period not being less than one week. The Contractor shall present and discuss his understanding of quality control requirements at the preconstruction conference. The QCP shall be organized to address, as a minimum, the following items: a) Contractor’s quality control organization. b) Submittals schedule. c) Inspection requirements. d) Quality control testing plan. e) Material Delivery Schedule f) Documentation of quality control activities. g) Requirements for corrective action when quality control and/or acceptance criteria are not met. The Contractor is encouraged to add any additional elements to the QCP that he deems necessary to adequately control all production and/or construction processes required by this contract.
6.3. QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION The Contractor’s QCP shall be implemented by the establishment of a separate quality control organization. An organizational chart shall be developed to show all quality control personnel and how these personnel integrate with other management/production and construction functions and personnel. The organizational chart shall identify all quality control staff by name and function and shall indicate the total staff required to implement all elements of the QCP, including inspection and testing for each item of work. If necessary, different technicians can be utilized for specific inspection and testing functions for different items of work. If an outside organization or independent testing laboratory is used for implementation of all or part of the QCP, these organizations and their assigned personnel shall be listed in the organization chart. The quality control organization shall consist of the following minimum personnel:
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 15
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
a) Project Manager b) Site Engineer (the number as specified in the Bid Document) c) Site Supervisor (one for each of the construction sites) d) Quantity Surveyor (the number as specified in the Bid Document) e) Laboratory Technician The experience and academic qualifications of the personnel shall be as specified in the Bid Documents.
6.4. SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE The Contractor shall submit a detailed listing of all submittals related to quality control, e.g. mix designs, material certifications, etc., required by the technical specifications. The listing shall be developed in a spreadsheet format and shall include: a) Specification item number. b) Item description. c) Description of submittal. d) Specification paragraph requiring submittal; and e. Scheduled date of submittal.
6.5. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS Quality control inspection functions shall be organized to provide inspection for all definable features of work, as detailed below. Inspections shall be performed daily to ensure continuing compliance with the contract requirements until completion of the particular feature of work. These shall include the following minimum requirements: a) During plant operation for material production, quality control test results and periodic inspections shall be utilized to ensure the quality of aggregates and other mix components and to adjust and control mix proportioning to meet the approved mix design and other requirements of the technical specifications. All equipment utilized in proportioning and mixing shall be inspected to ensure its proper operating condition. The QCP shall detail how these and other quality control functions will be accomplished and utilized. b) During field operations, quality control test results and periodic inspections shall be utilized to ensure the quality of all materials and workmanship. All equipment utilized in placing, finishing and compacting shall be inspected to ensure its proper operating condition and to ensure that all such operations are in conformance to the technical specifications and are within the plan dimensions, lines, grades and tolerances specified. The Program shall document how these and other quality control functions will be accomplished and utilized.
6.6. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING PLAN As a part of the overall QCP, the Contractor shall implement a quality control testing plan, as required by the technical specifications. The testing plan shall include the minimum tests and test frequencies required by each technical specification item, as well as any additional quality control tests that the Contractor deems necessary to adequately control production and/or construction processes. The testing plan can be developed in a spreadsheet format and shall, as a minimum, include the following: a) Specification item number (e.g. Part II, Section 1.9.7). b) Item description (e.g. cement concrete). c) Test type (e.g. gradation, grade). d) Test standard (e.g. IS or ASTM test number, as applicable). e) Test frequency (e.g. as required by technical specifications or minimum frequency when requirements are not stated). f) Responsibility (e.g. plant technician). g) Control requirements (e.g. target, permissible deviations). The testing plan shall contain a statistically based procedure of random sampling for acquiring test samples. The Engineer shall be pre-informed by the contractor to witness quality control sampling and testing.
6.7. DOCUMENTATION The Contractor shall maintain current quality control records of all inspections and tests performed. These records shall include factual evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed, including type and number of inspections or tests involved the following:
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 16
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
a) Results of inspections or tests. b) Nature of defects, deviations, causes for rejection, etc. c) Proposed remedial actions. d) Corrective actions taken. The records must cover both conforming and defective or deficient features and must include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in the work are in full compliance with the terms of the contract. Legible copies of these records shall be furnished to the Engineer daily or as required by the Engineer. The records shall cover all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified and signed by the Contractor’s Program Administrator. Specific contractor quality control records required for the contract shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following records:
Daily Inspection Reports Each Contractor Quality Control Technician shall maintain a daily log of all inspections performed for both Contractor and sub- contractor’s operations on a form acceptable to the Engineer. These technician’s daily reports shall provide factual evidence that continuous quality control inspections have been performed and shall, as a minimum, include the following: a) Technical specification item number and description. b) Compliance with approved submittals. c) Proper storage of materials and equipment. d) Proper operation of all equipment. e) Adherence to plans and technical specifications. f) Review of quality control tests. g) Safety inspection. The daily inspection reports shall identify inspections conducted, results of inspections, location and nature of defects found, causes for rejection and remedial or corrective actions taken or proposed. They shall be signed by the responsible Quality Control Technician and the Program Administrator. The Engineer shall be provided at least one copy of each daily inspection report on the work day following the day of record.
Test Reports The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that will record all quality control test results. The test reports shall document the following information: a) Technical specification item number and description. b) Test designation. c) Location. d) Date of test. e) Control requirements. f) Test results. g) Causes for rejection. h) Recommended remedial actions. i) Retests. Test results from each day’s work period shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start of the next day’s work period. When required by the technical specifications, the Contractor shall maintain statistical quality control charts. The daily test reports shall be signed by the responsible quality control technician and the Program Administrator and verified by the Engineer.
6.8. CORRECTIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS The QCP shall indicate the appropriate action to be taken when a process is deemed, or believed, to be out of control (out of tolerance) and detail what action will be taken to bring the process into control. The requirements for corrective action shall include both general requirements for operation of the QCP as a whole and for individual items of work contained in the technical specifications. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 17
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
The QCP shall detail how the results of quality control inspections and tests will be used for determining the need for corrective action and shall contain clear sets of rules to gauge when a process is out of control and the type of correction to be taken to regain process control. When applicable or required by the technical specifications, the Contractor shall establish and utilize statistical quality control charts for individual quality control tests. The requirements for corrective action shall be linked to the control charts.
6.9. SURVEILLANCE BY ENGINEER All items of material and equipment shall be subject to surveillance by the Engineer at the point of production, manufacture or shipment to determine if the Contractor, producer, manufacturer or shipper maintains an adequate quality control system in conformance with the requirements detailed herein and the applicable technical specifications and plans. In addition, all items of materials, equipment and work in place shall be subject to surveillance by the Engineer at the site for the same purpose. Surveillance by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of performing quality control inspections of either on-site or off- site works of the Contractor or his sub- contractors.
6.10. NONCOMPLIANCE The Engineer will notify the Contractor of any noncompliance with any of the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective action. Any notice, when delivered by the Engineer or his authorized representative to the Contractor or his authorized representative at the Site of the work, shall be considered sufficient notice. In cases where quality control activities do not comply with either the Contractor’s QCP or the contract provisions, or where the Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain an effective QCP, as determined by the Engineer, the Engineer may: a) Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified quality control personnel. b) Order the Contractor to stop operations until appropriate corrective actions are taken.
6.11. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT To assist the contractors in quality control and quality management, some fund will be allocated under Provisional Sums. However, the Provisional Sums could be charged only for the cost of the actual tests and the Contractor’s specified overheads of 15% for the purpose. Other costs associated with the tests, for example, sampling, staffing, transportation, witnessing, power, consumables, etc. will be considered incorporated in the Unit Rates for the corresponding work items quoted by the Contractor in his Bid.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 18
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
7. HEALTH AND SAFETY 7.1. GENERAL 7.1.1. Responsibility for Safety The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all operations in connection with the Contract and shall take all necessary actions and precautions to ensure the safety of all persons who may be in, on or adjacent to the Site.
7.1.2. Compliance with UNOPS Workplace Safety and Health Policy and Procedures The Contractor shall comply with the UNOPS Workplace Safety and Health Policy and Procedures (WSHPP), including but not limited to other rules and regulations, standards and codes of practice related and relevant to the promotion of safe practices and conduct at the worksite. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to comply with all such requirements of the WSHPP, as affect him or any person or persons employed by him, and as related to any work, act or operation performed or about to be performed by him. The Contractor shall not permit any person to do anything that is not in accordance with the generally accepted principles of safe and sound practices. The Contractor shall ensure a safe environment on the site at all times. All safety provisions shall be properly maintained and shall not be removed. The Contractor shall ensure that his workmen take necessary and sufficient precautions when safety provisions are used. The Contractor shall not allow any of the safety provisions to be used unless he has satisfied himself that the provisions are safe. Where the UNOPS Project Manager appoints an engineer to carry out the following temporary works regulated by UNOPS WSHPP: . Cantilevered platforms erected more than 3 m above ground . Formwork structure . Runway and ramp for use of motor trucks or heavy vehicles . Stability of structure adjacent to excavation . Shoring and bracing for trench excavation > 4m The engineer shall comply with any duties imposed on him under WSHPP, including: . Design it to acceptable codes and standards and in accordance with good engineering practices. . Ensure that it is constructed in accordance to his design. . When constructed, the engineer should check it for safety and issue a certificate stating that it is safe for its intended use. . The engineer shall exercise due diligence when carrying out his duties. . The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of WSHPP and the requirements specified hereunder are strictly complied with at all times.
7.1.3. Undertaking by Contractor The Contractor shall undertake to ensure that the provisions of the WSHPP are complied with. The attached safety provisions undertaking form (at the end of this section) for the Contractor attached to this section shall be complied by a Managing Director or other duly authorized representative of the company/firm awarded the Contract.
7.1.4. Contractor’s Health and Safety Program The Contractor shall not begin any construction or production of materials to be incorporated into the completed work until the Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan (HSP) has been reviewed by UNOPS. The HSP shall describe in detail relevant safety equipment and safe methods of work employed at each stage of construction. It shall highlight special risks involving specialized equipment and shall also include company safety policy, risk assessment, safety rules and regulations, small group activities, safety promotion program (safety slogans, safety campaign, slide shows, etc.), safety training, emergency procedures and other such activities. The HSP must be displayed outside the site office. The Contractor shall display safety posters at the site office, site canteen, exit/entry points of buildings and passenger-cum-material hoist area.
7.1.5. Monthly Safety Review The Contractor shall carry out monthly safety review of the measures contained within the HSP to demonstrate that the required level of safety are being achieved and maintained and make a full report to UNOPS on each such review. UNOPS will review the HSP from time to time and will advise the Contractor of any matter with which he is not satisfied, and the Contractor shall MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 19
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements take such steps as are necessary to satisfy UNOPS. UNOPS will carry out such safety studies or audits, as considered necessary. The Contractor shall make available specialist personnel, as the UNOPS may consider necessary, for the performance of such safety studies or audits.
7.1.6. Risk Management The Contractor shall conduct a risk assessment in relation to the safety and health risks posed to any person who may be affected by his undertaking prior to the commencement of work in accordance to the UNOPS WSHPP. He shall take all reasonably practicable steps to eliminate any foreseeable risk to any person likely to be affected by his undertaking. He shall maintain a record of risk assessments conducted, including any control measures taken or to be taken and any safe work procedures. The Contractor shall ensure that his employees are informed of the nature of the risks involved, the measures implemented to control the risks and the applicable safe work procedures. Whenever the assessment of a risk is revised, or where control measures or safe work procedures are changed, the Contractor shall inform his employees of such changes.
7.2. SITE SAFETY MEASURES 7.2.1. Fall Prevention The Contractor must develop procedures in a fall protection plan for the construction site if his worker at the work site may fall 3 m or more but guardrails do not protect the worker. He must have a fall protection system in place and available at the construction site before work with a risk of falling begins. In particular, the Contractor must have the following devices and system in place prior to start of the work: . Fall arresting devices such as rope grabs, guard rails, etc. . Safety belts, body harness, lanyards consisting of carabiners, D-rings, O-Rings, ovals rings, self-locking connectors and snap hooks.
7.2.2. Metal Access Scaffold and Working Platforms The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain metal access scaffold for all building blocks that have 2 and more storeys or 3 m and more height. The scaffold shall be erected ahead of the structural work from the second storey and shall be supported by cantilevered platforms erected according to reasonable safety standards. The cantilevered platforms shall project about 1.1 m, or any other approved distance, from the edge of the building. The scaffold shall be erected within 300 mm from the building edge. Where the structure does not allow the scaffold to be erected from the second storey or where the building is less than 12 m in height, the Contractor may erect the scaffold from the first storey, subject to review by UNOPS. The Contractor and his engineer shall ensure that the building structure can resist the load imposed by the scaffold. The scaffold shall be designed to carry metal working platforms and two working levels in use concurrently. The maximum average loading per working level per bay shall be 220 kg/m2. Signboards showing the maximum loading allowed on the scaffold shall be displayed on the scaffold. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain continuous metal work platforms or other types of work platforms at every alternate lift starting from the second lift of the scaffold, the immediate level below the topmost level and the roof level of the building block under construction. Where the height between the work platform at the roof level and the platform directly below is two lifts or less, the latter work platform may not be necessary. No omission from the Contract Sum shall be made in the event that such a work platform is not necessary. The material used for the metal work platform shall be steel. Work platforms shall be adequately secured to scaffolding frames at the required levels. The connections between the work platforms and the scaffolding frames, and between the work platforms, shall be subject to review by UNOPS. For any portion of the work platform where the use of metal is not suitable, the Contractor may use timber platform subject to the review by UNOPS. The platform shall be complete with at least 90 mm high coloured toe boards and metal guardrails at least 1 m above the work platform. The work platform shall be at least 500 mm in width. They shall be used for: . Erecting and dismantling of formwork of structural elements. . Transferring of formwork or other materials from one working level to another. . External finishing works. The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain an overlying screening net to cover the entire external face of the scaffold. The installation of the net shall follow the erection of the scaffold closely. A 90 mm high coloured toe board shall be provided at the base of the net. After installation, there shall be no opening between separate sets of the net, and any torn net shall be
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 20
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements replaced or repaired immediately. The scaffold shall be effectively tied to the building structure by means of tiebacks. All tiebacks shall be painted with bright colour for easy identification. For buildings next to areas less than 30 m away from the site boundary, the Contractor shall provide special mid-height work platform supporting metal access scaffold at the building elevation directly facing public areas, walkways, children playgrounds, schools and other locations with public traffic. This platform shall be installed from the floor level at the mid height of the building and shall project 6 m from the edge of the floor. They shall be supported at the floor level below by diagonal members. Tension tiebacks to upper floors shall not be used. Around the edges of the 6 m platform, guardrails and toe boards shall be provided. Guardrail shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand, without permanent deformation or failure, a 50 kg load applied in any direction at right angles to the guardrail. The work platform and its supports shall be designed by an Engineer to a uniformly distributed live load of 1.5 kg/m² and the loading from the scaffold. Supports for platform shall be spaced at not more than 1.8 m centres.
7.2.3. Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain overhead shelters at every point of entry/ exit of buildings that are two or more storeys in height. The shelters shall be constructed immediately below the second storey. They shall project at least 3 m from the building edge and shall be at least 1.5 m wide. They shall be made of curved metal roofing with a diameter of at least 1.5 m or of pitched metal roofing with a slope greater than one in two, with timber boarding below supported by steel pipes resting on rigid bases. The access to, along and egress from the entry/exit points shall be kept free from obstructions and accumulation of oil, grease, water and other substances that may cause slipping and tripping.
7.2.4. Peripheral Overhead Shelters The Contractor shall provide peripheral overhead shelters for buildings of 15 m or more in height. They shall be erected in place when the construction reaches the third storey slab. They shall be at least 2 m wide and inclined so that the outer edge is at least 150 mm higher than the inner edge. They shall be sufficiently strong to support a weight of at least 75 kg point load.
7.2.5. Barricades to Lift Openings, Voids, Open Sides of Buildings and Excavations The Contractor shall barricade all lift openings, internal voids, open sides of buildings and excavations where a person is liable to fall. At ground level, the barricade shall be at least 2.0 m high and shall be made out of protection netting and warning tape. At sites above plinth height, a protective netting shall be hung from the top of the building to protect any worker from falling down or to protect any passer-by from debris falling from the building under construction.
7.2.6. Dangerous Corners At all approaches and exits, and dangerous corners, danger and warning signals shall be placed to ensure safety of pedestrians and vehicular traffic. In case of platforms, gangways, runs and ramps, dangerous corners shall be protected with fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be 2.0 m and, if necessary, they may be protected with toe boards. All dangerous corners shall be well lighted for night work.
7.2.7. Forms for Concrete Formwork shall be designed after taking into consideration spans, setting temperature of concrete, dead load and working loads to be supported and adequate safety factor for the materials used for formwork. All timber formwork shall be carefully inspected before use and all unacceptable material shall be discarded. As timber cantering usually takes an initial set when vertical load is applied, the design of such centring shall make allowance for this factor. The vertical supports shall be adequately braced or otherwise secured in position so that these do not fail when the load gets released or when the supports are, accidentally hit. In case of timber posts, vertical joints shall be properly designed. The connections shall normally be with bolts and nuts. Use of rusted or spoilt threaded bolts and nuts shall be avoided. Tubular steel centring shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. When tubular, steel and timber centring is to be used in combination, necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid any unequal settlement under load. A thorough inspection of tubular steel centring is necessary before its erection and members showing evidence of excessive rusting, kinks, dents or damaged welds shall be discarded. Buckled or broken members shall be replaced. Care shall also be taken to see that the locking devices are in good working order and that the coupling pins are effectively aligned to frames. Sills under the supports shall be set on firm soil or other suitable material in a pattern that assures adequate stability for all props. Care shall be taken not to disturb the soil under the support. Adequate drainage shall be provided to drain away water coming due to rain, washing of forms or during the curing of the concrete, to avoid softening of the supporting soil strata.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 21
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
All centring shall be regularly inspected to ensure that footings of sills under every post of centring are sound, the centring panels are plumb in both directions and all cross braces are securely in place. During pouring of concrete, the centring shall be constantly inspected and strengthened if required, and wedges below the vertical supports shall be tightened. Adequate protection of centring shall be ensured from moving vehicles or swinging loads. Forms shall not be removed earlier than the limit laid down in the specifications and not until it is certain that the concrete has developed sufficient strength to support itself and all loads that will be imposed on it. Only workmen actually engaged in removing the formwork shall be allowed in the area during these operations. Those engaged in removing the formwork shall wear helmets, gloves and heavy soled shoes, and approved safety belt if adequate footing is not provided above 2 in level. While cutting any, wires in tension, care shall be taken to prevent backlash that might hit the body. Dismantling of supports shall be done under the supervision of a competent engineer and the order of dismantling of individual supports laid down in the instruction sheets shall be closely followed.
7.2.8. Suspended Scaffolds A suspended scaffold system shall only be used for touching up, repair, redecoration and minor work. Where suspended scaffold system is to be used, the Contractor shall notify UNOPS prior to its installation and usage. The safe working load will be prominently displayed. The Contractor shall ensure that these scaffolds are checked by his supervisor weekly and after inclement weather. The scaffolds shall also be check by an Engineer (Civil) every month. Where the use of access scaffolding is not stipulated, suspended scaffold may be used for finishing works. Independent lifelines shall be provided for suspended scaffold riggers and users to anchor their safety harness attached with shock absorbing device.
7.2.9. Mobile Cranes No person shall install, repair, alter or dismantle a mobile crane unless he is an approved mechanic. The Contractor/mechanic shall ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that the mobile crane is erected, installed or modified in such a manner that it is safe, and without risk to health, when properly used. The Contractor shall ensure that the crane access is properly constructed and checked weekly by his supervisor. The boom of the mobile crane with hoisted load shall not be allowed to swing outside the contract boundary without the review by UNOPS. All hoisting areas must be effectively barricaded. The Contractor shall install barriers to warn the crane operator of depressions, excavated areas and other obstructions. The Contractor shall station a lifting supervisor on the site to oversee and guide the crane operator during positioning, hoisting and slewing. He shall ensure that the crane operator carries out daily checks. The cranes must have overhaul checks before being used on the site.
7.2.10. Ladders The Contractor must ensure that ladders with hand rails are in an acceptable sound condition and submit a written inspection report to UNOPS. If the ladders are made of a material other than steel, the Contractor must ensure that the ladder is in sound condition. The Contractor’s worker must ensure that: . The ladder is secured against movement and placed on a base that is stable. . The base of an inclined ladder is no further from the base of the wall or structure than 1.4 times of the height to where the ladder contacts the wall or structure.
7.2.11. Temporary Staircases The Contractor shall provide and maintain a minimum 0.8 m wide temporary metal staircase from one working floor to another. The staircase shall be placed against the adjacent staircase wall or formwork of the staircase walls that are under construction. The outer sides of the staircases shall be provided with metal handrails 1.1 m above the outer staircase strings. The bottom of the staircase shall be covered fully with metal plate.
7.2.12. Refuse Disposal Refuse accumulation shall never be allowed as the resulting loading may be excessive. Materials liable to cause persons to slip or trip and fall shall be cleared immediately. Projecting nails shall be removed or bent over. Discharge of waste concrete on platforms or accumulating bricks on work platforms that could result in a sudden collapse shall be avoided.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 22
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
7.2.13. Temporary Chute for Removal of Construction Debris The Contractor shall provide adequate number of temporary chutes to dispose construction debris from the upper storey of building blocks that are two storey and higher. The chutes shall be erected to follow the structural work. A large bin at the lower end of each chute shall be provided and emptied regularly. Warning signs, such as “DANGER – KEEP OUT” in the Nepali and English languages painted in red on a white background in gloss finishing paint shall be posted at the bin area.
7.2.14. Personal Protective Equipment The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for all workmen employed on the site. The PPE shall consist of the following: . Hearing protection equipment, such as ear defenders, earplugs, etc. (where required). . Eye protection, such as safety eye wears, welding goggles and shields, etc. . Foot protection, such as safety shoes/boots, etc. . Head protection, such as hard hats. . Limb and body protection, such as gloves, reflective vests, etc. . Respirators, as necessary and adequate. . Safety belt with holding hook capable to hold 200 kg weight. The Contractor shall ensure that such PPE comply with the requirements of UNOPS. He shall also ensure that his workmen properly use all equipment during the course of their work. He shall record the issuance of all equipment to his workmen in prescribed forms. Such forms shall be kept in the site office and made available for inspection at all times.
7.2.15. Warning Signs and Lights The Contractor shall display warning signs of size 900 mm x 600 mm at strategic points around the periphery of the site where trespassing is likely to occur. Such signs shall have the words “DANGER – KEEP OUT” in Nepali and English languages painted in red on a white background in gloss finishing paint. Warning lights shall be placed at similar positions at night to serve as warnings.
7.2.16. Gas Cylinders and Related Equipment The Contractor shall use gas cylinders, each fitted with a low pressure gauge, a high pressure gauge, and a reducing valve with pressure regulator and a safety relief device. The gas cylinders shall not be kept in the same room where welding, cutting or heating is being carried out or placed within 5 m of any source of heat. The gas cylinders must always be kept upright in a wheeled-trolley. When lifted by crane, hoist or derrick, cylinders must be placed in cradles or skip box design. Protective valve caps shall also be in place. The hose connecting a gas cylinder to an apparatus for cutting, welding, heating or other related works shall be of good construction and sound material, free from defect, properly maintained and not entangled or kinked. Valves and fittings shall be tested for leak with “soap water” every day before use.
7.2.17. Construction Machinery Dangerous moving parts of moving machinery shall be effectively guarded or made safe by position. Scheduled inspection and maintenance of all machinery shall be carried out. Cleaning, lubrication and maintenance of machines shall only be done after they have come to a complete stop. A lockout system shall be implemented in order to ensure that machines are not restarted while work is being carried out on them. Operators shall be instructed in the operation of the machine before starting work on it. Machinery work areas shall be fenced off to keep out those whose proximity to the machine might endanger them.
Woodworking Machines The following safety devices shall be incorporated onto the woodworking machines: . Adjustable guard that shall cover the cutting tool; . Anti-kickback device where the work piece is liable to be ejected. In the case of circular saws, a riving knife shall be adequate. . Push sticks. Portable woodwork machines shall also incorporate guards.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 23
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
Cleaning of wood waste around the machines shall only be carried out when the machine has stopped and then only with the use of brushes and not bare hands.
Concrete Mixers Moving parts that are liable to become nip points, such as gears, chains and rollers shall be guarded. Hoppers into which a person could fall shall also be guarded. Fencing shall be provided to prevent entry around the zones where hoppers or mixing drums may be tilted or turned. Operators cleaning concrete mixers shall do so outside the rotating drums. Lockout devices shall be provided where workers need to enter. Where concrete mixers are driven by internal combustion engines, exhaust points shall be located away from the workers’ workstation so as to eliminate their exposure to obnoxious fumes.
Concreting Pumping System Concrete pumping workstations shall be provided with overhead covers. Piping shall be secured to prevent movement. Pipelines shall not be attached to temporary structures such as scaffolds and formwork support as the forces and movements may affect their integrity. Pipe connectors, particularly those installed at heights shall be secured against dislodgement, thereby becoming a falling object.
Earth-moving Equipment Earth-moving vehicles shall be provided with standard safety features such as lights, rear mirrors, and for large vehicles, an audible reversing signal. No earth-moving equipment shall be started up until all persons are cleared away. Supervisors and operators shall survey the route of the earth-moving equipment for: . Electrical lines which may be an obstruction; . Rating of bridges and overhead obstructions; . Underground conduits containing service lines; . Slope-gradients. Where the equipment has to slew around as part of the operation, such as a back-hoe, and where there are other workers in its proximity, a signaller shall be present to direct the operator.
7.2.18. Housekeeping The Contractor shall maintain and ensure a safe working environment by keeping the site neat and tidy and free from hazards and debris. Materials shall be stacked up safely. All work areas and access thereto shall be kept free from hazards and debris. Housekeeping shall be carried out in such a manner and at such times so as not to cause any inconvenience to either the adjoining occupiers or the public. Debris shall be wetted to minimize the risk of dust. Containers for debris and rubbish are to be provided at the designated places.
7.2.19. Safety Information Signboard and Assembly Stage The Contractor shall erect and maintain a Safety Information Signboard and Assembly Stage. The signboard shall be 6 m x 3 m, made of timber plywood and fixed at a steel frame. The signboard shall consist of safety posters, safety theme and pictures, safety news, photos of good safety measures and one 600 mm x 1500 mm mirror. The safety posters, news and photos shall be protected from weather. The arrangement and size of display of all items referred herein shall be submitted to the UNOPS. The Assembly Stage shall be constructed in front of the signboard and made of concrete. It shall consist of a raised platform 4.5 m x 1.0 m with at least one step. The location of the signboard and stage shall be review by UNOPS. As and when instructed by UNOPS, the Contractor shall remove or relocate and reconstruct the signboard and stage, and reinstate all the affected ground to the satisfaction of UNOPS, all at the cost and expense of the Contractor. On substantial completion of the Works, the signboard and stage shall be cleared away upon the review of UNOPS.
7.2.20. Safety Reflective Apparel (Traffic Control) A worker designated to control traffic shall wear approved type of reflective apparel during all hours of the day when so engaged. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 24
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
7.2.21. Health Measures Noise Management The Contractor shall, as far as practicable, ensure that all processes, machines and equipment used do not cause workers to be exposed to excessive noise, i.e. above an equivalent sound level of 85 dB for 8 hour workday. This can be done by implementing one or more of the following measures: . Engineering noise control, e.g., modifying noisy processes, machines and equipment, relocating noisy processes or isolating them within enclosures, erecting sound barriers, reducing kinetic or potential energy and regularly maintaining machines and equipment. . Administrative noise control, e.g., rotating noisy jobs among workers so that they are not exposed to noise above the permissible exposure limit. . Using quiet machines and equipment when such machines and equipment are available in the market. Examples are generators, compressors and concrete breakers. The Contractor shall provide hearing protectors for workers who are exposed to excessive noise and ensure that they are worn at all times. Warning signs to remind workers that hearing protectors must be worn shall be put up at areas with excessive noise. . Contract workers should be trained and educated on the hazards of noise as well as noise control and prevention.
First Aid All workplaces as specified within the class or description shall establish and implement a first-aid program to provide emergency treatment to victims of accidents, chemical poisoning or excessive exposure to toxic substances. The program shall include: . First-aid facilities; . First-aid boxes; . First-aid room, where there are 500 or more workers at site; . First-aid treatment procedures; . First aid for exposure to toxic or corrosive substances; . Standard procedures; . Maintenance of first-aid facilities. All first-aid provisions shall comply with UNOPS Health & Safety (First-Aid) Regulations.
7.2.22. Fire Protection At every level of construction where combustible materials are liable to be used or stored, a 9 kg dry powder extinguisher shall be provided. Where the travel distance exceeds 30 m, additional ones shall be provided. Two and a half kg extinguishers shall be placed near switchboards. Trained personnel shall be available on the site at all times. All workers at the site shall be trained to operate the extinguisher. The fire alarm procedure and the evacuation sequence shall be clearly spelt out and the workforce notified. In workplaces where fire hazards are potentially more hazardous, drills shall be carried out. Combustible and flammable materials shall be stored away from the source of heat such as generators, welding sets and electrical distribution boxes.
7.2.23. Ventilation and Lighting Enclosed workplaces in which there is a build-up of heat, dangerous gases or dust shall be adequately ventilated. Construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors, offices and shops, where work is in progress, shall be adequately lighted with either natural or artificial illumination. Low voltage lighting is recommended.
7.2.24. Dust Elimination The surfaces of haul and access roads shall be kept moist. Masks shall be provided to the workers in concrete batching, mixing plant and in places where the cement is handled.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 25
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
7.2.25. Work in Confined Space Where work is to be carried out in any confined space as defined in UNOPS, code of practice for entry into and safe working in confined spaces shall be followed.
7.2.26. Demolition Uncontrolled collapse of walls or other structures under demolition shall be prevented. Walls and structures liable to collapse on workers shall be broken up gradually from the top downwards. Scaffolds shall be provided to allow for this procedure. Throwing of materials over the sides of the structure shall not be permitted. The dust levels due to demolition shall be controlled. Special procedures shall be followed at sites where dangerous materials, such as asbestos, are present. The following actions shall be carried out before demolition is started: . Disconnect all service lines e.g. gas, electricity and water. . Fence off the building under demolition, providing a safety zone between the building and the fencing as much as possible. Where required, hoardings shall be provided. . Remove glass pieces and sharp materials. . Support structures that might collapse dangerously. . Waste materials shall be cleared and removed as demolition proceeds so as to prevent overloading which might lead to a cascade of floor collapse. Where materials are removed manually, rubbish chutes shall be installed. Where demolition is carried out near public areas: . Hoardings sloping inwards shall be erected around the building; . Protective nettings shall be hung around the building to prevent materials falling outside the periphery shelter. Where asbestos materials are present, appropriate dust control and respiratory protection approved by the local authority must be used.
7.2.27. Excavations No person shall enter or be permitted to enter an excavation that does not comply with this part. Work shall not be performed in a trench unless another worker is working above ground in close proximity to the trench or to the means of access to it. The type of soil in which an excavation is made shall be determined by visual and physical examination of the soil at the walls of the excavation and within a horizontal distance from each wall equal to the depth of the excavation measured away from the excavation. Before an excavation is begun, gas, electrical and other services in and near the area to be excavated shall be accurately located and marked. If a service may pose a hazard, the service shall be shut off and disconnected. An excavation in which a worker may work shall have a clear work space of at least 450 mm between the wall of the excavation and any formwork or masonry and similar wall. The walls of an excavation shall be stripped of loose rock or other material that may slide, roll or fall upon a worker. A level area extending at least one meter from the upper edge of each wall of an excavation shall be kept clear of equipment, excavated soil, rock and construction material. The stability of a wall of an excavation shall be maintained where it may be affected by stockpiling excavated soil or rock or construction materials. No person shall operate a vehicle or other machine and no vehicle or other machine shall be located in such a way as to affect the stability of a wall of an excavation. If a person could fall into an excavation that is more than 2.4 m deep, a barrier at least 1.1 m high shall be provided at the top of every wall of the excavation that is not sloped. Where the excavation is a trench and the depth exceeds six m or the width exceeds 3.6 m, a support system consisting of either timber or of an engineered support system designed for the specific location and project shall be installed.
7.2.28. Welding, Riveting and Cutting Welding and cutting operations shall be done by workmen thoroughly trained for the job or trainees who are under competent supervision. Workers engaged in welding, riveting and cutting shall be provided with protective clothing, hand gloves, sleeves and boots as per relevant Indian Standards. Workers engaged in welding and cutting shall be provided with protective goggles. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 26
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
7.2.29. Painting Paints containing lead or lead products shall not be used. Facemasks shall be supplied to workers when paint is applied in the form of spray or when a surface having lead paint is dry rubbed and scrapped. As most paint materials are highly combustible, every precaution shall be taken to eliminate danger from fire. Packages containing paints, varnishes, lacquers or other volatile painting materials shall be kept tightly closed when not in actual use and shall be placed where they shall not be exposed to excessive heat, spark, flame or direct rays of the sun.
7.2.30. Electrical Works Where work to be carried out involves electricity/power, installing temporary wiring, usage of power tools and equipment, no worker shall connect, maintain or modify electrical tools, equipment or installation unless the worker is a qualified electrician. The Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to prevent hazards to workers from energized electrical equipment, installations and conductors. No person, other than a person authorized to do so by the Contractor, shall enter or be permitted to enter a room or other enclosure containing exposed energized electrical parts. The entrance to a room or other enclosure containing exposed energized electrical parts shall be marked by conspicuous warning signs stating that entry by unauthorized persons is prohibited. All electrical equipment, installations, conductors and insulating materials shall be suitable for their intended use and shall be installed, maintained, modified and operated so as not to pose a hazard to a worker. The Contractor shall use mats, shields or other protective devices or equipment, including personal protective equipment, adequate to protect the worker from electrical shock and burns.
7.2.31. Control of Traffic If vehicle traffic at the construction site is dangerous to workers, pedestrians and school children on foot, the Contractor and his workers must ensure that the traffic movement is controlled to protect against accident related injuries and fatalities. The Contractor must designate a worker to control traffic on the construction site and must ensure that the designated traffic controller wears a reflective vest, safety footwear and hard hat. The passage of vehicles across a footpath shall be supervised to remove danger to the school children and the public. The Contractor and his workers must be vigilant at all times and must ensure that pedestrians and school children do not cross the safety barriers and enter the construction site.
7.2.32. Occupational Health and Environmental Controls Shelter from adverse weather conditions shall be provided. Toilet facilities shall be provided and maintained in a clean condition. Washing facilities with running water shall be provided. Potable drinking water shall be provided. Food supplies of adequate quality shall be available or provided in canteens on site. All rest areas, canteens toilets and washing facilities shall be adequate in number, convenient to the work areas and kept clean, well-lit and ventilated. Toilet facilities shall be easily accessible, especially to those working on very tall buildings. Adequate facilities shall be provided for the changing drying and storing of clothing. Waste disposal bins shall be provided for the disposal of garbage. All workers shall be checked by the foreman before being hired to make sure they are physically capable of the work and are free from obvious signs of sickness. Workers who have to work at heights shall be checked by the foreman before starting work each day. Any worker showing signs of sickness shall not be allowed to work at heights.
7.2.33. Others The Contractor shall provide and maintain guards, fences or barriers around the construction site, excavations, lift pits or other similar potential places of danger to prevent accidents. The guards, fences and barriers shall be of sound material, good construction and possess adequate strength.
7.3. NON-COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS In the event of contravention or non-compliance with the safety specifications, UNOPS shall suspend the progress of works or any part of them if necessary for the safety of the works or if he is of the opinion that the working environment or procedure is unsafe for the works to continue. In such an event, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claims for compensation or extension of time for completion.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 27
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
7.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section. It is deemed that all the cost for above requirements are covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 28
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
Attachment with reference to section 8.1.3 Safety Provisions Undertaking Form
Date:
To: United Nations Office for Project Services, Bishalnagar, Kathmandu, Nepal.
Attn: Project Manager, Modernization and Improvement of Policing Project in Nepal
Subject: Contract Reference Number: … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …; Safety provisions at: … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
I, … … … … … … … … … … … … (Name of Managing Director) of … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (Name of firm) understand that as the Contractor for the above worksite /work area /order, it is my duty and responsibility to ensure that the provisions of UNOPS Health and Safety Policy & Procedures, and any amendments or re-enactments thereto are complied with.
… … … … … … … … … … … … (Name) Managing Director (Name of Firm) (Firm’s seal)
Copy: UNOPS Health & Safety Officer
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 29
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
8. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL 8.1. GENERAL Some generic environmental impacts can be expected during the construction of the project structures. These impacts can be mitigated by the measures contained in this section so that the works are performed in conformity with national environmental standards.
8.2. LANDSCAPE AND VISUAL QUALITY Impacts Deterioration of visual quality of surrounding landscape and buildings due to the following: . Generally stark appearance of under-construction building. . Unmanaged heaping of construction material and wastes, resulting in a cluttered site.
Mitigation Measures . Maintain construction site free from rubbish. . Conduct regular housekeeping to include removal of rubbish, construction waste and proper storage of construction material.
8.3. AIR QUALITY Impacts Impacts on local air quality due to the following factors: . Fugitive dust generation in and around the construction area from earthworks, demolition, stockpiles, etc. . Generation of diesel exhaust from heavy equipment and generators.
Mitigation Measures . Remove spoil /muck from construction sites at the earliest practicable. . Cover loose materials (sand, aggregates, etc.) and muck/spoil at stockpiles and during their transportation. . Regularly sprinkle water in construction area to minimize dust generation. . Keep surrounding environment free of debris. . Prohibit open burning of construction /waste material at the site. . Provide PPE (masks, etc.) to workers, engineers and supervisors at construction sites. . Ensure that all construction equipment and vehicles are in good operating condition. . Ensure that all project vehicles comply with national emission standards. . Prohibit excessive idling of construction vehicles at site. . Ensure proper collection and disposal of sewerage and solid wastes in camps, offices and work areas.
8.4. SURFACE WATER Impacts Construction activities can result in: . Increased turbidity of runoff water due to soil erosion. . Increase in hardscaping, with a resulting incremental increase in surface water runoff. . Contamination of runoff due to leaking fuel or lubricants from construction equipment.
Mitigation Measures . Prevent soil erosion by careful grading of the construction site so that significant amounts of water are not allowed run off from the site into adjacent drainages.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 30
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
. Where excavated soils are stored on site, implement adequate measures, including covering exposed soils, construction of settling basins or erection of physical barriers, to control runoff. . Provide fuel storage with adequate containment measures to capture spills. . Minimize generation of oil and lubricants, debris and any form of waste (particularly petroleum and chemical wastes) and prevent their entry into waterways. . Maintain machinery and equipment in good working condition and inspect regularly for leaks. . Conduct maintenance of equipment or machinery onsite only over non-permeable areas with adequate containment measures to capture spills. . Avoid accumulation of oil wastes in depressions to avoid contamination of the ground water system. . Store spent lubricants and unused toxic chemicals separately in plastic drums in a safe and shaded place and discharge them as approved.
8.5. GROUND WATER Impacts . Contamination of runoff due to leaking fuel or lubricants from construction equipment and fuel stores. . Incremental decrease in groundwater percolation due to increase in hardscaping.
Mitigation Measures . Implement all measures under item 4 above. . Use of paving with pervious joints (e.g. concrete blocks) to allow surface water percolation.
8.6. NOISE Impacts . Noise pollution from the use of heavy construction equipment and machinery.
Mitigation Measures . Ensure that all processes, machines and equipment implement one or more of the following measures: ▫ Engineering noise control, e.g., modifying noisy processes, machines and equipment, relocating noisy processes or isolating them within enclosures, erecting sound barriers, reducing kinetic or potential energy and regularly maintaining machines and equipment. ▫ Using quiet machines and equipment (generators, compressors and concrete breakers) when such machines and equipment are available in the market. ▫ Provide hearing protectors for workers who are exposed to excessive noise and ensure that they are worn at all times. ▫ Install warning signs in areas with excessive noise to remind workers that hearing protectors must be worn. . To the extent practicable, conduct construction activities during normal working times. Where necessary, conduct short duration operations after advance coordination with the project team and nearby inhabitants. . Implement a community outreach program to ensure that local residents are aware of the purpose of the construction activities and have an opportunity to report any impacts.
8.7. SOLID, HAZARDOUS AND SPECIAL WASTES Impacts . Solid waste generation from construction activities, including demolition and excavation. . Contamination through accidental spillage or unearthing of hazardous or special wastes on the project sites.
Mitigation Measures . Transport solid wastes off site and dispose of in a disposal site previously approved by the relevant authority.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 31
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
. Cease all construction activities in the event any buried hazardous wastes are uncovered during excavation.
8.8. TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION Impacts . Additional truck traffic and potential traffic congestion on local streets/roads. . Potential threat to pedestrian safety due to additional traffic.
Mitigation Measures . Scheduled delivery of materials and equipment to the site during periods of light traffic (e.g. early morning or late afternoon). . Where necessary, provide pedestrian access-way improvements, including sidewalks, fencing, or alternate routes, and prior to commencing construction activities. . Provide flagmen and other traffic control measures to avoid conflicts between construction traffic and other vehicles and /or pedestrians.
8.9. UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE Impacts . Loss of life or limb from disturbance to or handling of unexploded ordnance (UXO) uncovered during construction.
Mitigation Measures . Immediately vacated and secured area where a potential UXO is identified and notify qualified and authorized disposal organization to dispose it. . Conduct excavation below the depth or outside the area that has already been cleared only after approval from relevant authorities. . Provide onsite UXO safety training to all workers on identifying potential UXO and the appropriate response.
8.10. TERRESTRIAL AND AQUATIC ECOLOGY Impacts . Loss of trees and vegetation due to: ▫ Cleaning and grubbing for construction. ▫ Increased demand for fuel wood for cooking and other purposes by Contractor’s workforce. . Loss of terrestrial and aquatic animals due to: ▫ Ground contamination by fuel spills, etc. ▫ Increased turbidity in water courses/bodies due to soil erosion and contamination due to fuel spills, etc. ▫ Hunting and fishing by workforce.
Mitigation Measures . Selective and absolutely mandatory cutting and/or removal of trees, after prior approval from UNOPS. . Provision of alternative means of cooking, such as kerosene or electric stoves, to workforce. . Prohibit hunting and fishing in and around construction site. . Create awareness amongst workforce regarding importance of ecology conservation.
8.11. SOCIOECONOMICS Impacts . Influx of large number of skilled and semi-skilled workers into the project area, resulting in conflict of interest between locals and migrants, deterioration of law and order, gambling, increased alcohol consumption, prostitution, etc.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 32
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
. Generation of employment and small business opportunities for local residents. c. Skill and capability enhancement of local workmen and residents.
Mitigation Measures . Create awareness on need for good social habits amongst migrant works and strict monitoring of their activities. . Good coordination with local security agencies, stakeholders and residents to maintain security and social harmony. . Priority to local employment and local skill development.
8.12. CULTURAL Impacts . Uncovering of buried cultural or archaeological resources during construction activities.
Mitigation Measures . Immediately cease construction activities in the area where cultural or archaeological resources are unearthed. . Contact appropriate government office for necessary action and authorization for further construction.
8.13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section. It is deemed that all the costs for above requirements are covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 33
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
9. NOTICE BOARD 9.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall erect a notice board at each of the work sites giving details of the contract in the format and wording as below or as directed by the Engineer.
NEPAL POLICE
MODERNISATION & IMPROVEMENT OF POLICING PROJECT (MIPP)
[Name of Contract] [Contract Reference Number]
Project Sites
mm 00 [aaa, xxx] District [bbb, yyy] District 8 [ccc, xxx] District [ddd, yyy] District 1 [eee, xxx] District [fff, yyy] District
Starting Date: [dd-mmm-yyyy] Completion Date: [dd-mmm-yyyy] Contractor: [Name and address]
Funded by: Implemented by:
1200 mm
9.2. ERECTION TIMING AND DURATION These boards shall be erected within 14 days after the Contractor has been given the Possession of Site and shall remain in place in good condition until the end of Defects Liability Period.
9.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement or separate payment shall be made for the works under this section. It is deemed that all the costs for above requirements are covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 34
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
10. SITE MEETINGS 10.1. WEEKLY SITE MEETINGS The Contractor’s senior site representative shall report weekly to the Engineer on the status of each activity planned for the period under consideration and to review construction progress and consider matters arising from or having a bearing on the Contract.
10.2. MONTHLY SITE MEETINGS Generally, at monthly intervals during the Contract or at shorter or longer intervals as project conditions dictate, or as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor’s senior head office representative and others shall report to the Employer and the Engineer, at site progress meetings, which will be held to review construction progress and consider matters arising from or having a bearing on the Contract. The agenda for each meeting will be prepared and issued by the Engineer.
10.3. ATTENDANCE The Contractor’s senior site representative shall attend each meeting, together with such other members of its staff as may be required. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the attendance of representatives of its sub-contractors and suppliers.
10.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for the works under this section. It is deemed that the costs for these works are covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 35
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part I, General Requirements
11. DEMOBILIZATION 11.1. GENERAL This Section covers the works to be performed by the Contractor prior to demobilizing from the Site. All of these works shall be performed to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
11.2. FINAL CLEANING Before handing over the site to the Employer, the Contractor shall clean the entire building, including its interior and exterior surfaces. He shall clear all construction wastes debris from the site and dispose them at an approved location in an acceptable manner. He shall also remove surplus materials from the Site.
11.3. REINSTATEMENT The Contractor shall clean and repair any damage caused to the Site by the installation or use of any temporary works by him. He shall restore existing facilities that were used during construction to their original condition.
11.4. CONDITION-OUT SURVEY Following reinstatement, the Engineer and Contractor shall conduct a condition-out survey to identify damages caused to any pre- existing temporary or permanent on-site property by the Contractor during the execution of his works. The Contractor shall repair such damages at his own cost in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Alternatively, the Engineer may deduct the cost of such repairs from the Contractor’s final invoice.
11.5. ADJOINING PROPERTY The Engineer, Contractor and owners/occupants of adjoining properties whose conditions were recorded prior to commencement of construction shall inspect these properties and recording any damage that has occurred to them since the pre- commencement inspection. Any damage thus identified shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Alternatively, the Engineer may deduct the cost of such repairs from the Contractor’s final invoice.
11.6. DOCUMENT SUBMISSION The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Engineer after completion of the construction: a) Material test certificates b) As-built drawings c) Warranty statements d) List of suppliers with their contact information e) Spare materials, where applicable.
11.7. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY WORKS AND PLANTS Within ten working days of handover, the Contractor shall remove from the site temporary works and construction plants no longer required at the Site. However, he shall be allowed to retain at the Site those temporary works and construction plants that may be required by him for the purpose of fulfilling his obligations during the Defects Liability Period.
11.8. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment shall be made to the Contractor for the works under this section. It is deemed that the costs for these works are covered under appropriate unit prices tendered by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 36
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
ANNEX A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PART II, CIVIL WORKS
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page i
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Table of Contents
1. Materials and Testing of Materials ...... 3 2. Clearing and Grubbing ...... 12 3. Demolition ...... 14 4. Earthwork in Excavation ...... 16 5. Earthwork in Fill ...... 21 6. Cement Concrete Works ...... 24 7. Reinforcement ...... 33 8. Formwork for Concrete ...... 35 9. Joints ...... 38 10. Brickwork ...... 42 11. Stone Masonry ...... 45 12. General Timber Works ...... 48 13. Wooden Doors and Windows ...... 51 14. Mild Steel Works ...... 55 15. Metal Doors and Windows ...... 57 16. Polished Stone Flooring ...... 60 17. Tiling Works ...... 62 18. Metal Truss and CGI Roofing ...... 65 19. Waterproofing ...... 68 20. Plaster Work ...... 69 21. Painting Works ...... 73 22. Landscaping ...... 80
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page ii
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
1. MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS 1.1. SCOPE This section covers the general requirements relating to materials, the specific requirements for basic materials, the tests and methods of testing which are required for the section and quality control of materials.
1.2. QUALITY OF MATERIAL The materials supplied and used in the works shall comply with the requirements of these Specifications. They shall be new, except as provided elsewhere in the contract or permitted by the Engineer in writing. The materials shall be manufactured, handled and used skilfully to ensure completed works to comply with the contract.
1.3. SOURCES OF MATERIALS The use of any in-kind or class of material from more than one source is prohibited, except by written permission of the Engineer. Such permission, if granted, shall set forth the conditions under which the change may be made. The sources or kinds of material shall not be changed without written permission of the Engineer. If the product of any source proves unacceptable, the Contractor shall make necessary arrangements for the supply of acceptable material. Any claims for compensation associated with such arrangements or changes shall not be considered, unless the source of the unacceptable material is designated in the contract as a source of material. In the case of borrow pits, gravel, sand, binder, soil deposits and rock quarries, the “source of material designated in the contract” shall be construed to mean: . any restricted area (within the pit or quarry) which is designated as the source of material; or . the entire area of the pit or quarry, if no such restricted area is designated. Movements of equipment within the “source” as above defined shall not be considered as a “change of source” Selection and exploitation of material sources as well as use of the materials shall follow the UNOPS Environmental Guidelines. When any manufactured product, either new or used is to be furnished by the Employer, the location at which such material shall be delivered to the Contractor shall be designated in the contract. In such cases, the Contractor shall haul the materials from the designated delivery point to the point of use. The compensation for such hauling shall be included in the contract unit rate for placing the materials in the finished work.
1.4. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIAL Final inspection and acceptance of materials shall be made only at the site of the work. The Engineer reserves the right to sample, inspect, and test the materials throughout the duration of the works and to reject any materials which are found to be unsatisfactory. A preliminary inspection of materials may be made at the source for the convenience and accommodation of the Contractor, but the presence of a representative of the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing materials complying with their Specification. The representative of the Engineer shall have free entry at all times to those parts of any plant which concern production of the Materials ordered.
1.5. MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES 1.5.1. Order for Materials and Manufactured Articles The Contractor shall, before placing any order for materials and manufactured articles for incorporation in the Works, submit to the Engineer the names of the firms from whom he propose to obtain such materials and manufactured articles, giving for each firm a description of the materials and manufactured articles to be supplied, their origin, the manufacturer’s specification, quality, weight, strength and other relevant details. The Contractor shall submit the samples of such materials and manufactured articles when requested by the Engineer and when appropriate, manufacturer’s certificates of recent test carried out on similar materials and manufactured articles shall also be submitted.
1.5.2. Storage All materials and manufactured articles shall be stored on site in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall carefully protect all work, materials and manufactured articles from the weather and vermin.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 3
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
1.5.3. Test Certificates When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to him all Test Certificates from the suppliers/manufacturers of the materials and/or manufactured articles to be used for the contract. Such certificates shall certify that the materials and/or manufactured articles concerned have been tested in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. All Test results shall be enclosed along with such certificates. The Contractor shall provide adequate means of identifying the materials and/or manufactured articles delivered on the site with the corresponding certificates.
1.5.4. Defective Materials All materials not conforming to the requirements of the contract shall be rejected whether in place or not. They shall be removed immediately from the site unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Even after rectification of the defects no rejected material shall be used in the work unless approved by the Engineer in writing. Upon failure of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the Engineer given under this Clause, the Engineer shall have authority to cause the removal and replacement of rejected material and to deduct the cost thereof from any monies due to the Contractor.
1.5.5. Trade Names and Alternatives For convenience in designation in the contract, certain articles or material to be incorporated in the work may be designated under a trade name or the name of a manufacturer and his catalogue information. The use of an alternative article or material which is of equal or better quality and of the required characteristics for the purpose intended shall be permitted, subject to the following requirements: a) The proof as to the quality and suitability of alternatives shall be submitted by the Contractor. He shall also furnish all information necessary as required by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the quality and suitability of alternative articles or materials and his decision shall be the final and binding upon the Contractor b) Whenever the specifications permit the substitution of a similar or equivalent material or articles, no tests or action relating to the approval of such substitute material shall be made until the request for substitution is made in writing by the Contractor accompanied by complete data as to the equality of the material or article proposed. Such request shall be made well in advance to permit approval without delaying the work.
1.5.6. Foreign Materials Materials which are manufactured, produced or fabricated outside Nepal shall be delivered at a point in Nepal as specified in the contract where they shall be retained for a sufficient time to permit inspection, sampling, and testing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside Nepal and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to deliver materials obtained from outside Nepal to the point of delivery in Nepal. The Contractor shall supply the facilities and arrange for testing required at his own cost. All testing by the Contractor shall be subject to witnessing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a “Certificate of Compliance” with the specifications form the manufacturer, producer or fabricator of foreign material where required. In addition, certified mill test reports clearly identifiable to the lot of material shall be furnished where required in these Specifications or otherwise requested by the Engineer. Where structural materials requiring mill test reports are obtained from foreign manufacturers, such materials shall be furnished only from those foreign manufacturer who have previously established, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the sufficiency of their in-plant quality control, as deemed necessary by the Engineer or his representative, to give satisfactory assurance of their ability to furnish material uniformly and consistently in conformance with their Specifications. At the option of the Engineer, such sufficiency shall be established whether by submission of detailed written proof thereof or through in-plant inspection by the Engineer or his representative. If the welding of steel for structural steel members or the casting and pre-stressing of pre-cast pre-stressed concrete members is to be performed outside of Nepal, the following requirements shall apply: a) Such fabrication shall be performed only within the plants and by fabricators who have previously established to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that they have the experience, knowledge, trained manpower, quality control, equipment and other facilities required to produce the quality and quantity of the work required. At the option of the Engineer, prequalification of plant and fabricator shall be established either by the submission of detailed written proof thereof or through in-plant inspection by the Engineer or his representative, or both. b) The Contractor shall make written application to the Engineer for approval for such foreign fabrication at the earliest possible time and in no case later than 60 calendar days in advance of the planned start of fabrication. The application shall list the specific units or portion of a work which shall be fabricated outside of Nepal. c) The Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, at least 20 calendar days in advance of the actual start of any such foreign fabrication.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 4
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
d) All documents pertaining to the contract, including but not limited to, correspondence, tender documents, working drawings and data shall be written in the English/Nepali language and all numerical data shall use the metric system of units of measurement.
1.6. CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIAL 1.6.1. Classification of Rocks and Soil
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 5
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
1.6.2. Classes of Material Quality Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable crushed rock, crushed gravel or natural gravel corresponding to the following classes and demonstrating the corresponding properties as tabulated below: . Class A: Aggregate shall consist of crushed igneous or quartzite rock from an approved source. . Class B: Aggregate shall consist of crushed quarry rock other than class A from an approved source. . Class C: Aggregate shall consist of natural or partly crushed gravel pebbles obtained from an approved gravel deposit. It may contain a quantity of material obtained from crushing the oversize stone in the deposit provide such material is uniformly mixed with the natural uncrushed particles. . Class D: Aggregate shall consist entirely of crushed gravel. The crushed gravel shall be produce from material retained on a standard sieve having an opening at least twice as large as the maximum size of aggregate particle specified. . Class E: Aggregate shall consist an artificial mixture of any of the above classes of aggregate. The aggregate use of Class E aggregate and the relative proportions of the constituent materials shall be approved by the Engineer. Los Angeles Aggregate Crushing Sodium Sulphate Material Degradability Flakiness Crushing Abrasion Value Value or Aggregate Soundness test, loss Classes Test (%) Index (%) Ratio (%) (%) Impact Value (%) on 5 cycles (%) A <25 <20 <12 <5 <20 100 B <30 <20 <12 <5 <25 100 C C1 <35 <25 <12 <5 <25 80 C2 <30 <20 <12 <5 <25 - D D1 <40 <30 <12 <5 <30 60 D2 <35 <20 <12 <5 <30 - E E1 >35 & <50 <25 <18 <10 - - E2 >40 & <50 <30 <18 <10 - - E3 >50 <30 <18 - - -
1.7. DEFINITION OF GENERAL TYPES OF MATERIALS The following definitions shall apply to materials in this Section and other relevant Sections. a) “Topsoil” shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. It shall include all turf acceptable for trufing. b) “Suitable Material” shall comprise all that is acceptable in accordance with the contract for use in the works and which is capable of being compacted to form a stable fill having side slopes as indicated in the Drawing. The material used in fill (except rock fill) shall not contain rock fragments with dimensions of more than 75 mm. c) “Unsuitable Material” shall mean other than suitable material and shall include: . Material from swamps, marshes or bogs; . Peat, logs, stumps, perishable material, organic clays; . Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion; . Material in a frozen condition; . Clay of liquid limit exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding 45. d) “Rock fill” shall consist of hard material of suitable size for deposition and compaction of broken stones. e) “Well Graded Granular Material” Consisting of gravel and/or sand shall conform to Part II, Section 1, Clause 1.6. f) “Rock Fall”, coarse alluvial material shall be loose soils such as moraines, debris, or alluvial material containing large blocks or large boulders, individual blocks or boulders of hard materials greater than 0.3 m3 each in volume, shall be classified as hard
1.8. SIEVE IS sieve shall be used for all tests. Based on IS-460 the standard sieves series shall be as follows: 125; 90; 75; 63; 50; 45; 40; 37.5; 31.5; 25; 22.4; 20; 19; 16; 12.5; 11.2; 10; 9.5; 8; 6.3; 5.6; 4.75; 4.00; 2.8; 2.36; 2; 1.7; 1.4; 1.18; 1; 0.85; 0.71; 0.6; 0.5; 0.425; 0.400; 0.300; 0.250; 0.212; 0.180; 0.150; 0.125; 0.090; 0.075 mm
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 6
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
1.9. TESTING OF MATERIALS 1.9.1. Soil and Gravels Sampling of soil and gravels shall be carried out as specified or as directed by the Engineer and shall be prepared for testing as indicated in IS 2720 part I, except that: . The mass (in g) of a sample required for sieve analysis is about 400D, D being the maximum particle size (mm) . Sample containing particles larger than 19mm size shall be prepared for compaction and CBR tests as described hereunder, provided the proportion in weight of such particles is less than 30%: An adequate quantity of representative material shall be sieved over the 50 mm and 19mm sieve shall be weighed and replaced with an with an equal mass of material passing the 19 mm sieve and retained on the 4.75 mm sieve. The material for replacement shall be taken from the remaining portion of the main sample. When preparing gravel samples, the aggregations of particles shall be broken with a wooden or rubber hammer or pestle. Care shall be taken that no individual particles are crushed in the operation. Tests on soils and gravels shall be performed in accordance with the following standard methods: Test Test procedure Determination of: i) Moisture IS 2720 Part 2 (Oven-drying method) ii) Liquid Limit IS 2720 Part 5 (Cone Penetrometer or by Casagrande apparatus) iii) Plastic Limit IS 2720 Part 5 iv) Plasticity Index IS 2720 Part 5 v) Linear Shrinkage IS 2720 Part 20 vi) Specific Gravity of Particles IS 2720 Part 3 vii) Particles Size Distribution IS 2720 Part 4 viii) Organic Matter content IS 2720 Part 22 ix) Total Sulphate Content IS 2720 Part 27 x) pH Value IS 2720 Part 26 (Electrometric Method) xi) Mica Content - Manual mineralogical counting xii) Density - Moisture Content relationship (2.5 kg IS 2720 Part 7 rammer) xiii) Density - Moisture Content relationship (4.9 kg IS 2720 Part 8 rammer) xiv) California Bearing Ratio IS 2720 Part 16 xv) Sand Equivalent IS 2720 Part 37 (Mechanical Shaker or Manual Shaker Method) xvi) Field Dry Density IS 2720 Part 28/Part 29 xvii) Unconfined compression test IS 2720 Part 10 xviii) Unconfined compression test IS 2720 Part 15 xix) Direct shear test IS 2720 Part 13 xx) Triaxial test IS 2720 Part 11, 12 xxi) Hydrometer analysis IS 2720 Part 4 xxii) Vane shear test IS 2720 Part 30
1.9.2. Stone, Aggregate, Sand and Fillers Sampling shall be carried out as per ASTM-D75 and the samples shall be prepared in accordance with IS 2486 or according to sampling procedures specified for the Standard Methods of testing as follows: Tests Test Procedure Determination of: i) Particle Size Distribution (Gradation) IS 2386 Part 1 ii) Clay, Silt, Dust in Aggregates Part 2 iii) Flakiness Index IS 2386 Part 1 iv) Specific Gravity IS 2386 Part 3 v) Moisture Content IS 2386 Part 3 vi) Bulk Density, Voids & Bulking IS 2386 Part 3 vii) Soluble Chloride Content IS 2386 Part 117 viii) Mica Content BS 812 ix) Water Absorption Manual mineralogical Counting x) Crushing Ratio IS 2386 Part 3 xi) Los Angeles Abrasion Manual counting & weighing
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 7
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
xii) AIV-ACV IS 2386 Part 4 xiii) Polished Stone Value IS 2386 Part 4 xiv) Degradability Test IS 2386 Part 4 xv) Sodium Sulphate Soundness NFP 94 - 067 xvi) Alkali Aggregate Reactivity Test IS 2386 Part 5 xvii) Bitumen Adhesiveness (Vialit Test) IS 2386 Part 7 xviii) Deleterious Substances NFP-98-274-1 xix) Sand Equivalent xx) Crushing Strength of Stone IS 2386 Part 2 IS 2720 Part 37 IS 2386 Part 4
Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the nominal size called for in the contract and shall be of the grading as single sized aggregate or graded aggregate of nominal size 40 mm, 20 mm, 12.5 mm and 10 mm in accordance with IS 383. Other properties shall be set out below: . Flakiness Index (FI): When tested in accordance with IS 2386 Part 1, FI for ordinary concrete and high quality concrete should not exceed 25 and 15 respectively. If the Flakiness Index of the coarse aggregate varies by more than five units from the average value of the aggregate used in the approved trial mix, then a new set of trial mixes shall be carried out if the workability of the mixes has been adversely affected by such variation. . Water Absorption: Not more than 2% when tested as set out in IS 2386 Part 3. . Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA): Not more than 45% for ordinary concrete, and not more than 35% for high quality concrete, when tested in accordance with IS 2386 Part 4. . Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV): Not more than 30% for pavement structure and not more than 45% for other structure when tested in accordance with IS 2486 Part 4. . Alkali Aggregate Reactivity: Comply with IS 383/3.2 notes when tested in accordance with IS 386 Part 7.
1.9.3. Water for Concrete and Mortar Water shall be clean and free from harmful matter and shall comply with the requirements of IS 456. Brackish water containing more than 1000 ppm chloride ion 2000 ppm sulphate ion shall not be used for mixing or curing concrete.
1.9.4. Admixture In all cases the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of the admixture he proposes to use and the manner in which he proposes to add it in the mix. The information provided shall include: a) The typical dosage, the method of dosing, and the detrimental effects of an excess or deficiency in the dosage. b) The chemical names of the main active ingredients in the admixture. c) Whether or not the admixture contains chlorides, and if so the chloride ion content expressed as a percentage by weight of admixture. d) Whether the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at the manufacturer’s recommended dosage, and if so the extent to which it does so. e) Details of previous uses of the admixture in Nepal. The chloride ion content of any admixture shall not exceed 1 per cent by weight of the admixture nor 0.02 per cent by weight of the cement in the mix. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride shall not be used in prestressed concrete. Workability agents shall comply with BS 5075 and shall not have any adverse effect on the properties of the concrete. Admixtures may be supplied as liquid or as powder. They shall be stored in sealed and undamaged containers in a dry, cool place. Admixtures shall be dispensed in liquid form and dispensers shall be of sufficient capacity to measure at one time the full quantity required for each batch.
1.9.5. Cement Ordinary and High Strength Portland Cement (OPC and HSPC), Portland Slag Cement (PSC), Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) shall be sampled according to IS 3535 and tested according to IS 4031. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 8
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Chemical and physical requirements for Ordinary Portland Cement, High Strength Portland Cement, Portland Slag Cement and Portland Pozzolana Cement shall be in accordance with IS 269, IS 8112, IS 12269, IS 455, IS 1489 respectively. Physical Characteristics OPC/PSC HSPC Test Procedure Fineness, m2/kg: (by Blaine’s Air Permeability method) 225 225 IS 4031 Part 2 Setting Time: IS 4031 Part 5 . Minimum Initial Setting Time (minutes) 45 45 . Maximum Final Setting Time (minutes) 600 600 Soundness by Lechatelier Method, mm, maximum 10 10 IS 4031 Part 3 Compressive Strength: Min. average Compressive Strength of 3 mortar cubes IS 4031 Part 6
(N/mm2) 16 27 . 3 days 22 37 . 7 days 33 53 . 28 days
1.9.6. Lime Limes shall be sampled and tested in accordance with BS 890 and shall comply with all requirements specified therein. Lime for treatment of road materials shall be Hydrated Calcium Lime or Quicklime and, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with the requirements as follows: Characteristics Hydrated lime Quicklime Fineness . Residue on 0.212 mm sieve – Maximum 1% 10% . Residue on 0.775 mm sieve - Maximum 100% 50% Chemical requirements . Free lime content – Minimum 50% 60% . Hydrated lime content - Maximum - 5%
1.9.7. Concrete Test procedure applicable to cement concrete shall be as follows: Tests Test Procedure Determination of: (i) Air contents of fresh concrete BS 1881 - 106 (ii) Density of hardened concrete BS 1881 – 114 (iii) Compressive strength of concrete cubes BS 1881 - 116 (iv) Tensile splitting strength BS 1881 – 117 (v) Flexural strength BS 1881 - 118 (vi) Compressive strength of concrete cores BS 1881 – 120 (vii) Water absorption BS 1881 - 122 (viii) Mixing and sampling fresh concrete in laboratory BS 1881 – 125 (ix) Normal curing of test specimens (20o C method) BS 1881 - 111 (x) Accelerated curing of test specimens BS 1881 – 112 (xi) Marking test cubes from fresh concrete BS 1881 - 108
Water to be used in concrete shall be tested as specified in BS 3148. The test specimens shall be cured at a temperature of 27OC ± 2O C.
1.9.8. Reinforcing Steel Reinforcement as plain bars, deformed bars and steel fabric shall comply with the following Indian Standards: a) IS 456 – 2000: Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete b) IS 432 (Part 1) – 1982: Specification for Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars and Hard-drawn Steel Wire Concrete Reinforcement c) IS 1139 – 2008: Specifications for High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for Concrete Reinforcement d) IS 1786 – 2008: Specifications for High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for Concrete Reinforcement e) IS 2502 – 1963: Code of Practice for Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 9
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
All reinforcement shall be from an approved manufacturer and, if required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the ISI certification mark or other test certificate from the manufacturer acceptable to the Engineer. The sampling and frequency of testing shall be as set out in the NS 84-2042 and NS 191-2045. The sampling and frequency of testing shall be as set out in the NS 84-2042 and NS 191-2045. In addition to the testing requirements described above, the Contractor shall carry out additional testing as instructed by the Engineer.
1.9.9. Structural Steel Structural steel materials shall comply with the appropriate standards listed below. a) IRC 24-1967 Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges. b) IS 2062-1992 Steel for General Structural Purposes. c) IS 9550-1980 Specifications for Bright Bars d) IS 3757-1985 Specifications for High Strength Structural Bolts. e) IS 6623-1985 Specifications for High Strength structural Nuts f) IS 6649-1985 Specifications for Hardened and tempered Washers for High Strength Structural Bolts and Nuts.
1.9.10. Bricks Burnt clay bricks shall conform to the requirements of NS-1/2035 except that minimum compressive strength when tested flat shall not be less than 8 N/mm2 for individual bricks and 10 N/mm2 for average 5 specimens and that the size may be according to local practice with a tolerance of ± 5 percent. Machine-made and chimney bricks shall be of first class quality. They shall be uniform deep red in color, thoroughly burnt, regular in shape and size and shall have sharp and square edges and parallel faces to ensure uniformity in the thickness of the courses of brickwork. They shall be sound, hard, homogeneous texture and emit a clear ringing sound on being struck. Their water absorption shall be minimum. Nepalese traditional decorative Dachi Apa bricks shall meet all of the requirements of machine-made and chimney bricks. However, they shall conform to the shape, size, thickness and design specified from the manufacturer’s catalogue. Bricks shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stones or lumps of any kind. They shall be free from salt that affect the mortar of the masonry. They shall not show any sign of efflorescence, either dry or subsequent to soaking in water.
1.9.11. Reinforced Concrete Pipes Reinforced concrete pipes shall comply with the requirements of NS 80-2042/IS 485:1988.
1.9.12. High Density Polythene Pipes High density polythene pipes shall comply with the requirements of NS 40-2040.
1.9.13. Geotextiles Geotextiles used for sub-surface drains shall be made of polyethylene or polypropylene or polyester or similar fibres, either woven or nonwoven. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawing, the geotextile shall: a) sustain a load of not less than 10 kN/m at break and have a minimum failure strain of 10 percent when determined in accordance with BS: 6906 or shall have a grab tensile strength more than 0.4 kN/m and grab elongation corresponding to this limit in accordance with ASTM D 4632. b) have apparent opening size as shown on the Drawing. If no size is shown on the Drawing, then the apparent size shall be 0.1 mm. c) allow water to flow through it at right angles to its principal plane, in either direction at a rate of not less than 50 litres /sq.m /sec. under a constant head of 100 mm, determined in accordance with BS: 6909 (Part 3) or ASTM D4491, unless otherwise shown on the Drawing. The flow rate determined in the test shall be corrected to that applicable to a temperature of 15oC using data on variation in viscosity of water with temperature. d) have a minimum puncture resistance of 200 N when determined in accordance with ASTM D 4833. e) have a minimum tear resistance of 350 N when determined in accordance with ASTM D 4533. Geotextile used for drilled sub-surface drains shall be as specified in Clause 2405. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 10
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
1.9.14. Material for Joint Fillers The material shall conform to the corresponding properties as follows: a) IS: 3414 – 1968: Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Joints in Buildings b) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): . D1190: Specification for Hot-poured Elastic Type Concrete Joint Sealer . D1751: Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) . D1752: Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Non-bituminous Types) c) American Concrete Institute ACI 504: Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete Structures d) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A116.1: Specification for Two-Component Elastomeric Sealing Compound for the Building Trade e) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Document CRD C-572. f) Weak cement-sand mortar
1.9.15. Timber for Structural Works Timber used for structural works shall comply with IS:883.
1.9.16. Manhole Covers and Frames Manhole covers and frames shall be of cast iron and shall comply with IS: 1726-1991. For manholes constructed in carriage way and shoulder, heavy duty circular covers and frames shall be used. In footpaths, medium duty circular covers shall be used. In other locations light duty covers and frames shall be used.
1.9.17. Gabion All wire used in the fabrication of gabions and wiring operations during construction shall comply with the requirements of NS: 169-2045. The wires shall be galvanized with heavy coating of zinc. The coating of zinc shall comply with NS: 163-2945.
1.10. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT If otherwise not specified in the contract, no separate measurement and payment be made for sampling and testing of materials, trials and construction control/process control testing. It shall be deemed to have included in the rates of the relevant items for complying with the requirements.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 11
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
2. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 2.1. GENERAL This section of the Specification covers the clearing and grubbing of construction sites in preparation for excavation and subsequent construction, as defined hereunder: a) Areas to be cleared shall include the entire foundation areas for building(s), pavements, access roads and other permanent structures. b) Areas to be grubbed, in addition to being cleared, shall include the foundation areas for building(s), pavements, access roads and other permanent structures.
2.2. EXECUTION 2.2.1. Clearing Clearing shall consist of the cutting, removing and disposal of all tree, bushes, shrubs, grass, weeds, other vegetation, anthills, rubbish, fences, top organic soil not exceeding 150 mm in thickness and all other objectionable material, resulting from the clearing and grubbing. It shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the work. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, clearing shall extend to a line 1500 mm horizontal distance outside the limits of the respective structures. Other areas shall be cleared to the limits directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall remove all shrubs, vegetation, grass, brushwood, trees and saplings of girth up to 300 mm measured at a height of 1000 mm above ground, fences, debris, floatable materials, litter and similar matters from the areas specified to be cleared. Trees of girth above 300 mm measured at a height of 1000 mm above ground shall be cut only after written permission of the Engineer. Special care shall be taken to preserve all vegetation outside the cleared areas to the maximum practicable extent. The Contractor shall dispose of the cleared materials at a distance of 50 m outside the periphery of the area under clearance. The disposed materials shall not be pushed or felled into areas not designated to be cleared. The moving of a certain amount of soil or gravel material may be inherent to or unavoidable during the process of clearing and no extra payment shall be made for this. Clearing shall include the removal of all rocks and boulders of up to 0.15 m3 in size exposed or lying on the surface.
2.2.2. Grubbing All trees up to 300 mm girth, stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of not less than 900 mm below the finished ground level and a minimum of 500 mm below the original ground level whichever is lower. Except in borrow areas the cavities resulting from the grubbing shall be backfilled with approved material and compacted to a density not less than the density of the surrounding ground.
2.2.3. Conservation of Top Soil Where suitable topsoil exists within the limits of the area to be cleared and grubbed, the Contractor shall, if ordered by the Engineer, remove the topsoil together with any grass and other suitable vegetation. If not used immediately, the topsoil shall be transported and deposited in stockpiles for later use.
2.2.4. Conservation of Flora Where provided for in the contract, certain designated flora encountered in the road reserve and borrow areas shall be carefully protected by the Contractor. In his tendered rate for Site Clearance, he shall include for the careful removal and planting of the flora in a protected and fenced-off area and, on completion of the road, for the replanting of the flora in suitable positions in the road reserve in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions.
2.2.5. Disposal of Materials Disposal of materials shall be carried out as rapidly as clearing progresses and weather conditions permit. Before any burning is performed, permits to burn shall be obtained from authorities having jurisdiction in the area. The Engineer shall also be notified at least 24 hours before burning is started. Precautions shall be taken to prevent accidental fires or spread of fires, including provision of watchmen and standby fire- fighting equipment meeting approval of authorities having jurisdiction in the area.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 12
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
All material from clearing and grubbing that is left in the area and is not burned completely to ashes shall be buried. Where the Drawings show slopes to be mulched, cleared brush and branches may be reduced to small pieces not exceeding 100 mm maximum dimension by shredding with chippers and used for mulching. Materials disposed of by burial shall be buried in worked out borrow areas or by piling the cleared material on the ground surface and covering the piles with not less than 1000 mm of earth. Before being covered, tree branches, shrubs or similar loose materials shall be consolidated to a dense mass not greater than 5000 mm high by shredding with chippers or by cat- tracking the piles. Buried piles shall not obstruct natural drainage. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, stumps shall be buried within designated disposal areas conforming to the following guidelines: a) Stumps shall be placed not more than three layers deep, one stump being considered as the thickness of one layer. b) There shall be a minimum thickness of 300 mm of earth material between stumps deposited so as to minimize the formation of voids. c) Where there will be more than one layer of stumps, a minimum of 300 mm of earth materials shall be compacted over that layer before placing another layer. d) A minimum of 1500 mm final cover of rock fill shall be dumped and spread out over the entire stump disposal area and compacted in 400 mm layers. e) The lateral or side slope coverage shall contain a minimum of 1500 mm of rock fill over the outermost stumps and organic material. f) The compaction required on the fill material between layers and the final cover of rock fill shall consist of routing the hauling equipment over each layer in a manner to distribute and effectively utilize the compaction effort of the equipment over the fill.
2.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2.3.1. Measurement Measurement for payment for clearing and grubbing shall be made of the area, in square meters, of the area cleared and grubbed, as measured in the field. Dimensions shall be measured nearest to 100 mm, and individual quantities shall be calculated correct to two places of decimals of a square meter.
2.3.2. Payment Payment for clearing and grubbing shall be at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include the costs of labour, equipment, any material, stockpiling and disposal.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 13
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
3. DEMOLITION 3.1. GENERAL This section of the Specifications covers the removal of existing concrete, reinforced concrete, masonry, existing buildings or steel structures or parts thereof that interfere with the construction and installation of new facilities. Existing structures that are to remain in place shall be protected from damage. Removed facilities shall be salvaged or disposed of as specified herein.
3.2. EXECUTION 3.2.1. Precautions The Contractor shall carry out the demolition works adopting the processes and procedures described in IS 4130: 1991. He shall exercise due care to avoid damage to existing structures and facilities that are not to be removed. He shall protect fences, conduits, water lines, electrical lines, etc. from injury. He shall be entirely responsible for damage to persons or property caused by his operations. He shall plan his work to minimize interference with road traffic.
3.2.2. Removing Existing Buildings All material intended to be salvaged (roofing, timber, conduits, piping, metal, etc.) shall be removed carefully to avoid damage, stockpiled and protected by the Contractor at locations approved by the Engineer. All other material above grade that are not required to be salvaged shall be broken to manageable pieces, removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor in an approved manner and location.
3.2.3. Removing Concrete For the purpose of this section of the Specifications, the word “concrete” includes reinforced concrete and mortared stone or brick masonry. The Contractor shall remove concrete at the locations and to the lines and elevations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Concrete removal operations shall be performed without damaging any portion of the structure that is to remain in place. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, repair all damages to existing structures that are to be kept. Explosives shall not be used for breaking up the concrete where a part of the structure is to remain in place. The dismantled concrete shall be broken to pieces that can be readily handled by using drilling, pneumatic tools or other suitable methods. Where the entire structure is to be removed, the Contractor may use explosives to break up the structure, provided that the following conditions are satisfied: a) All salvageable materials shall be dismantled and removed prior to use of explosives. b) No permanent structure that is to remain in place is located within 20 m of the blast site. c) The minimum amount of explosives, just sufficient to crack the concrete, shall be used. d) All necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to persons or property due to blasting operations. The Contractor’s proposed method of breaking and removal of concrete shall be approved by the Engineer. Existing reinforced steel that is to be incorporated in the new work shall be protected from damage and shall be thoroughly cleaned of all adhering material before being embedded in new concrete.
3.2.4. Dismantling of Steel Structures The Contractor shall dismantle steel structures in such a manner as to avoid damaging them and to permit their reuse. Reusable steel parts shall be removed with care without damage. Removed material required to be salvaged shall be stockpiled by the Contractor at locations approved by the Engineer and shall be properly protected from damage.
3.2.5. Disposal Broken concrete, reinforced concrete and masonry shall be crushed into suitable sizes for use as structural backfill, random backfill or road topping and used wherever possible in works. Reinforcing steel or embedded parts shall be sold for scrap metal to Contractor’s benefit. Material that cannot be utilized, as above, shall be disposed of on unproductive agricultural land or other suitable locations, as directed by the Engineer.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 14
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
3.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 3.3.1. Measurement Demolition shall be measured as a lump sum job, in square meters or cubic meters as stated in the Bill of Quantities. In case of measurement as a lump sum job, this is deemed to include removal of any building foundations below grade as well.
3.3.2. Payment Payment for demolition of existing buildings shall be deemed to include all costs of labours, equipment and materials required for demolishing, scaffolding, stacking, removing, loading, hauling and disposing.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 15
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
4. EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION 4.1. GENERAL 4.1.1. Scope This section of the Specifications covers the earthwork in excavation for all types of foundations, wet or dry. It covers earthwork in all types of soils, including sand, gravel, loam, clay, mud, black cotton and other similar soft or loose material. It includes all materials of earthy or sandy nature that can be easily ploughed, small shingles, gravels and river shingles that can be easily removed and hard core macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac, etc.), lime concrete, mud concrete and their mixtures which for excavation yields to application of picks, shovels, jumper, scarifier, ripper and other manual digging implements. Removal of small boulders not exceeding 3,000 cc occurring in such strata shall be included in the rate of the excavation.
4.1.2. Definitions The various types of excavations covered under this section are defined below:
a) Surface excavation Excavations exceeding 1500 mm in width and 10 sq. m on plan but not exceeding 300 mm in depth b) Rough excavation Excavation for earth from borrow pits, cutting hill side slopes, etc. c) Excavation over Area Excavation exceeding 1500 mm in width and 10 sq. m on plan and exceeding 300 mm in depth; or Excavation for basements, water tanks, etc.; or Excavation in trenches exceeding 1.5 m in width and 10 sq.m on plan. d) Trench excavation for Excavation not exceeding 1500 mm in width or 10 sq. m on plan and to any depth in foundations and trenches (excluding trenches for pipes, cables, conduits etc.) drains e) Trench excavation for Excavation not exceeding 1500 mm in width or 10 sq. m in plan and to any depth pipes, cables, etc. trenches for pipes, cables etc.
4.1.3. Standards and Codes Works related to excavation shall be performed in conformity with the following standards and codes of practice: a) IS 1200 (Part 1): 1992 – Building and Civil Engineering Works, Part 1: Earth Work. b) IS 1200 (Part 27): 1992 – Method of Measurement of Earth Work, Part 27: Earth Work Done by Mechanical Appliances c) IS 3764: 1992 – Code of Safety for Excavation Work
4.2. EXECUTION 4.2.1. Setting Out and Making Profiles A masonry pillar to serve as a benchmark will be erected at a suitable point in the area that is visible from the largest area. The benchmark shall be connected to the standard benchmark as approved by the Engineer. Necessary profiles with strings stretched on pegs shall be made to indicate the correct formation levels before the work is started. The Contractor shall supply labour and material for constructing the benchmark, setting out and making profiles and connecting it with the standard benchmark at his own cost. The pegs and the benchmark shall be maintained by the Contractor at his own cost during the excavation to check the profiles. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer before starting excavation to enable the latter to take ground levels for purposes of measurements before the ground is disturbed. Ground levels shall be taken at 5 to 15 m intervals, as directed by the Engineer, in uniformly sloping ground and at closer intervals where local mounds, pits or undulations are met with. The ground levels shall be recorded in field books and plotted on plans. The plans shall be drawn to a 1:50 scale or any other suitable scale decided by the Engineer. The north direction line and position of benchmark shall invariable be shown on the plans. These plans shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer, or their authorized representatives, before the earthwork is started. The labour required for taking levels shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.2.2. Excavation All excavation operations, whether conducted manually or by mechanical means, shall include excavation and ‘getting out’ the excavated materials. In case of excavation for trenches, basements, water tanks, etc., ‘getting out’ shall include throwing the
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 16
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works excavated materials at a distance of at least one m or half the depth of excavation, whichever is more, clear off the edge of the excavation. In all other cases, ‘getting out’ shall include depositing the excavated materials as specified. The subsequent disposal of the excavated material shall be either stated as a separate item or included with the items of excavation stating the lead. During the excavation, the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained. Excavation shall be done from top to bottom. Undermining or undercutting shall not be done. The excavation shall be done true to levels, slope, shape and pattern indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Only the excavation shown on the Drawings with additional allowances for centring and shuttering or as required by the Engineer shall be measured and recorded for payment. The elevations of the foundation bottom shown on the Drawings shall be considered as approximate only, and changes in the dimensions and elevations of the foundation as deemed necessary to secure satisfactory foundation shall be as per the instructions of the Engineer. The excavation shall be done manually or by mechanical means as directed by Engineer considering feasibility, urgency of work, availability of labour /mechanical equipment and other factors involved. The Contractor shall ensure every safety measures for the workers. Neither any deduction nor any extra payment will be made on this account.
Excavation over Area and in Trenches for Foundation and Drains In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical up to a depth of 2500 mm from the bottom. For greater depths, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of 500 mm on either side after every 2500 mm from the bottom. Alternatively, the excavation can be done so as to give a slope of 1:4 (horizontal: vertical). Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of steps shall be suitably increased or sides sloped or the soil shored up as directed by the Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take complete instructions in writing from the Engineer regarding the stepping, sloping or shoring to be done for excavation deeper than 2500 mm.
Excavation in Trenches for Pipes, Conduits, etc. The width of trenches for pipes, conduits, etc. shall be as follows: a) Up to depths of 1000 mm, the authorized width of trench for excavation shall be arrived at by adding 250 mm to the external diameter of pipe (not socket/ collar) cable, conduit, etc. Where a pipe is laid on concrete bed/ cushioning layer, the authorized width shall be the external diameter of pipe (not socket/ collar) plus 250 mm or the width of concrete bed/ cushioning layer, whichever is more. b) For depths exceeding 1000 mm, an allowance of 50 mm per meter of depth for each side of the trench shall be added to the authorized width (i.e. the external diameter of pipe plus 250 mm) for excavation. This allowance shall apply to the entire depth of the trench. In firm soils, the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical up to a depth of 2000 mm from the bottom. For depths greater than 2000 mm, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of 500 mm on either side after every 2000 mm from bottom. c) Where more than one pipe, cable, conduit, etc. are laid, the diameter shall be reckoned as the horizontal distance from outside to outside of the outermost pipes, cable, conduit, etc. d) Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of trench shall be suitably increased or side-sloped or the soil shored up, as directed by the Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to take complete instructions in writing from the Engineer regarding the increase in the width of trench and sloping or shoring to be done for excavation in soft, loose or slushy soils.
4.2.3. Foundation Preparation All operations for foundation preparation shall be carried out in the dry. All necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid disturbing the foundation material. In case of excavation for foundation in trenches or over areas, the bed of excavation shall be levelled longitudinally and transversely or stepped as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Before the foundation is laid, the final surface shall be cleaned, slightly watered and rammed. If the excavation for foundation is done to a depth greater than that shown in the Drawings or as required by the Engineer, the excess depth shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost with the concrete of the mix used for levelling/ bed concrete for foundations. Soft/defective spots at the foundation bed shall be dug out and filled with concrete (to be paid separately) as directed by the Engineer. Excavation for drains shall be taken to cut the side and bottom to the required shape, slope and gradient. The surface shall then be properly dressed. If the excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the Drawing or as required by the Engineer, the excess depth shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost with stiff clay puddle at places where the
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 17
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works drains are required to be pitched and with ordinary earth, properly watered and rammed, where the drains are not required to be pitched. In case the drain is required is to be pitched, the back filling with clay puddle, if required, shall be done simultaneously as the pitching proceeds. Brick pitched storm water drains should be avoided as far as possible in filled-up areas and loose soils. In all other cases where the excavation is taken deeper by the Contractor, the foundation bottom shall be brought to the required level by the Contractor at his own cost by filling in with earth duly watered, consolidated and rammed. In case the excavation is done wider than that shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer, additional filling, wherever required, shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost. After excavation is complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that the excavation is ready for inspection. No excavation shall be covered with concrete until it has been inspected and approved by the Engineer in writing.
4.2.4. Shoring Where necessary, the Contractor shall design the shoring in accordance with IS 3764: 1992 to ensure proper excavation. Shoring shall be of sufficient strength to resist side pressures and ensure safety from slips, prevent damage to works and property and injury to persons. It shall be removed as directed after all the items for which it is required are completed. Shoring shall generally be done when the depth of trench in soft/loose soil exceeds 2 m. In case of loose and slushy soils, the depths at which shoring is to be done shall be determined by the Engineer according to the nature of soil. Shoring shall be ‘close’ or ‘open’ depending on the nature of soil and the depth of trench.
Close Shoring Close shoring shall be done by completely covering the sides of the trench generally with short, upright members (poling boards). These members shall be 250 x 38 mm in section or as directed by the Engineer. The boards shall generally be placed in position vertically in pairs, one board on either side of the cutting. They shall be kept apart by horizontal walling of strong wood at a maximum spacing of 1200 mm cross-strutted with struts, or as directed by Engineer. The length and diameter of the strut shall depend upon the width of the trench. Where the soil is very soft and loose, the boards shall be placed horizontally against the sides of the excavation and supported by vertical walling strutted to similar timber pieces on the opposite face of the trench. The lowest boards supporting the sides shall be taken in the ground for a minimum depth of 75 mm. No portion of the vertical side of the trench shall remain exposed. Withdrawal of the timber members shall be done very carefully to prevent collapse of the trench. It shall start at one end and proceed systematically to the other end. Concrete or masonry shall not be damaged while removing the planks. No claim shall be entertained for any timber that cannot be withdrawn and is lost or buried, unless required by the Engineer to be left permanently in position.
Open Shoring In case of open planking and strutting, the entire surface of the trench walls is not required to be covered. Vertical boards, 250 mm wide and 38 mm thick, shall be spaced sufficiently apart to leave unsupported strips of 500 mm average width. The detailed arrangement, sizes and the distance between timbers shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In all other respect, specifications for close planking and strutting shall apply to open planking and strutting.
4.2.5. Protection Where directed by the Engineer, excavations shall be securely barricaded and provided with proper caution signs, conspicuously displayed during the day and properly illuminated with red lights and/or written using fluorescent reflective paint, as directed by the Engineer, during the night to avoid accident. Night watchmen shall patrol the excavations to avoid accidents. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any injury to life and damage to property caused by his negligence or accidents due to his operations. The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the excavation does not damage adjoining structures or dislocate existing services. Existing water supply pipes, sluice valve chambers, sewer pipes, manholes, drainage pipes and chambers, power supply cables, communication cables, etc. met within the course of excavation shall be properly supported and adequately protected, so that these services remain functional. All existing structures, foundations, pipes and cables that are to be incorporated into the final work shall be adequately protected or replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not store material or otherwise occupy any part of the site in a manner likely to hinder the operations of such services. Any services damaged during excavation shall be restored in reasonable time by the Contractor at his own cost.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 18
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Excavation shall not be carried out below the level of existing adjacent foundations. If it is necessary for some reason to excavate below the adjacent foundations, these foundations shall be underpinned and shored by the Contractor prior to proceeding with the excavation. The Contractor shall get written permission from the Engineer for shoring as required.
4.2.6. Disposal of Excavated Material Materials excavated from the foundation trenches shall be placed 1500 mm away from the outer edge of excavations. All excavated materials will remain the property of the Employer. Any material obtained from the excavation, which in the opinion of the Engineer, is useful shall be sorted out by the Contractor and stacked separately in regular stacks within the specified lead as directed by the Engineer. Materials suitable and useful for backfilling or other uses shall be stacked in convenient places but not in such a way as to obstruct free traffic movement or encroach on the area required for construction purposes. It shall be used to the extent required to completely backfill the structure to original ground level or the elevation shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Materials not useful in any way shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer. If serviceable excavated rubble is required by the Contractor for use in other items, it shall be paid for at the rate fixed in the tender or, if not so provided, at the rate at which both parties mutually agree. The site shall be left clean of all debris on completion.
4.2.7. Antiquities Any finds of archaeological interest, such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other articles of value, shall be delivered to the Engineer, who, in turn, shall hand it over to the Employer for further processing with the concerned government agency.
4.2.8. Dewatering The Contractor shall bail out or pump out of all water which may accumulate in the excavation during the progress of the work, either from seepage, rain or any other source and diverting surface flow, if any, by bunts or other means. The bunts shall be removed after their purpose is served. Pumping water from any foundation enclosure or trenches shall generally be done in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of any damage to the foundation trenches, concrete or masonry or any adjacent structures. The excavation shall be kept free from water: a) during inspection and measurement, b) when concrete and/or masonry works are in progress and till they come above the natural water level and c) untill the Engineer considers that the mortar is sufficiently set.
4.2.9. Slips and Blows If there are any slips or blows in the excavation, they shall be removed by the Contractor without any extra cost so as to provide correct dimensions required for the foundation.
4.2.10. Backfilling The excavation for open areas and trenches shall be backfilled as specified in Part I, Section 5, Clause 5.3.
4.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.3.1. Measurement The dimensions of excavation shall be measured to the nearest 10 mm. For surface excavation, the area of excavation shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in square meters. For all other types of excavation, the cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest two places of decimal in cubic meters. For excavations over area and in trenches for foundations and drains up to a depth of 2500 mm, an all-around excavation of 150 mm beyond the outer dimension of footing shall be measured for payment to make allowances for centring and shuttering. For excavation depths greater than 2500 mm, an all-around excavation of 500 mm shall be measured for this purpose. Any additional excavation beyond this limit shall be at the risk and cost of the Contractor and shall not be measured for payment. If the nature of excavation requires, diagonal ridges, cross ridges or dead- men, fixed at positions decided by the Engineer, shall be left by the Contractor to permit accurate measurements being taken on the completion of the work. Deduction of such ridges and dead-men shall be made from the measurements.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 19
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Driving of sounding bars or jumping small drill holes to explore the nature of the substratum up to a total length of 1000 mm distributed in two or three places in each foundation, if necessary, shall be considered incidental work and shall neither be measured nor paid for separately. Removal of slips and blows in the foundation trenches shall neither be measured nor paid for. Roads, embankments, etc. required for performing the excavation shall neither be measured nor paid for. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary to carry the foundation below the levels shown on the Drawings, the excavation for the first 1500 mm of additional depth shall be included in the quantity for the particular classification at the unit rate quoted the Bill of Quantities. Excavation below this additional depth of 1500 mm shall be paid for as extra work at a rate to be decided under the General Conditions of Contract, unless the Contractor is willing to accept payment at the unit rates quoted in the Bill of Quantities. For all depths less than the design depth plus 1500 mm, the excavation shall be paid for at tendered rates.
4.3.2. Payment Payment for excavation over area or in trenches for foundations, drains, cables, etc. shall be made at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of Quantities. These rates shall include the following, unless separate provisions are made for in the Bill of Quantities: a) Setting out works and making profiles, etc. according to the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, and setting up benchmarks and other reference marks. b) Excavation and removal of all materials of whatever nature, dry or wet, and necessary for the construction of foundation, removal of blows and slips and use of tools, plant and equipment necessary for satisfactory completion of the items and preparing the bed for foundation. c) Providing and subsequently removing shoring and strutting for cutting slopes. d) Bailing and pumping out water, except when separately provided for in the Contract. e) Forming (or leaving) dead-men and their removal after measurements. f) Sorting of useful excavated material, conveying them up to the specified lead clear beyond the structure stacking them neatly for backfilling or reuse and wasting useless materials as directed by the Engineer. g) Handing of antiquities and useful material. h) Necessary protection including labour, materials and equipment to ensure safety and protection against risk or accident. i) Supply of facilities for inspection and measurement at any time by the Engineer. j) Compensation for injury to humans and damage to property, if any, caused by the Contractor’s operation connected with this item. k) Small drill holes to explore the nature of substratum, if necessary. No deduction shall be made from the rate, if in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the operations specified in items ‘c’ to ‘k’ above are not required to be carried out on any account whatsoever. A lead of 30 m mentioned in the Bill of Quantities is the average lead for disposal of excavated earth. The actual lead for this purpose may be more or less than the 30 m, for which no cost adjustment shall be made in the rates.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 20
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
5. EARTHWORK IN FILL 5.1. GENERAL 5.1.1. Scope This section of the Specification covers the selection, placing and compaction of earth, sand and gravel fill.
5.1.2. Definitions Various types of backfills covered under this section are defined below: a) Structural backfill: Backfill where some measure of foundation support is required. b) Random backfill: Backfill where structural support is not a requirement.
5.1.3. Standards and Codes Fill placement shall be performed in conformity with the following codes of practice: a) IS 2720 (Part 7): 1980 – Methods of Test for Soils, Part 7: Determination of Water Content – Dry Density Relation using Light Compaction b) IS 2720 (Part 8): 1983 – Methods of Test for Soils, Part 8: Determination of Water Content – Dry Density Relation using Heavy Compaction
5.2. MATERIALS The Contractor shall produce backfill materials, including any necessary processing, to meet the requirements for each class of backfill as specified below:
Structural Backfill Structural backfill shall consist of sound granular materials, including crushed stone masonry and concrete, meeting the gradation requirements given below: Material size (mm) Percent fine (by weight) Material size (mm) Percent fine (by weight) 300 100 10 0-40 150 50-100 5 0-22 100 38-100 1 0-10 50 18-83 0.5 0-7 25 0-63 0.08 0-2
Random Backfill Random backfill shall consist of mixtures of clay, silt, sand, gravel, cobbles and rock fragments to a maximum size of 75 mm, as obtained from excavations for permanent construction, after top soil and vegetation has been removed. If approved by the Engineer, concrete, masonry and brickwork rubble less than 75 mm in size may be a part of the backfill. Material used for random filling shall be free from shrubs, vegetation, grass, brushwood, stone shingles and boulders larger than 75 mm in any direction, organic matters, foreign matters and deleterious materials. All clods and lumps of earth exceeding 75 mm in any direction shall be broken or removed before the material is used for filling.
Sand Fill Sand used for filling shall be natural sand approved by the Engineer. It shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of dust, clay, soft or flaky particles, shale, salts, organic matter, loam, mica or other deleterious substances and shall be approved by the Engineer. Its grading shall be within group SP specified in Clause 1.6.1.
Gravel Fill
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 21
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Gravel used for filling shall consist of single-washed crushed or broken stones or shingles of approved quality and size varying from 12 to 20 mm. It shall be hard, strong, dense, durable and clean, free from roots, grass, shrubs, rank vegetation, brushwood, tress, sapling and rubbish. Its grading shall be within group GP specified in Clause 1.6.1 and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
5.3. EXECUTION 5.3.1. General Construction Procedures Where suitable excavated material to be used for fill placement, the backfill material shall be brought from the place where it was temporarily deposited and used. If the available suitable excavated materials are inadequate in quantity, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the fact and obtain materials suitable for the proposed filling from locations and sources approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. It shall not be placed on any portion of the foundations or against or upon any structure until the concrete or masonry in these portions and structures has fully set and/or the Engineer has approved such portions and structures. The Contractor shall repair any damage to an approved foundation surface, as directed by the Engineer, prior to placement of backfill. Prior to fill placement, all timber shoring and formwork in the foundation trenches, pits, floors, etc. or other structures against or upon which backfill is to be placed shall be removed. All debris, brickbats and trash of any sort shall also be cleaned out from these areas. No brush, roots, stumps, sod or other organic or unsuitable materials shall be placed in the backfill. The Contractor shall continuously maintain the backfill in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer until the final completion and acceptance of the Works. Materials incorporated into the backfill and determined by the Engineer to be in violation of the Specification requirements shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense. Surfaces receiving fill layers shall, if smooth, be scarified to obtain a good key between the new fill layer and the subgrade. Where backfilling is to be placed on steep sloping ground, the surface of the ground shall be benched in steps or trenches as directed by the Engineer. Where the ground is wet or spongy, the Contractor shall remove all unsuitable material and, if necessary, under-drain the Site as may be directed by the Engineer before benching or trenching is carried out. Fill shall not be deposited under water without the Engineer’s permission. This permission will not normally be granted for cohesive soils or for fill of any kind where the standing water, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be pumped out or diverted. Permission may be granted to place rock fill by random dumping in areas where the depth of water is greater than 500 mm, but the method and the quality of the fill material shall be subject to approval, and, when the fill is 500 mm above the water surface, it shall be compacted until there is no discernible settlement under the equipment used for placing or compacting fill. Thereafter, normal backfilling and compaction shall be resumed.
5.3.2. Placement and Compaction Structural Backfill Structural backfill shall be placed in specific areas, such as under foundations, shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. It shall be placed in uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm in thickness. The layers shall be spread, watered and then compacted by suitable equipment, such as mechanical or hand-operated rammers as specified or directed to achieve a relative density of at least 90% in accordance with IS 2720, Part 7 or 8 or as directed by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage is caused to pipes, drains, masonry or concrete around or against which the backfill is placed.
Random Backfill Random backfill shall be placed in the spaces between foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation, in plinths, under floors, in trenches for cables, pipes, etc. It shall be placed in layers not exceeding 200 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be spread, watered, rammed and well compacted by means of mechanical or hand- operated rammers to at least 90% of the compaction obtainable at optimum moisture content (Proctor density). Flooding with water for compaction shall not be allowed. Areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment, such as those adjacent to walls and columns, shall be tamped by hand rammers or by hand held power rammers to the required density.
Sand Fill If sand is to be filled under floors, the filled-in sand shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to ensure maximum compaction. Any temporary work required to maintain the sand under flooded condition shall be done by the Contractor at his own cost. The surface of the sand fill shall then be well dressed and shall be approved by the Engineer before any other work is taken over the fill.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 22
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Gravel Fill Gravel filling shall be carried out as the base course in foundation trenches or as specified in the Drawings. Gravel to be filled shall be uniformly blinded with the approved type of soil and/or sand to obtain full compaction. It shall be filled in the specified thickness, watered, rammed, compacted, consolidated and dressed, entirely to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.3.3. Tests on Backfill Test to establish proper compaction of the backfill shall be carried out by the Contractor. In general, two tests per 50 sq.m of filling shall be performed for this purpose. The cost of tests carried out will be borne by the Contractors.
5.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 5.4.1. Measurement For fills placed on sides of foundations, measurement of fills shall be made of the volume, in cubic meters, bounded by the existing ground, excavated surface or surface of structures and lines and grades of the fill as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer. For filling in plinths, under floors or as foundation base course, the depth of filling shall be the compacted depth of filling. The dimensions of filling in this case shall be the dimension measured prior to fill placement Dimensions shall be measured with a steel tape correct to the nearest 10 mm, and individual quantities shall be calculated correct to two places of decimals of a cubic meter.
5.4.2. Payment Payment for backfills shall be made at the corresponding unit prices tendered in the Bill of Quantities. These unit rates shall include costs of excavating, loading, hauling, dumping, spreading and compacting fills.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 23
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
6. CEMENT CONCRETE WORKS 6.1. SCOPE This Section covers the materials, design of mixes, transport, placing, compaction and curing of concrete, ready-mix concrete and mortar required in the works.
6.2. DEFINITIONS Structural concrete is any class of concrete which is used in reinforced, pre-stressed or unreinforced concrete construction which is subject to stress. Non-structural concrete is composed of materials complying with the Specification but for which no strength requirements are specified and which is used only for filling foundations and similar purpose where it is not subjected to significant stress. A pour refers to the operation of placing concrete into any mould, bay or formwork, etc. and also to the volume which has to be filled. Pours in vertical succession are referred to as lifts.
6.3. MATERIAL 6.3.1. General The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all materials which he purposes to use for making concrete. No concrete shall be placed in the works until the Engineer has approved the materials of which it is composed. Material once approved, shall not thereafter be altered or substituted by other materials without the consent of the Engineer.
6.3.2. Cement Cement shall comply with the requirements of Part II, Section 1, Clause 1.9.5. The type of cement selected should be appropriate for the intended use as per instruction of the Engineer. Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the manufacturer’s sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. Bagged cement shall be transported in vehicles provided with effective means of ensuring that it is protected from the weather. Bulk cement shall be transported in vehicles or in containers built and equipped for the purpose. Cement in bags shall be stored in a suitable weatherproof structure of which the interior shall be dry and well ventilated at all times. The floor shall be raised above the surrounding ground level not less than 300 mm and shall be so constructed that no moisture rises through it. Each delivery of cement in bags shall be stacked together in one place. The bags shall be closely stacked so as to reduce air circulation with min gap of 500 mm from outside wall. If pallets are used, they shall be constructed so that bags are not damaged during handling and stacking. Stack of cement bags shall not exceed 8 bags in height. Cement form broken bags shall not be used in the works. Cement in bags shall be used in the order in which it is delivered. Different types of cement in bags shall be clearly distinguished by visible marking and shall be stored in separate stacks. Bulk cement shall be stored in weather proof silos which shall bear a clear indication of the type of cement contained in them. Different types of cement shall not be mixed in the same silo. Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with the Specification in any way shall be removed from the Site.
6.3.3. Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall be clean hard and durable and shall be natural sand, crushed gravel sand or crushed rock sand complying with IS 383. All the material shall pass through a 4.75 mm IS sieve and the grading shall be in accordance with IS 383. In order to achieve an acceptable grading, it may be necessary to blend materials from more than one source. The deviation from the initial fineness modulus shall be no more than ± 0.30 for ordinary concrete and ± 0.20 for high quality concrete. However, in respect of the presence of deleterious materials the fine aggregate shall not contain iron pyrites, iron oxides, mica, shale, coal or other laminar soft or porous materials or organic matter unless the Contractor can show by comparative tests on finished concrete or mortar that presence of such materials does not affect the respective strength.
6.3.4. Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable material belonging to class A or B as defined in Part II, Section 1, Clause 1.6.2 with the properties tested as per Clause 1.9.2.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 24
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
6.3.5. Testing of Aggregate Acceptance Testing The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer samples containing not less than 50 kg of any aggregate which he proposed to use in the works and shall supply such further samples as the Engineer may require. Each sample shall be clearly labelled to show its origin and shall be accompanied by all information called for in IS 2386 Part 1 to 8. Tests to determine compliance of the aggregates shall be carried out by the Contractor in a laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. If the tested materials fail to comply with the Specification, further tests shall be made in the presence of the Contractor and the Engineer. Acceptance of the material shall be based on the results of such tests. All the materials shall be accepted if the results of not less than three consecutive sets of test executed in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 1-8).
Compliance Testing/ Process Control Testing The Contractor shall carry out routine testing of aggregate for compliance with the Specification during the period that concrete is being produced for the works. The tests set out below shall be performed on aggregate from each separate source on the basis of one set of tests for each day on which aggregate are delivered to site provide that the set of tests shall represent not more than 100 MT of fine aggregate and not more than 250 MT of coarse aggregate, and provided also that the aggregates are of uniform quality. . Grading: IS 2386 Part 1 . Silt, Clay Contents and Organic Impurities: IS 2386 Part2 If the aggregate from any source is variable, the frequency of testing shall be increased as instructed by the Engineer.
Chloride Content As frequently as may be required to ensure that the proportion of chlorides in the aggregates does not exceed the limit stated in the Specification.
Sulphate Content and Alkali Aggregate Reactivity As frequently as may be required according to the variability of sulphate content and alkali reactivity assessed from the laboratory test carried out during the concrete mix design.
6.3.6. Delivery and Storage of Aggregate Aggregate shall be delivered to site in clean and suitable vehicles. Different type or sizes of aggregate shall not be delivered in one vehicle. Each type or size of aggregate shall be stored in a separate bin. The storage of aggregate shall be arranged in such a way that drying out in hot weather is prevented in order to avoid fluctuations in water content. Storage of fine aggregates shall be arranged in such way that they can drain sufficiently before use in order to prevent fluctuations in water content of the concrete.
6.3.7. Water for Concrete Mortar Water shall be as per Part I, Section 1, Clause 1.9.3.
6.3.8. Admixture Admixtures shall comply with Part I, Section 1, Clause 1.9.4. Their use is not meant to lower the amount of cement beyond the specified minimum quantity as per Part I, Section 1, Clause 6.4.1. Use of an admixture or combination of more than one admixtures should be approved by the Engineer.
6.4. THE DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES 6.4.1. Classes of Concrete The classes of structural concrete to be used in the works shall be as shown on the Drawing and in the following table, in which the class designation includes two figures. Letter ‘M’ in the class designation stands for Mix, the first figures indicates the
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 25
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works characteristic strength fck at 28 days expressed in N/mm2 and the second figure is the maximal nominal size of aggregate in the mix expressed in millimetres. Minimum Trial mixes Early works test cubes Classes Characteristic Maximum cement Minimal Target Any one result, Av. of 3 of Consistence Type of uses Strength fck Nominal Size of content Strength fck=1.1fck av. of 3 cubes consecutive concrete (N/mm2) Aggregate (mm) (kg/m3) (N/mm2) (N/mm2) results (N/mm2) M 10/75 S Ordinary 10 75 150 11.0 10 14 M 10/40 S Ordinary 10 40 150 11.0 10 14 M 15/20 S Ordinary 15 20 200 16.5 15 19 M 15/40 S Ordinary 15 40 200 16.5 15 19 M 20/20 S Ordinary 20 20 300 22.0 20 24 M 20/40 S Ordinary 20 40 300 22.0 20 24 M 25/20 S Ordinary 25 20 325 27.5 25 29 M 25/40 S Ordinary 25 40 325 27.5 25 29 M 30/40 S High Quality 30 40 350 33.0 30 34 M 30/20 P High Quality 30 20 350 33.0 30 34 M 30/12 P High Quality 30 12 350 33.0 30 34 M 35/40 P High Quality 35 40 350 38.5 35 39 M 35/20 P High Quality 35 20 350 38.5 35 39 M 40/20 P High Quality 40 20 400 44.0 40 44 M 45/20 P High Quality 45 20 400 49.5 45 49 M 50/20 P High Quality 50 20 400 55.0 50 54 Note: S= Stiff consistence, for slump ≤40; P= Plastic consistence, for slump >40 and ≤90
6.4.2. Design of Foam Concrete The foam concrete block should conform IS 2185 Part IV-2008. The minimum compressive strength should be 3N/mm2. The thermal conductivity in air dry condition should be 0.34 kcal/m/h/OC. Water absorption should not exceed 12.5 %.
6.4.3. Design of Proposed Mixes Concrete mixes shall tested as per Part I, Section 1, Clause 1.9.7. The contractor shall design all the concrete mixes called for in the Drawing using the ingredients which have been approved by the Engineer in and in compliance with the following requirements: a) The aggregate portion shall be well graded from the nominal maximum size of stone down to the 150 micron size. b) The workability shall be consistent with ease of placing and proper compaction having regard to the presence of reinforcement and other obstructions. c) The water/cement ratio shall be the minimum consistent with adequate workability but in any case not greater than 0.5 for classes of concrete from M20 to M50 taking due account of any water contained in the aggregates. The Contractor shall take into account that this requirement may in certain cases require the inclusion of a workability agent in the mix. d) The Contractor shall submit results from 3 batches of laboratory trial mixes as per BS 1881 and 3 batches of site trials conforming to the results from the laboratory trials. e) If the Engineer does not agree to a proposed concrete mix for any reason, the Contractor shall amend his proposals and carry out further trial mixes. No mix shall be used in the works without the written consent of the Engineer.
6.4.4. Quality control of Concrete Production Sampling For each class of concrete in production at each plant for use in the works, samples of concrete shall be taken at the point of mixing or of deposition as instructed by the Engineer, all in accordance with the sampling procedures described in BS 1881. Each sample shall consist of 6 numbers of 150 mm cured cubes. 3 of the cubes shall be tested on the 3rd day and the other 3 on the 28th day.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 26
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be as following: . 1 sample for 1 m3 to 5 m3 concrete . 2 samples for 5 m3 to 20 m3 concrete . 1 sample for each 20 m3 concrete . 1 sample for each shift of work
Testing The slump of the concrete shall be determined for each batch from which samples are taken and in addition for other batches at the point of production and deposition or at the frequency instructed by the Engineer. The slump of concrete in any batch shall not differ from the value established by the trial mixes by more than 25 mm or one third of the value whichever is the less. The air content of air entrained concrete in any batch shall be within 1.5 times of the required value and the average value of four consecutive measurements shall be within the required value expressed as a percentage of the volume of freshly mixed concrete. The compressive strength of the concrete at 28 days shall be such that no result (average of 3 cubes) is less than the specified characteristic strength fck. The 7-day cube result may be used as an early strength indicator, at the discretion of the Engineer.
6.5. MIXING CONCRETE Before any batching, mixing transporting, placing, compacting and finishing and curing the concrete ordered or delivered to site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all the plant which he propose to use and the arrangements he propose to make. Concrete for the works shall be batched and mixed in one or more plants or concrete mixer or use ready-mix concrete unless the Engineer agrees to some other arrangement. If concrete mixers are used, there shall be sufficient number of mixtures including stand by mixers. Batching and mixing plants shall be complying with the requirements of IS 1791 and capable of producing a uniform distribution of the ingredients throughout the mass. Truck mixers shall comply with the requirements of IS 4925 and shall only be used with the prior approval of the Engineer. If the plant proposed by the Contractor does not fall within the scope of IS 1791 it shall have been tested in accordance with IS 4634 and shall have a mixing performance within the limits of IS 1791. The aggregate storage bins shall be provided with drainage facilities arranged so that the drainage water is not discharged to the weigh hoppers. Each bin shall be drawn at least once per week and any accumulations of mud or silt shall be removed. Cement and aggregates shall be batched by weight. Water may be measured by weight or volume.
6.6. TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the works by means which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, and shall ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing. The loss of slump between discharge from the mixer and placing shall not exceed 25 mm. The time elapsing between mixing transporting placing and compacting altogether of a batch of concrete shall not be longer than the initial setting time of the concrete. If the placing of any batch of concrete is delayed beyond this period, the concrete shall not be placed in the works.
6.7. PLACING OF CONCRETE 6.7.1. Consent for Placing Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer’s consent has been given in writing. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least two full working day notice of his intention to place concrete. If concrete placing is not commenced within 24 hours of the Engineer’s consent the Contractor shall again request consent as specified above.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 27
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
6.7.2. Preparation of Surface to Receive Concrete Excavated surfaces on which concrete is to be dry. Existing concrete surfaces shall be scrubbed thoroughly and applied with a coat of cement slurry. Before deposition of further concrete they shall be clean, hard and sound and shall be wet but without any free standing water. Immediately before concrete placing, surfaces shall receive prior coating of cement slurry or mortar mixed in the proportions similar to those of the fines proportions in the concrete to be placed.
6.7.3. Placing Procedures The Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position. It shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the concrete and displacement of the reinforcement, other embedded items or form work. It shall be brought up in layers approximately parallel to the construction joint planes and not exceeding 300 mm in compacted thickness unless otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer, but the layers shall not be thinner than four times the maximum nominal size of aggregate. A layer may be started before initial set of the preceding layer. Concrete shall not be placed during rain which is sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash mortar from coarse aggregate on the exposed faces of fresh concrete. Means shall be provided to remove any water accumulating on the surface of the placed concrete. In dry weather, covers shall be provided for all fresh concrete surfaces which are not being worked on. Water shall not be added to concrete for any reason. When concrete is discharged from the place above its final deposition, segregation shall be prevented by the use of chutes, down pipes, trunking, baffles or other appropriate devices. Forms for walls shall be provided with openings or other devices that will permit the concrete to be placed in a manner that will prevent segregation and accumulations of hardened concrete on the formwork or reinforcement above the level of the placed concrete. When it is necessary to place concrete under water the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for the method and equipment to be employed. The concrete shall be deposited either by bottom-discharging watertight containers or through funnel-shaped tremies which are kept continuously full with concrete in order to reduce to a minimum the contact of the concrete with the water. Special care shall be taken to avoid segregation. If the level of concrete in a tremie pipe is allowed to fall to such extent that the water enters the pipe, the latter shall be removed from the pour and filled with concrete before being again lowered into the placing position. During and after concreting under water, pumping or dewatering in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended if there is any danger that such work will disturb the freshly placed concrete.
6.7.4. Placing procedure for Foam Concrete Before starting laying work, the surface shall be checked for undulations and other materials. If any ups or other non-compatible deposited materials are found on the surface of the RCC slab, hacking and cleaning shall be done for maintaining level. A minimum of 25 mm thick 1:6 cement sand mortar shall be laid, and then a 3 mm thick layer of neat cement on the cement mortar bed shall be laid for tight bonding of the block and for filling the gaps between the block and the mortar bed to control hollow sound of the blocks. The accurate location of tongue and groove of each panel shall be such that the offset between adjacent panels is within 2mm on both faces and the width of the resultant joint between the two adjacent panels is 10mm ±2mm.
6.7.5. Placing procedure for Concrete Flooring Flooring shall be laid on base concrete where so provided. The base concrete shall be provided with the slopes required for the flooring. Flooring in Veranda, Courtyard, kitchens and baths shall have slope ranging from 1 : 48 to 1 : 60 depending upon location and as decided by the Engineer. Floors in water closet portion shall have slope of 1:30 or as decided by the Engineer. Further, drop in flooring in bath, WC, kitchen near floor traps ranging from 6 mm to 10 mm will also be provided to avoid spread of water. Necessary margin to accommodate this drop shall be made in base concrete. Plinth masonry off set shall be depressed so as to allow the base concrete to rest on it. The flooring shall be commenced preferably within 48 hours of the laying of base concrete. The surface of the base shall be roughened with steel wire brushes without disturbing the concrete. Immediately before laying the flooring, the base shall be wetted and a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement spread over an area of 1 sq. m so as to get a good bond between the base and concrete floor.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 28
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
If the cement concrete flooring is to be laid directly on the RCC slab, the top surface of RCC slab shall be cleaned and the laitance shall be removed and a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement spread over an area of 1 Sq.m so as to get a good bond between the base and concrete floor. The admixtures shall be used with cement slurry as instructed by the Engineer. Flooring of specified thickness shall be laid in the pattern including the border as given in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The border panels shall not exceed 450 mm in width and the joints in the border shall be in line with panel joints. The panels shall be of uniform size and no dimension of a panel shall exceed 2 m and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2 Sq. m. The joints of borders at corners shall be mitred for provision of strips.
6.7.6. Interruptions to Placing If the concrete placing is interrupted and the duration of the interruption cannot be forecast, the Contractor shall immediately take the necessary action to form a construction joint and shall thoroughly compact the concrete. Before concreting is resumed after such an interruption the Contractor shall cut out and remedy not compacted concrete, feather edges or any undesirable features and shall leave a clean sound surface against which the fresh concrete may be placed. In case of long interruption concrete shall be resumed as directed by Engineer.
6.7.7. Dimension of Pours Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, pours shall not be more than two meters high and shall as far as possible have a uniform thickness over the plan area of the pour. Concrete shall be placed to the full planned height of all pours, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6.7.8. Placing Sequence The Contractor shall arrange that the intervals between successive lifts of concrete in one Section of the works are of equal duration. This duration shall not be less than three days or not more than seven days under temperate weather conditions unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer. Where required by the Engineer to limit the opening of construction joints due to shrinkage, concrete shall not be placed against adjacent concrete which is less than 21 days old. Contraction gaps in concrete shall be of the widths and in the locations as shown on the Drawing and they shall not be filled until the full time interval shown on the Drawing has elapsed.
6.8. COMPACTION OF CONCRETE Concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the placed layer. It shall thoroughly worked against the formwork and around any reinforcement and other embedded item, without displacing them. Successive layers of the same pour shall be thoroughly worked together. Concrete shall be compacted with the assistance of mechanical of immersion vibrators, unless the Engineer agrees another method. The Contractor shall ensure that vibrators are operated at pressures and voltages not less than those recommended by the manufacturer in order that the compaction effort is not reduced. Vibration shall be continued at each until the concrete ceases to contract, air bubbles have ceased to appear, and a thin layer of mortar has appeared on the surface. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete laterally and shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete to penetrate the layer underneath at regular spacing which shall not exceed the distance from the vibrator over which vibration is visibly effective and some extent of vibration is overlapped. Vibration shall not be applied by way of reinforcement nor shall the vibrator be allowed to touch reinforcement, sheathing ducts or other embedded items. Vibrators shall not be applied in case of concrete flooring, mason’s mallet shall be used instead.
6.9. CURING OF CONCRETE 6.9.1. General Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from loss of moisture and from the development of temperatures differentials within the concrete sufficient to cause cracking. The methods used for curing shall not cause damage of any kind to the concrete. Curing shall be continued for as long as may be necessary to achieve the above objectives but not less than seven days or until the concrete is covered by successive construction whichever is the shorter period. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 29
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is hard enough to resist damage from the process. In the case of large areas or continuous pours, it shall commence on the completed Section of the pour before the rest of the pour is finished.
6.9.2. Loss of Moisture Exposed concrete surfaces shall be closely covered with impermeable sheeting. Alternatively, the Contractor shall keep the exposed surfaces continuously wet by means of water spray or by covering with a water absorbent material which shall be kept wet. Formed surfaces may be cured by retaining the formwork in place for the required curing period. If instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, in addition to the curing provisions set out above provide a suitable form of shading to prevent the direct rays of the sun reaching the concrete surfaces for at least the first four days of the curing period.
6.9.3. Protection of Fresh Concrete Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rainfall and from water running over the surface until it is sufficiently hard to resist damage from these causes. Concrete placed in the works shall not be subjected to any loading until it has attained at least its characteristic strength as defined in Clause 2004.
6.10. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Whenever concrete is to be bonded to other concrete which has hardened, the surface of contact between the Sections shall be deemed a construction joint. Where construction joints are shown in the Drawing, the Contractor shall form such joints in such positions. The locations of joints which the Contractor requires to make for the purpose of construction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Construction joints shall be in vertical or horizontal planes except in sloping slabs where they shall be normal to the exposed surface or elsewhere where the Drawing require a different arrangement. Construction joints shall be arranged as to reduce to a minimum the effects of shrinkage in the concrete after placing, and shall be placed in the most advantageous positions with regard to stresses in the structures and the desirability of staggering joints. Construction joints formed as free surfaces shall not exceed a slope of 20 per cent from the horizontal. The surface of the fresh concrete in horizontal or near horizontal joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by means of high pressure water, and air jets or wire brush, when the concrete is hard enough to withstand the treatment without the leaching of cement. The surface of vertical or near vertical joints shall be similarly treated if circumstances permit the removal of formwork at a suitable time. Where concrete has become too hard for the above treatment to be successful, the surface whether formed or free shall be thoroughly scrubbed by mechanical means and then washed with clean water. The indentations produced by scrubbing shall not be less than 10 mm deep and shall be away from the finished face by 40 mm. If instructed by the Engineer the surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly brushed with a thin layer of mortar composed of one part of cement to two parts of sand by weight immediately prior to the deposition of fresh concrete. The mortar shall be kept just ahead of the fresh concrete being placed and the fresh layer of concrete shall be thoroughly and systematically vibrated to full depth to ensure complete bond with the adjacent layer.
6.11. NON-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Non-structural concrete shall be used only for non-structural purposes where shown on the Drawing. The weight of cement mixed with 0.3 cubic metres of combined aggregate shall not be less than 50 kg. The mix shall be proportioned by weight or by volume. The maximum aggregate size shall be 40 mm nominal. The concrete shall be mixed by machine or by hand to a uniform colour and consistency before placing. The quantity of water used shall not exceed that required to produce a concrete with sufficient workability to be placed and compacted where required. The concrete shall be compacted by hand towels or rammers or by mechanical vibration.
6.12. FOAM CONCRETE Foam concrete is a cementitious material having a minimum of 20% (by volume) of mechanically entrained foam in the plastic mortar. This differentiates foam concrete from (a) gas or aerated concrete, where the bubbles are chemically formed through the reaction of aluminium powder with calcium hydroxide and other alkalis released by cement hydration, and (b) air entrained MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 30
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works concrete, which has a much lower volume of entrained air. Foam concrete density shall be 900kg/cum with 300x300 mm size and sample with relevant documents shall be submitted for approval prior to commencement of work. The production methodology of the foam concrete blocks needs to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
6.13. PRECAST CONCRETE Precast concrete and precast reinforced concrete units shall comply with IS 456. They shall be of grade of mix as specified and cast in forms or moulds. The forms/ moulds shall be of fiberglass or of steel sections for better finish. Provision shall be made in the forms and moulds to accommodate fixing devices such as nibs, clips, hooks, bolts and forming of notches and holes. Precast concrete shall be cast on suitable bed or platform with firm foundation. The Contractor may precast the units on a cement or steel platform which shall be adequately oiled, provided the surface finish is of the same standard as obtained in the forms. Each unit shall be cast in one operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the level or shape of the bed or platform. A suitable serial number and the date of casting shall be impressed or painted on each unit. Concrete used for pre-casting the units should be well proportioned as specified, mixed, placed and thoroughly compacted by vibrations or tamping to give a dense concrete free from voids and honeycombing. Precast articles shall have a dense surface finish showing no coarse aggregate and shall have no cracks or crevices likely to assist in disintegration of concrete or rusting of steel or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the units. All angles of the precast units, with the exception of the angles resulting from the splayed or chamfered faces, shall be true right angles. The rises shall be clean and sharp except those specified or shown to be rounded. The wearing surface shall be true to the lines. On being fractured, the interior of the units should present a clean homogenous appearance. The longitudinal reinforcement shall have a minimum cover of 12 mm or twice the diameter of the main bar, whichever is more, unless otherwise directed in respect of all items, except fencing posts or electric posts where the minimum cover shall be 25 mm. Precast units shall be clearly marked to indicate the top of member and its location and orientation in the structure. The lifting and removal of precast units shall be undertaken without causing shocks, vibration or under bending stresses to or in the units. Before lifting and removal takes place, the Contractor shall satisfy Engineer or his representative that the methods he proposes to adopt for these operations will not over- stress or otherwise affect seriously the strength of the precast units. The reinforced side of the units shall be distinctly marked.
6.14. EARLY LOADING No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the specified curing period has expired, and thereafter loading shall be allowed after approval by the Engineer. The Engineer’s decision shall be based on the type of load to be applied, the age of concrete, the magnitude of stress induced and the propping of the structure.
6.15. MEASUREMNT 6.15.1. Concrete Concrete laid in place as specified in the Drawing or directed by the Engineer shall be measured in cubic metre separately for each class. No deduction shall be made in the measurement for: . Bolt holes, pockets, box outs an cast in components provided that the volume of each is less than 0.15 cubic metres; . Mortar beds, fillets, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves, chamfers and the like of 100 mm total width or less; . Reinforcement.
6.15.2. Non-structural Concrete Non-structural concrete laid in place shall be measured in cubic metre. No deduction shall be made for openings provided that the area of each is less than 0.5 square metres. Concrete over hard material shall be measured as the volume used provided that the maximum thickness of 150 mm allowed for over break in not exceeded.
6.15.3. Concrete Flooring Measurement for cement concrete flooring shall be in square meters. Similarly the skirting will be measured in running meters.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 31
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
6.15.4. Precast Concrete The unit of measurement of precast units shall be as indicated in the Bill of Quantities.
6.15.5. Foam Concrete Measurement of foam concrete for payment will be made only to the neat finishing lines, as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be measured correct up to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter.
6.15.6. Admixtures, Workability and Hardening Agents Measurement of these items shall be carried out as specified in the contract.
6.16. PAYMENT 6.16.1. Concrete Every class of concrete shall be paid as per respective contract unit rate. In addition to those specified in Clause 112 the respective rate shall also include the cost of: . Admixtures and workability agents including submission of details unless specified. . Class of uf1, 2 or 3 surface finish. . Laying to sloping surfaces not exceeding 15O from the horizontal and to falls. . Formwork to lean concrete. . Placing and compacting against excavated surfaces where required including any additional concrete to fill over break and working space. . Complying with the requirements of clauses 2001 to 2013, 1806 and 1807.
6.16.2. Admixtures, Workability and Hardening Agent Payment shall be made at contract unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor.
6.16.3. Payment for Sub-standard Works Concrete not meeting the requirements of the relevant Specifications shall be paid as substandard work provided it is accepted by the Engineer as substandard work. For the acceptance of such work the Engineer may require further investigation and/or tests which the Contractor shall conduct at his own cost. Acceptance or rejection of such work is the sole responsibility of the Engineer and his decision in this respect shall be the final and binding upon the Contractor. If accepted as substandard work the payment for such work shall be made at the contract unit rate reduced by the formula given below: Percent of reduction = (Design strength – Observed strength)*100 /Design strength The reinforcement, admixtures, workability and hardening agents, if any, contained in the substandard concrete shall be also paid at their respective contract unit rate of the same concerned item reduced by the same percent. The reduced contract unit rates of substandard concrete and other items contained shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 32
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
7. REINFORCEMENT 7.1. GENERAL 7.1.1. Scope This specification covers providing and fixing steel reinforcement of various sizes in all types of RCC works, including necessary supports, spacers, tie wire and accessories.
7.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: a) IS 456 – 2000: Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete b) IS 432 (Part 1) – 1982: Specification for Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars and Hard-drawn Steel Wire Concrete Reinforcement c) IS 1139 – 2008: Specifications for High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for Concrete Reinforcement d) IS 1786 – 2008: Specifications for High Strength Deformed Steel Bars and Wires for Concrete Reinforcement e) IS 2502 – 1963: Code of Practice for Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
7.1.3. Submittals Bar Bending Schedule The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer bar bending schedules for all RCC works in duplicate within one month of the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance or of the receipt of each design drawings, whichever is later. Upon receipt of the Engineer’s final corrections, as-corrected two copies of the approved drawings/schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer. The bar bending schedule shall be in standard format covering serial number, shape, diameter, number, length of bar, total length, unit weight per meter of bar and total weight of individual bar inclusive of the grand total weight of bar/reinforcement. The contractor shall also furnish additional bar bending schedules as per drawings during construction phase if necessary. Approval of schedule/drawing by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors nor relieve him of any part of his obligation to meet the entire requirements of the Contract or of the responsibility for the correctness of his drawings. The submission of bar bending schedule as of design drawings shall be prior to the commencement of the activity of structural concreting works and prior approval from the Engineer. The contractor’s submittal shall be on time in order to make the progress as of scheduled work plan.
Test Certificates For each consignment of bar reinforcement used in the works, the Contractor shall submit a certificate issued by the manufacturer giving the ultimate strength, yield stress and elongation and the result of the cold bend test for each type and each size of bar. The equivalent tests shall be carried out by the contractor on behalf of the Engineer for the purpose of obtaining the information and conform to relevant IS code at his own cost.
7.2. MATERIAL Bar reinforcement described as “mild steel” shall be plain, round hot rolled steel bars of grade Fe 250, where the figure following Fe indicated the specified minimum 0.2% proof stress or yield stress in N/mm2. Bar reinforcement described as “Tor steel” shall be hot rolled, deformed bars or cold twisted steel bars of grade Fe 415. Likewise, bars described as “TMT” shall be thermo-mechanically treated deformed steel bars of grade Fe 500. With respect to manufacture, quality, physical properties and related requirements, reinforcement of the foregoing description shall comply with appropriate parts of the latest versions of IS: 432 for mild steel and IS: 1786 for tor steel and TMT. Reinforcement shall be free from pitting due to corrosion, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease, adhering earth, ice or other materials that may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that may, in the opinion the of the Engineer, cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. Adhering lime wash or cement grout shall be permitted. Each reinforcing bars shall be tested, and any bar showing cracks or flows or scales shall not be used. The size of a reinforcement bar described on the working drawings or elsewhere shall be the minimum, and the rolling margin and other tolerances shall be wholly above this size.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 33
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
7.3. EXECUTION 7.3.1. Bending Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing steel shall be bent in accordance with procedure specified in the latest revision of IS 2502 or as approved by the Engineer. Reinforcement bars shall be bent by machine or other approved means producing a gradual and even motion. All the bars shall be cold bent unless otherwise approved. Bends and shapes shall comply strictly with the dimensions in the approved bar bending schedule. Bars correctly bent shall only be used. No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the work without the approval of the Engineer, whether or not the reinforcement is partially embedded in concrete. Bars shall not be straightened in a manner that will injure the materials. Re-bending can be done only if approved by the Engineer.
7.3.2. Placing in Position All reinforcement shall be accurately placed in position as shown on the Drawings. The placing of reinforcement bars shall be completed well in advance of concrete pouring. The reinforcement shall be checked by the Engineer for accuracy of placement and cleanliness and necessary corrections prior to pouring the concrete. Bars intended to be in contact at crossing points shall be securely bound together at all such points by No. 20 BG annealed soft iron wire or as directed by the Engineer. Binders and the like shall be tightly embraced with the bars with which they are intended to be in contact and shall be securely held. The vertical distance between successive layers of bars shall be placed by provision of mild steel spacer bars. They should be so spaced that the main bars do not sag perceptibly between adjacent spaces. Concrete blocks shall be used for ensuring the cover and positioning of reinforcement. They shall be made of mortar of mix one part cement to two parts sand by volume and cured for at least seven days. The sizes and locations of concrete blocks shall be as approved by the Engineer. Laps and anchorage lengths of reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with latest revision of IS: 456 unless otherwise specified. If the bars in a lap are of different diameter, the smaller diameter shall guide the lap length. The laps shall be staggered. Where required or indicated in Drawings, mechanical couplers shall be used for lapping bars.
7.3.3. Cover to Reinforcement Reinforcement left projecting for bending for future extension shall be thoroughly coated with cement grout wash, encased in concrete or otherwise protected from corrosion, as approved by the Engineer. Reinforcement elsewhere shall have a clear cover to the main reinforcement for structural members as specified in IS 456 or as stated in the Drawings.
7.3.4. Preparation for Concreting Before placing concrete, the reinforcement shall be cleaned of earth material, loose rust, oil, paint or other material which could impair bond with concrete. Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer has inspected the reinforcing steel and given his permission to place concrete. Concrete placed in violation of this requirement will be subject to removal and rejection, at the Contractor’s expense.
7.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7.4.1. Measurement Reinforcement shall be measured in kg or metric tons computed based on drawings and the approved bar bending schedule using the theoretical unit weights of reinforcement. No allowance in weight shall be allowed for cutting to waste, rolling margin, extra length or other tolerance. Standard hooks and laps, as approved, shall be measured for payment. However, chairs, spacer bars, etc. shall not be measured.
7.4.2. Payment Payment for reinforcement shall be made at the unit rate tendered in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include supply and delivery, unloading, hauling, storing, sorting, cutting, bending, cleaning, placing and securing and maintaining in position all reinforcement bars, as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, including material and labour for the complete works. Nothing extra shall be paid for preparation of the bar bending schedule and testing.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 34
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
8. FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE 8.1. GENERAL 8.1.1. Scope This specification covers centring and shuttering works for RCC works of any size, shape etc., at any level, including strutting, propping and removal thereof.
8.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards (or approved equal) except as they are modified and supplemented herein: a) IS: 3696 - 1987: Safety Code for Scaffolds and Ladders b) IS: 4990 - 2011: Plywood for Concrete Shuttering Works - Specification c) IS: 14667 - 1999: Falsework for Concrete Structures - Guidelines d) IS: 456 - 2000: Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete e) IS: 2750 - 1964: Specification for Steel Scaffoldings.
8.1.3. Tolerances The formwork shall be so made as to produce finished concrete that is true to shape, lines, levels, plumb and dimensions as shown on the Drawings, subject to the following tolerance unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification or Drawings or directed by the Engineer: a) Sectional dimension: 5 mm b) Plumb: 1 in 1000 of height c) Levels: 3 mm before any deflection has taken place
8.2. SUBMITTALS All formwork shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for approval. The formwork shall safely support the static and live loads that could be applied to it during construction, maintenance and removal. The deformations of the formwork shall be less than the specified tolerances.
8.3. MATERIAL Formwork shall be composed of steel, best quality props and laminated waterproof shuttering plywood (minimum 19 mm thick waterproof, or as instructed by the Engineer), fiberglass-reinforced plastic or any other material that will result in concrete with the required finish and within the specified tolerance. Timber shall be free from knots and shall be of medium grain as far as possible. Hard woods shall be used as caps and wedges under or over posts. Plywood or equivalent shall be used where specified to obtain smooth surface for exposed concrete work. Struts shall generally be mild steel tubes and strong Sal wood posts 150 mm or above in diameter. Wood or other porous form material shall be treated or coated to prevent absorption of water from the fresh concrete and to prevent discolouration or chemical deterioration of the concrete surface. All form material shall be free of raised grains, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches and other defects that would impair the appearance of the concrete surface. Bamboo, small diameter posts, etc. shall not be used unless specially approved by the Engineer in specific cases. The use of aluminium form material in contact with concrete shall not be allowed.
8.4. EXECUTION 8.4.1. Construction The centring for the formwork shall be true and rigid and thoroughly braced horizontally and diagonally. The forms shall be sufficiently strong to carry, without undue deformation, the dead weight of the concrete as a liquid and working load. Where the concrete is vibrated, the formwork shall be strong enough to withstand the effects of vibration without appreciable deflection, bulging or distortion and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any leakage of mortar. The formwork shall be such as to ensure the concrete a smooth uniform surface free from honeycombs, air bubbles, fines and other blemishes.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 35
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Any blemishes or defect found on the surface of the concrete must be brought to the notice of the Engineer and immediately rectified free of charge as directed or approved by the Engineer. Where there are chances of fixtures being embedded, only mild steel or concrete of adequate strength shall be used. Block outs and sleeves shall be provided for mechanical and electrical work wherever necessary, as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. Embedded items shall be secured prior to concrete placement. Templates shall be used to set equipment anchor bolts and other items where final alignment is critical. For exposed interior and exterior concrete surface of beams, columns and walls, plywood or other approved forms, thoroughly cleaned and tied together with approved corrosion-resident divides shall be used. Rigid care shall be exercised in ensuring that all columns are plumb and true and thoroughly cross-braced to keep them so. All floor and beam centring shall be crowned not less than 8 mm in all directions for every 5 m span. Unless described in the Drawing or elsewhere to the contrary, bevelled strips 25 mm x 25 mm shall be provided, without any extra charge, to form angles and in corners of column and beam boxes for chamfering of corners. Temporary openings for cleaning, inspection and for pouring concrete shall be provided at the base of vertical forms and at other places, where they are necessary and are directed by the Engineer. The temporary openings shall be so formed that they can be conveniently concreted.
8.4.2. Cleaning and Treatment All rubbish, loose concrete chippings, shavings, saw dust, etc. shall be scrupulously removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is poured. Wire brushes, brooms, etc. compressed air jet and/or water jet shall be kept handy for the cleaning if directed by the Engineer. The form surface in contact with concrete shall be treated with approved non-staining composites, such as approved brand form oil. The composites shall not come in contact with reinforcing steel or existing concrete surface. They shall not be allowed to accumulate at the bottom of the shuttering. The formwork shall be so designed and erected that the forms for slabs and the sides of the beams, columns and walls may be removed first, leaving the shuttering to the soffits of beams and their support in position. If formwork for column is erected for the full height of the columns, one side of the form shall be left open and built up in sections, as placing of concrete proceeds. Wedges, spacer bolts, clamps, or other suitable means shall be provided to allow accurate adjustment of the formwork and to allow it to be removed gradually without jarring the concrete.
8.4.3. Maintenance Positive means of adjustment, such as wedges and jacks, shall be provided for shores, struts and similar members. Adjustments shall be made before and during concrete placement as needed to result in concrete meeting the specified tolerance.
8.4.4. Removal The Contractor shall record on the Drawing or in some approved manner, the date on which the concrete is placed in each part of the work and the date on which the formwork is removed therefrom and have this record checked and countersigned by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe removal of the formwork, but the Engineer may delay the time of removal if he considers it necessary. Any work showing signs of damage through premature removal of formwork or loading shall be entirely reconstructed without any extra cost of the Engineer. Forms for various types of structural component shall not be removed before the minimum periods specified below, which shall also be subjected to the approval of the Engineer. Minimum days by temperature range in case Minimum days by temperature range in case Structural element of Ordinary Portland Cement Concrete of Rapid Hardening Portland Cement Concrete 40OC to 20OC 20OC to 5OC 40OC to 20OC 20OC to 5OC Columns, walls 1 2 1/2 2 Beam sides 2 4 1 3 Beam soffit 21 28 10 16 Slabs > 125 mm 7 14 4 7 Slab ≤ 125 mm 14 21 8 14 The forms shall not be removed until site cured test cubes develop 50% of the 28-day strength. Before removing any formwork, the Contractor must notify the Engineer well in advance to enable him to inspect the concrete if he so desires.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 36
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
8.4.5. Reuse of Forms Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, joints etc. examined and when necessary repaired and inside surface treated as specified hereinbefore. Formwork shall not be used/re-used, if declared unfit or unserviceable by the Engineer.
8.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8.5.1. Measurement Measurement of payment for formwork shall be made of the area, in square meters, of the concrete surface formed to the neat lines as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer.
8.5.2. Payment Payment for formwork shall be made at the unit rate tendered for the item in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include for all necessary material and labour required to design, supply, fabricate, erect and remove the formwork, stage scaffoldings and the cost of all other necessary works connected therewith. No separate payment shall be made for formwork required for construction and contraction joint or required for construction over break. The cost of such formwork is deemed to be included in the appropriate unit costs of other works.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 37
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
9. JOINTS 9.1. GENERAL 9.1.1. Scope This Specification covers the furnishing and installing of concrete joint filler, water stops and other concrete jointing and sealing material. The Contractor shall construct the expansion, contraction, control, sliding and construction joints in the concrete works as shown on the Drawings. If the Contractor wishes to propose alternative joint positions, he shall submit them to the Engineer for approval.
9.1.2. Definitions Expansion Joint Expansion joints are defined as joints in concrete filled with resilient material to permit dimensional changes without damage to the concrete. Expansion joints shall be used only where shown on the Drawings.
Contraction Joint Contraction joint is defined as a concrete surface upon or against which new concrete is to be placed but not bonded to provide for volumetric shrinkage of monolithic units or movement between monolithic units. The surface of the concrete first placed at a contraction joint shall be coated with sealing compound before the concrete on the other side of the joint is placed. Steel reinforcement bars shall not run through contraction joints. Contraction joints shall be used only where shown on the Drawings.
Control Joint Control joints are defined as weakened plane joints, either pre-formed or grooved in concrete, to induce a concrete joint in the hardened concrete. Steel reinforcement bars may or may not be required through control joints, as shown on the Drawings.
Construction Joint Construction joint is defined as a concrete surface upon or against which concrete is to be placed and to which new concrete is to adhere, that have become so rigid that the new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. Construction joints shall be used where shown on the Drawings, except that the Contractor may, subject to approval of the Engineer, modify the number and locations of construction joints by actual requirements based on the extent of uninterrupted placing of concrete between joint locations. Construction joints not indicated on the Drawings shall be so made and located so as to least impair the strength of the structure. Stub walls shall not be used. The Engineer may require that water stops be placed in any or all types of joints.
Sliding Joint Sliding joint is defined as joint provided between two structural elements, one supported on the other, to allow independent sliding motion between these elements while maintaining vertical contact, and hence support, between them. These joints shall be formed through thick plastic, slip membrane, stainless steel sheets, elastomeric pad or rollers on the supporting element such that the elements can move smoothly at the joint. The joint shall be placed as shown on Drawings. Steel reinforcement bars shall not run through the joints.
Seismic Joints Seismic joint is defined as a joint introduced to separate wings, or other parts, of a single building. This joint occurs naturally when one building is built adjacent to another, whether or not the buildings are linked functionally. The joint typically creates a separation between the adjacent buildings or parts of the buildings that includes separation of walls, floors, roof and, in the case of joints within the same building, may also include separation, or accommodation for movement of piping, HVAC ducts and other elements that have a functional need to cross the joint. These joints shall accommodate movement in both orthogonal directions simultaneously.
9.1.3. Standards and Guidelines Pertinent provisions of the following reference standards, or approved equal, shall apply to the works of this Section, except as they may be modified herein, and are hereby made a part of this Specification to the extent required:
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 38
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
g) IS: 3414 – 1968: Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Joints in Buildings h) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): . D1190: Specification for Hot-poured Elastic Type Concrete Joint Sealer . D1751: Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) . D1752: Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Non-bituminous Types) i) American Concrete Institute ACI 504: Guide to Joint Sealants for Concrete Structures j) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A116.1: Specification for Two-Component Elastomeric Sealing Compound for the Building Trade k) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Document CRD C-572.
9.1.4. Submittals The Contractor shall furnish a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for each sealant, joint material, water stop, slip membrane, floor joint, etc. used for forming joints. The certificate shall include material identification, quantity, batch number, date of manufacture and certified test results covering all requirements of the specification under which the material is furnished as well as a sample of measurable size to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
9.1.5. Field Measurements The Contractor shall secure all field measurements required for proper and adequate fabrication and installation of the work covered by this Section. Exact measurements are the Contractor’s responsibility.
9.1.6. Quality Assurance All field joints shall be subject to inspection for misalignment, bubbles, inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets and other defects that would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any point. All defective joints shall be replaced, and all faulty material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor.
9.2. MATERIAL 9.2.1. General Joint materials shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Where trade name (or Standards) designations are used, these designations are not intended to be restrictive, but are given for the purpose of indicating the types and quality of materials desired. Similar and equivalent products of other nationally known manufacturers (or standard setting authorities) will be considered for use. All materials placed in contact shall be checked for mutual compatibility.
9.2.2. Plastic Water Stop Plastic water stop material shall be an elastomeric plastic compound, the basic resin of which shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and containing any additional resins, plasticizers or other materials needed to ensure that the material will meet the performance requirements hereinafter specified. The water stop shall be fabricated by an extrusion process such that it will be dense, homogenous, and free from holes and other imperfections. The cross section of the water stop shall be uniform along its length and shall be symmetrical transversely so that the thickness at any given distance from each edge will be uniform.
9.2.3. Copper Water stop Copper water stop shall be fabricated from soft temper copper sheet conforming to ASTM B370, thickness and shape as shown on the Drawings.
9.2.4. Pre-moulded Joint Filler Bituminous-type pre-moulded joint filler as per ASTM D1751; AASHTO M213; or U.S. Fed. Spec. HH-F-34le, Type 1 or 3.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 39
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
9.2.5. Joint Sealant Joint sealant for field moulded sealant strips shall conform to the following: a) Cold Application Type: ASTM D1850 b) Hot Poured Elastic Type: ASTM D1190 Resilient backing material for joint sealant shall be non-staining to the sealant, circular in cross section, 25 to 50% larger in diameter than the opening, and shall be polyvinyl chloride, polyurethane, or polyethylene.
9.2.6. Weak Mortar Filler It is loose cement-sand mortar of 1:10 ratio on infill areas as shown on the drawings.
9.2.7. Slip Membrane Slip membrane shall be a plastic strip 1.5 mm thick and supplied in 300 mm wide rolls or stainless steel plates of 0.5 mm thickness.
9.2.8. Aluminium Floor Joints Aluminium floor joints shall be provided at seismic joints to seal them from weather and ensure safety during walk on them. The specified joint shall be capable of accommodating the specified movement in both orthogonal directions simultaneously. It shall also provide for adequate movement of other systems crossing the joint and means to maintain the fire ratings of the floor, roof and wall systems.
9.3. EXECUTION 9.3.1. Water Stop Water stop material shall be obtained in the longest practicable lengths. All water stop joints shall be spliced to form a continuous watertight seal. Supports shall be provided and suitable precautions taken to protect the water stops during progress of the Works. Any damaged water stops shall be replaced or repaired as directed by the Engineer. Splicing of plastic water stop shall be performed by heat sealing the adjacent surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A thermostatically controlled electric source of heat shall be used to make the splices. The heat shall be sufficient to melt but nor char the plastic. Plastic water stop splices shall be checked for water tightness by using an approved spark tester to check the electrical resistance of the joint. Copper water stops shall be joined together by lapping the joint and brazing both sides across the full width of the strip edges. Splices of copper water stop to plastic or rubber water stop shall be made by cementing, clamping and bolting the copper water stop to the plastic or rubber water stop in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. The copper water stops shall be supported and braced to maintain alignment and grades and shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dried mortar or other deleterious materials before embedment in concrete. The centre of the water stop, on both sides, shall be painted with a 50 mm wide strip of paste-type asphalt emulsion. Water stops shall be installed with approximately equal widths of the material embedded in the concrete on each side of the joint. The concrete shall be carefully placed and vibrated around the water stops to obtain a complete bond between the concrete and all embedded areas of the water stops.
9.3.2. Joint Fillers Pre-moulded joint filler shall be placed to cover the entire surface at the joints and to fit around openings. The exposed edges of the joint shall be set back from the finished surface of the concrete as shown on the Drawings. The joint material shall be held securely in place against the completed side of the joint by means of nails embedded in the first placed concrete or by waterproof cement. Joints shall be tight so that mortar from the concrete will not seep through. Joint sealant strips shall be placed after completion of the concrete curing period, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Sealant shall be placed in accordance with the detail dimensions shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. At the time of sealing, the temperature of the concrete shall be between 4OC and 32OC unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All mortar, laitance, dirt, oil and other foreign material shall be removed from joints or grooves by sandblasting and compressed air, or other approved means, and the concrete shall be surface dry when the sealer is placed. Sealer shall not be placed when the temperature of the concrete or the ambient temperature is greater than 35OC. Placing methods and equipment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealer.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 40
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
In case of fill by weak mortar, a board of thickness equal to the specified gap is placed against one of the surfaces before commencing work on the adjacent surface. After the masonry is built to a certain height, the board is removed and the gap is filled loosely with the weak mortar. Any sealant that becomes un-bonded from the concrete, cracks, or shows any other defects before final acceptance of the Works shall be replaced or repaired at the Contractor's expense.
9.3.3. Contraction, Construction and Control Joints The surface of all contraction joints shall be cleaned thoroughly of accretions of concrete or other foreign materials by scraping, chipping or other means approved by the Engineer and coated with a bond breaker to prevent bonding of the concrete surfaces. The surfaces of construction joints shall be clean and damp when covered with fresh concrete. Cleaning shall consist of the removal of all laitance, loose or defective concrete, coatings, sand, sealing compound if used, and other foreign materials, by wet sandblasting or approved equivalent treatment. The surfaces of construction joints shall be washed thoroughly with water at the last opportunity prior to placing of concrete. All pools of water shall be removed from the surfaces of construction joints before the new concrete is placed. Control joints shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings.
9.3.4. Sliding Joint The concrete surface to receive the slip membrane shall be smooth, regular and clean. This surface shall be steel float finished. The membrane itself shall have low friction resistance (coefficient of friction in the range of 0.15) but a high resistance to load (usual maximum load of 0.7 N/mm2, or as specified). Normally stainless-steel plates are used.
9.3.5. Seismic Joint Seismic joint shall be formed by providing the clear gap between adjacent structures indicated in the Drawings. This gap shall be clear of all construction tolerances. The gap shall be covered by aluminium floor joints specified in the Drawings or Bill of Quantities.
9.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9.4.1. Measurement Measurement for water stops, joint sealant strip for asphalt seals and aluminium floor joints, pre-moulded joint filler, weak mortar and slip membrane (stainless-steel plates) shall be as stated in the Bill of Quantities. The measurements shall be made to the nearest 10 mm and shall cover the neat linear extent and/or finish lines, as applicable.
9.4.2. Payment Payment for water stops, joint sealant strip for asphalt seals and aluminium floor joints, pre-moulded joint filler, weak mortar and slip membrane shall be at the unit prices in the Bill of Quantities. These unit prices shall include the cost of supplying and placing including any laps or splicing as well as any consumables to complete the task.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 41
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
10. BRICKWORK 10.1. GENERAL 10.1.1. Scope This specification covers the construction of brickwork in general and the erection of half brick, full brick and thicker walls in superstructure in particular. It covers brickwork with normal machine-made and chimney bricks and tradition ornamental architectural bricks (Dachi Apa).
10.1.2. Standards Dachi Apa shall be the product of any brick kiln specializing in traditional Nepalese decorative bricks. Other bricks shall conform to the requirement of NS 1/2035.
10.1.3. Submittal Representative samples of bricks to be used shall be submitted to the Engineer and his approval taken before bulk purchase. The samples shall be kept with the Engineer for future reference and comparison. All bricks supplied shall conform to these approved samples in all respects.
10.2. MATERIAL 10.2.1. Bricks Machine-made and chimney bricks shall be of first class quality. They shall be uniform deep red in colour, thoroughly burnt, regular in shape and size and shall have sharp and square edges and parallel faces to ensure uniformity in the thickness of the courses of brickwork. They shall be sound, hard, homogeneous texture and emit a clear ringing sound on being struck. Their water absorption shall be minimum. Dachi Apa shall meet all of the requirements of machine-made and chimney bricks. However, they shall conform to the shape, size, thickness and design specified from the manufacturer’s catalogue. Bricks shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stones or lumps of any kind. They shall be free from salt that affect the mortar of the masonry. They shall not show any sign of efflorescence, either dry or subsequent to soaking in water.
10.2.2. Cement Cement used for masonry shall conform to IS: 8112-1989. It shall be stored above ground level on perfectly dry platform in a watertight shed. It shall be stacked not more than eight bags high. The bags shall be stocked in a manner to facilitate removal and use in the order in which they are received. Partly set cement shall not be used.
10.2.3. Water Water shall be clean drinking water, free from deleterious matters and shall be stored in temporary reservoirs or tanks constructed of brickwork with cement plaster finish.
10.2.4. Fine Aggregate Sand shall be natural occurring river bed sand or pit sand. It shall be clean and free from dirt, clay or other impurities. Sand brought to the site shall be approved by the Engineer.
10.3. EXECUTION 10.3.1. Preparation of Mortar Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, cement-sand paste (minimum 1:4 mix) shall be used as mortar for brickwork. In case of Dachi Apa, brick powder and colouring pigment shall replace a part of the sand as approved by the Engineer to get a traditional finish. To prepare the mortar, cement and sand shall be thoroughly dry mixed. Water is then added to obtain a mortar paste of stiff consistency. Care being taken to add just sufficient water for the purpose. Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing, within 30 minutes after the cement is mixed wet.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 42
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
10.3.2. Scaffolding Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. The supports shall be sound and strong and of steel tubular construction unless otherwise approved. The vertical posts shall be tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. The three sides of the scaffolding shall be covered with 1 m wide board to protect the materials from dropping off while working.
10.3.3. Soaking Bricks Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period that is sufficient for the water just to penetrate their whole depth. Any dirt, sand and dust shall be removed from the surface of the bricks. So that bricks are skin dry at the time of use, they shall be removed from the soaking tank sufficiently early.
10.3.4. Bond Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, English Bond shall be used in the construction of full brick and thicker walls. Quoin bricks shall be laid header and stretcher in alternative courses, bond being obtained by placing a closer next to the quoin header. For half brick thick walls and decorative bricks, stretcher bond shall be used throughout.
10.3.5. Laying of Bricks for Masonry Bricks shall be laid on a full bed of mortar evenly applied on the wetted surface of the old brickwork. Any dirt or earth is on the wall shall be cleaned by wire brush and washed down with water jet. When laying, the bricks shall be slightly pressed so that the mortar can get into all the pores of the brick surface to ensure proper adhesion. Cross joints and wall joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no hollow spaces are left. All brickwork shall be in plumb, square and true to dimensions. All brickwork shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural parts around door and window frames unless otherwise specified in the drawings. Where specified for earthquake protection purpose, a gap between the brickwork and adjoining columns and overhead beams shall be provided. The gaps shall be filled as specified in Part I, Section 8: Joints. The thickness of the joints in the brickwork shall be 8 mm unless otherwise specified and raked out to a depth of 6 mm at the time of laying. In case of Dachi Apa, the joint thicknesses may vary across the brick section according to the shape of the brick, generally being zero at the outer face of the brickwork and increasing towards the interior. A lime-cement-brick powder paste shall be immediately applied to the laid Dachi Apa masonry to get a traditional finish. During construction, no part of a half-brick thick wall shall rise more than 1 m above the general construction level to avoid unequal settlement and improper jointing. Where the masonry of one part has to be delayed, the work shall be racked back suitably at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees according to bond and not toothed. Holes of required size shall be left in the brickwork for pipes and other services. After the pipes and service lines are laid, the leftover holes shall be filled with neatly made up with bricks in cement mortar or 1:2:4 cement concrete. Iron fixtures and connectors shall not be laid directly touching bricks but shall be buried in similar mortar or concrete.
10.3.6. Reinforcing and Anchorage For external walls, anchors in the form of flats or rods from beams and columns and any other anchoring and reinforcement, as shown on Drawings, shall be adequately embedded in the masonry. For half-brick walls, two bars of 8 mm diameter shall be used longitudinally at every fifth course of the brickwork. The first reinforcement shall be placed on top of the bottommost course. The bars shall be fully embedded in the mortar, and their ends shall be properly bonded in the vertical joints of brickwork or to the main wall, as directed by the Engineer Laps for the reinforcement shall be a minimum of 45 times the bar diameter. Where traditional decorative brick and half brick masonries are constructed side-by-side, the two masonries will be constructed independently but with butterfly connecters placed at 600 mm interval both vertically and horizontally. The connecters shall cover the full width of the inner brick wall and part width of the decorative Dachi Apa wall so that the outer appearance is not affected.
10.3.7. Curing and Protection The brickwork shall be kept wet for 7 days counted from 24 hours after the course is laid. At the end of a day’s work, the masonry construction shall be protected from harmful effects of rain, sun and frost by suitable coverings such as tarpaulin. Care shall be taken during construction that edges of jambs, sills, heads, etc. are not damaged.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 43
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
10.4. TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE Mortar shall comply with IS 2250-1981; Code of Practice for preparation and use of masonry mortar. The mortar shall have the strength not less than 7.5 N/mm2 at 28 days as specified. Before laying any mortar, the Contractor shall make three sets of 50 mm mortar test cubes from each source of sand to demonstrate the compliance of the mix to the specified strength. Each set shall comprise two cubes, one to be tested at 7 days and the other to be tested at 28 days. During construction, the Contractor shall make and test mortar cubes at the rate of three cubes for every 10 m3 of masonry. Testing of cubes shall be in accordance with IS 2250.
10.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 10.5.1. Measurement Measurement for payments shall be done in unit as specified in the Bill of Quantities. Deductions of all openings and any concrete works in the brickwork shall be done to arrive at the net quantity. However, nothing extra shall be paid for making such openings, etc. No deductions shall be done for holdfasts and butterfly connectors. Unless specified otherwise, nothing extra shall be admissible for cutting of bricks to suit the RCC structure, walls in any shape other than straight or any cutting necessary for shaping the walls to the structural design requirements. Extra payment shall, however, be permissible for providing quarter brick thick brickwork, brick on edge, brick in soldier course, springs, etc. for exposed brickwork and for brickwork in arches. Cutting in brickwork shall be admissible only for civil works.
10.5.2. Payment Payment for different types of brick masonries shall be made at the corresponding unit rates tendered in the Bill of Quantities. These unit rates shall include necessary materials, labour and tools for proper execution of the work, all auxiliary works, double scaffolding, (special) conveyance of materials, curing, etc. The rates shall be applicable for works at all level and of all shapes.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 44
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
11. STONE MASONRY 11.1. SCOPE This Section covers the furnishing of materials and construction of different types of stone masonry works in accordance with the Drawing and this Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
11.2. MATERIAL 11.2.1. Stone The stones to be used shall be durable and angular in shape. If boulders are used they shall be broken into angular pieces. The stones shall be sound, hard, free from iron bands, spots, sand holes, flaws, shakes, cracks or other defects. The stone shall not absorb water more than 5 per cent. The specific gravity of the stone shall not be less than 2.50. Except otherwise described in the contract, the length of any stone shall not exceed three times its height. The breadth of the stone on the bed shall not be less than 150 mm nor greater than 3/4 the thickness of the wall. At least 85% of the stones used in masonry, except those used for chinking as chips or spalls of stones shall have individual volumes of more that 0.01 m3. The chips or spalls used including voids in the dry stone masonry shall not be more than 20% of the stone masonry by volume. In case of mortared masonry the total volume of mortar and spalls taken together shall not be more than 30% of the mortared masonry. Representative samples of the stones intended for use in the works shall be submitted to the Engineer for prior approval. Further representative samples shall be submitted for approval whenever there is a change in the type or strength of the rock that the Contractor intends to use in masonry work.
11.2.2. Other Material Cement, water and fine aggregate shall be as specified for Part I, Section 10: Brickwork.
11.3. EXECUTION 11.3.1. General Construction shall be carried out in accordance with I.S. 1597-1992, Code of Practice for construction of stone masonry, Part 1 Rubble stone masonry or Part 2 Ashlar Masonry as appropriate. All stratified stone possessing bedding planes shall be laid with its natural bed as nearly as possible at right angles to the direction of load. In the case of arch rings, the natural bed shall be radial. Face work groins shall be built to a height not exceeding one metre in advance of the main body of the work and adjacent walling stepped down on either side. Masonry face work between the groins shall then be built to a height not exceeding 500 mm above the backing which shall then be brought up level with the completed face work. At no time shall the backing be built up higher than the face work. Except for dry rubble walling, all joints (gaps) shall be sufficiently thick to prevent stone to stone contact and the gaps shall be completely filled with mortar. Stones shall be clean and sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of water from mortar. Placing loose mortar on the course and pouring water upon it to fill the gaps in stones shall not be allowed. Mortar shall be fluid, mixed thoroughly and then poured in the joints. No dry or hollow space shall be left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have all its faces completely covered with mortar of the thickness as specified for joints. The bed which is to receive the stone shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of fresh mortar. All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and vertical joints and settled carefully in place with a wooden mallet immediately after placement and solidly embedded in mortar before it has set. Clean and wet chips and spalls shall be wedged into the mortar joints and bed whenever necessary to avoid thick joints or bed of mortar. When the foundation masonry is laid directly on rock, the bedding face of the stones of the first course shall be dressed to fit into rock snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock. For masonry works over rock, a levelling course of M15/40 or M15/20 concrete 100mm thickness shall be laid over rock and then stone masonry work shall be laid without foundation concrete block. In case, any stone already set in mortar is disturbed or the joints broken, it shall be taken out without disturbing the adjoining stones and joints. Dry mortar and stones thoroughly cleaned from the joints and the stones shall be reset in fresh mortar. Sliding one stone on top of another which is freshly laid, shall not be allowed. Shaping and dressing of stone shall be done before it is laid in the work. Dressing and hammering of the laid stones which will loosen the masonry, shall not be allowed. Building up face wall tied with occasional through stones and filling up the middle with stones spalls and chips or dry packing shall not be allowed. Vertical joints shall be staggered. Distance between the nearer vertical joints of upper layer and lower layer in coursed rubble masonry shall not be less than half the height of the course. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 45
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Masonry in a structure between two expansion joints shall be carried up nearly at one uniform level throughout but when breaks are unavoidable the masonry shall be raked in sufficiently long steps to facilitate jointing of old and new work. The stepping of raking shall not be more than 45 degrees with the horizontal.
11.3.2. Ashlar All stones shall be dressed to accurate planes on the beds and joints and they shall be fair and neatly or fine tooled on the face unless otherwise described in the contract.
11.3.3. Block-In-Course Beds and joints shall be squared and dressed for a distance of at least 220 mm from the exposed face. Bond stones shall form at least one sixth of the area of the exposed face and shall extend at least 900 mm into the wall or for the full thickness of the wall if the latter is less than 900 mm. Unless described in the contract as tooled or drafted, the exposed face of all stones shall be blocked and left rough. Arises shall be dressed square at all beds and joints
11.3.4. Square Rubble-Coursed or Broken Course All stones shall be truly squared and dressed for a distance at least 120 mm from the face of the wall. Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of at least one to every 0.8 m2 of exposed face and shall measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm on the face and not less than 450 mm in length or the full thickness of the wall, whichever is the less. Vertical joints in any layer shall be broken in the next layer and the horizontal lapping of the stones shall not be less than 100 mm
11.3.5. Random Rubble-Coursed or Un-coursed All stones shall be carefully set with a bond stone provided at the rate of at least one to every 0.9 m2 of exposed face. Bond stones shall measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm on the exposed face and not less than 450 mm in length or the full thickness of the wall, whichever is the less.
11.3.6. Dry Random Rubble Dry random rubble masonry shall be constructed generally to the requirements of coursed random rubble masonry as specified in Clause 2607 but with the omission of mortar. All stones shall be carefully shaped to obtain as close a fit as possible at all beds and joints, any interstices between the stones being filled with selected stone spalls. The stones in courses shall be laid perpendicular to the batter face. The exposed tops or capings of dry rubble structures shall be formed as shown on the Drawing.
11.3.7. Composite Random Rubble Materials for composite random rubble shall comply with Clause 2602 and construction with Clause 2603. Mortar masonry shall be coursed and comply with Clause 2607 and the dry stone insets with Clause 2608. The dry stone insets shall be constructed when the level of the surrounding mortared masonry surround has reached the top of the dry stone inset.
11.3.8. Concreting Capping Where masonry structures are to receive a concrete capping. The joints to the upper surface of the masonry shall be raked out to a depth of 10 mm prior to placing of the concrete to the capping. The concrete for capping shall be as per the Drawing or as directed by Engineer and shall conform to Section 2000.
11.3.9. Pointing Where external faces of the mortared masonry work will be backfilled or otherwise permanently covered up, the mortared joint shall be finished flush to the faces of the adjacent stonework. Where mortared masonry faces will remain exposed, the mortar joints shall be pointed to a consistent style as shown on the Drawing. Pointing shall be carried out using mortar 1:4 by volume of cement and sand or as shown on the Drawing. The mortar shall be filled and pressed into the raked out joints before giving the required finish. The pointing, if not otherwise mentioned shall be ruled type for which it shall, while masonry work is still green, be ruled along the centre with half round tools of such width as may be specified by the engineer. The excess mortar shall then, be taken off from the edges of the lines and shall not
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 46
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works be unnecessarily plastered over the exposed stone works. The thickness of the joints shall not be less than 3mm for Ashlar masonry. However, the maximum thickness of joints in different works shall be as follows: . Random Rubble : 20 mm . Coursed Rubble : 15 mm . Ashlar masonry : 5 mm
11.3.10. Weep Holes In case of stone masonry retaining walls, weep holes shall be provided with 100mm diameter polythene pipe. The holes shall extend through the full width of masonry with a slope of 1 vertical 20 horizontal towards the draining face. The spacing of weep holes shall generally be 1 m in either direction or as shown on the drawing with the lowest at about 150 mm above the low water level or ground level whichever is higher or as directed by the Engineer. Surfaces of the weep holes shall be smooth and it shall be ensured that the water is properly driven from the backfill.
11.3.11. Other Steps in Execution The minimum ratio of cement-sand mortar shall be 1:6. Other aspects of mortar preparation, scaffolding, curing and protection shall be as per Section 9: Brickwork.
11.4. TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE Mortar shall exhibit a minimum strength of 5 N/mm2 at 28 days. Other aspects of tests and standard of acceptance shall be as per Section 9: Brickwork.
11.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 11.5.1. Measurement Stone masonry shall be measured in cubic metres without making any deduction for weep-holes and with no separate measurement for pointing.
11.5.2. Payment The stone masonry shall be paid at the respective contract unit price which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor. These unit price shall include necessary materials, labour and tools for proper execution of the work, all auxiliary works, double scaffolding, conveyance of materials, curing, etc. The rates shall be applicable for works at all level and of all shapes.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 47
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
12. GENERAL TIMBER WORKS 12.1. GENERAL 12.1.1. Scope This specification covers the woodwork in general, including carpentry and joinery work in roofs, floors, etc.
12.1.2. Standards and Guides Timber work shall conform to the following codes of practice and guides: . IS 2336: 1983 – Code of Practice for Nail-jointed Timber; . IS 3629: 1986 – Specification for Structural Timber in Buildings; . SP 33 (S&T): 1986 Handbook on Timber Engineering
12.2. MATERIALS 12.2.1. Timber Quality Timber to be used for the work shall be from the heart of a sound tree of mature growth, its sapwood being entirely removed. It shall be uniform in substance, straight in fiber, free from large, loose, dead or cluster knots, flaws, shakes, warps, cups, springs, twist bends or defects of any kind. It shall also be free from spongy, brittle, flaky or brushy conditions. All timber shall be seasoned and be free from decay, rot, harmful fungi and insect attacks and from any other damage of harmful nature that can affect the strength, durability, appearance or its usefulness for the purpose for which it is required.
Colour As far as possible, the colour of timber shall be uniform. The darkness of colour amongst coloured species shall generally be taken as a sign of strength and durability.
Kind The species of timber to be used shall be as mentioned in the Drawings or in the Bill of Quantities. Where such species are not mentioned, they shall be the best quality Sal-wood or Teak-wood, as approved by the Engineer. The Engineer may inspect all logs and scantlings prior to use and may reject any that he considers defective in the requirement of the Specifications.
Moisture Content The maximum permissible moisture content for timber shall be 12% of its dry weight.
12.2.2. Glue Glue to be used for timber work shall comply with the provisions of IS 852:1994 or IS 851:1978 in all respects.
12.2.3. Nails and Screws Nails, screws, ties, straps, bolts, plates etc., used in timber work shall be of the material, make and pattern specified in the Drawing or the related item in the Bill of Quantities. They shall comply with IS specifications published and revised from time to time and as approved by the Engineer.
12.3. EXECUTION 12.3.1. Precautions against Decaying a) The Contractor shall, in all cases, paint, and oil or otherwise treat woodwork with the prior approval of the Engineer. b) All parts of woodwork resting on or set in masonry shall be well painted with two coats of hot boiled tar approved by the Engineer. The tar shall be so applied as not to appear on exposed timber. No extra payment shall be made for such tarring. Timber buried in the ground shall be well coated with tar.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 48
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
c) When the end of a beam or joint is embedded in masonry, an air space of 6 mm shall be left at the ends and sides wherever practicable and necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
12.3.2. Sawing All scantlings shall be sawn in straight lines and plains and shall be of uniform thickness and full measurement from end to end and shall be sawn in the direction of the grain. They shall be sawn with such sufficient margin as to secure specified dimensions, lines and planes after being wrought. The maximum slope of grains in the timber shall range between 1 in 10 and 1 in 20.
12.3.3. Workmanship All woodwork shall be neatly and truly finished to the exact required dimensions shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise required in the special provisions, woodwork that will remain exposed to view when the work is completed shall be accurately planed to the required dimensions, perfectly smooth and to the lines, planes or curves as required. Unless otherwise specified, all joints shall be simple Tenon and mortice joints with the end of the Tenon exposed to view. All mortice, Tenon and other types of joints shall fit truly and fully without any wedging or filling, in a workmanlike manner. Only where specially required, the end of the Tenon shall not show. All joints shall be of types shown in the Drawings or specified for the item and as directed by the Engineer. Where no specific instruction is given to the Contractor, he shall observe the following principles in forming joints: a) To cut the joint and arrange fastenings so as to weaken as little as possible the pieces of timber they contact. b) To place each abutting surface in a joint, as nearly as possible, perpendicular to the pressure it has to transmit. c) To firm and fit accurately every pair of surfaces that come in contact. All framed joinery for external work shall be put together with white lead and joints planed with hard wood or bamboo pins. For internal works where joints are not likely to be affected by moisture, the joints may be glued and similarly pinned. Where ordered, the butt joints shall be cross-tongued, and the tongues cut at right angle or diagonally to the grain of the wood. All mouldings shall be cleaned and accurately finished and all miters etc. shall be properly met. Where turning is required, it shall be done to the exact shape shown in the drawings.
12.3.4. Framing Framed woodwork includes all sawing, cutting, planning, joining, framing, supply and use of all straps, bolts, hold fasts, nails, trenails, spikes, screws, etc. necessary for framing and fixing. Framing and trussing are to be done in the best possible manner. All necessary ties, straps, bolts, screws etc., shall be fitted as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Holes of correct size shall be drilled before inserting screws. Driving in or starting the screws with hammer is prohibited. All screws shall be dipped in oil before being inserted in the wood. The kind of nails and screws shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The heads of nails or screws shall be sunk or dealt with as the Engineer may desire.
12.3.5. Scaffolding The Contractor shall provide all labour, scaffolding, ladders and tackle necessary for hoisting and fixing wood work in position and afford facilities for its inspection during construction. He shall also be responsible to see that the tackle, scaffolding, etc. are of the requisite strength and that the work is secured in a proper manner during inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of the work, workman and for any action or compensation that may arise in this connection.
12.3.6. Ironwork All ironwork connected with the woodwork and going to be embedded in masonry shall receive two coats of hot coal tar before erection. If it is to be painted, it shall be given the first two coats on the ground before being fixed in position and the third coat afterwards.
12.3.7. Precaution against Fire No woodwork of any kind shall be laid within 60 mm of a fireplace or flue. During the progress of work, all shavings, cuttings and other rubbish shall be cleared away as the work progresses, and all precautions shall be taken against fire. No rubbish shall be left under floorboards or in other concealed position on the job.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 49
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
12.3.8. Inspection All woodwork shall be inspected and approved by Engineer before being put into the work. The Engineer shall not be barred from rejecting any wrought timber on account of defective quality by reason of his having previously passed the same before it had been worked upon. In no case the woodwork shall be painted or otherwise treated before it is inspected and approved by Engineer. After being passed by the Engineer, all woodwork in a building shall have the primary coat of paint put on or otherwise treated before being fitted in position. The subsequent coats of paint or other finish shall be applied after the woodwork is fixed in position.
12.3.9. Holding-down Bolts Unless otherwise expressively described, holding-down bolts for fixing timber in roof, floor, etc. shall be 16 mm at 600 mm centres, grouted in 230 x 300 x 230 mm cement concrete.
12.3.10. Defective Works If any undue shrinkage or bad workmanship is discovered within three months after the work is completed, the Contractor shall forthwith replace or fix the same to the satisfaction of the Engineer without extra charge.
12.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 12.4.1. Measurement Measurement for payment for general timber works shall be made of the length in meters, of the area in square meters and of the volume in cubic meters.
12.4.2. Payment Payment shall be made for general timber work at the unit price tendered in the Bill of Quantities for the following works, complete in every respect and as specified herein: a) Supply of specified species of timber sawn to requisite sizes without any defect, wrought, framed and fixed in position with the required standard of workmanship, including supply and fixing of fixtures, straps, bolts, holdfasts, spikes, nails, screws, etc., applying glue or other joining materials, coal tarring embedded parts and painting joints. b) All materials, labourers, scaffolding, equipment, etc. for framing, fixing and completing the item as specified. c) Applying two coats of double boiled linseed oil and two coats of black paint on the surface of woodwork attached to walls, unless other types of finishing is specified in the special provisions.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 50
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
13. WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOWS 13.1. GENERAL 13.1.1. Scope This specification covers the preparation, supply and fixing of wooden door and window frames and shutters with or without ventilators. In general and where applicable, the specifications for CS-110 shall also be referred to.
13.1.2. Standards Wooden doors and windows shall conform to the following codes of practice and guides: a) IS 4021: 1995 – Timber Door, Window and Ventilator Frames – Specifications b) IS 4913: 1968 – Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Timber Doors and Windows c) IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003 – Timber Panelled and Glazed Shutters, Part 1: Door Shutters – Specifications d) IS 1003 (Part 2): 2003 – Timber Panelled and Glazed Shutters, Part 1: Window and Ventilator Shutters – Specifications e) IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999 – Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (Solid Core Type), Part 1: Plywood Face Panels f) IS 2202 (Part 2): 1983 – Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (Solid Core Type), Part 2: Particle Board and Hardboard Face Panels g) IS 2191(Part 1): 1983 – Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (Cellular and Hollow Core Type), Part 1: Plywood Face Panels h) IS 2191(Part 2): 1983 – Specification for Wooden Flush Door Shutters (Cellular and Hollow Core Type), Part 1: Particle Board and Hardboard Face Panels
13.1.3. Submittals The Contractor’s shop drawings showing complete details of the work shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with the contract requirements.
13.2. PRODUCTS 13.2.1. Fixtures and Fastenings All fixtures and fastenings shall be of brass or oxidized brass or aluminium, as specified in the Bill of Quantities, and shall be new, sound and strong. They shall be sectional and of the best quality and workmanship. Their size, shape, designs and finish shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer and shall be submitted in his office for reference. All fixtures shall be fixed to the joining frame and shutter in a secure and efficient manner. Any of the fixtures damaged during fixing shall be removed and replaced by new ones, and the surface of the joinery shall be made good where affected, all at the Contractor’s expense. Where not mentioned on the Drawing or in the Bill of Quantities, the type of fixing shall be hung or swung as directed by the Engineer. In case the ventilator is hung, two brass or steel butt hinges shall be fixed with brass screws unless otherwise mentioned on the Drawings. A pair of 225 mm brass hooks and eyes shall be fixed to the ventilator frame and the shutter as directed. If the ventilator is of the swinging type, hooks and eyes can be dispensed with. The ventilator shall swing about a central horizontal axis of a pair of brass pivots in sockets. One pair of such centres, chat hooks, one brass ring with screws attachment, as per Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, and a good quality window hemp cord of adequate length for convenient operation of the ventilator shall be provided. A two- pronged brass hook shall be embedded in the wall at the said height above the floor level for tying the cord. All fixtures shall be fixed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
13.2.2. Chaukhat or Frame The quality of the timber used for frames shall be as specified in the Drawings or first class salwood if not specified. The timber shall be of best quality from the heart of matured trees, with permissible gradient of in grain. The timber shall be either seasoned in a seasoning plant or naturally sun dried in a shed for a period of two years. The work shall be as per Drawings. Timber shall be properly planed, wrought and dressed in a workmanlike manner. Joints shall be true to fit and of the kind directed by the Engineer. When a ventilator is provided above a door, the full length of frame shall be provided. Joints in the frame vertical style or horizontal rail shall not be allowed. The unrebated edges of the frame in the opening shall be rounded or beaded uniformly.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 51
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Rebates and plaster key grooves shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. Six numbers of 250 mm long, 30 mm wide and 6 mm thick hold fasts shall be provided at each frame unless otherwise specified in the Drawings.
13.2.3. Panelled Shutters Panelled shutter may be made in a number of ways and can be of different varieties. The shutter may be panelled single, double, triple or so on. The design of panels and the number of panels to be used shall be as per the Drawings and directed by the Engineer. The stiles of panelled shutters shall be continuous from the top to bottom. Their rails and mutins or mullions shall be jointed to the styles, and the mutins or mullions shall be joined to the rails. The thickness of the frame for the shutters shall vary from 32 mm to 50 mm or as per the Drawing, depending upon the size of the door, the situation, the thickness of the panels, etc. The thickness of the panels shall be 12 mm or as specified on the Drawing. Grooves shall be made on all the inside faces of the frame to receive panels.
13.2.4. Fully Glazed or Partially Glazed Shutters Fully or partially glazed shutters shall be as described for panelled shutters. However, instead of timber panels, glass panels of specified thicknesses shall be provided.
13.2.5. Solid Core Plywood Door Shutters Solid core plywood door shutters shall be either commercial ply or teak ply of solid cored sections of specified thickness conforming to IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999. These shutters shall be factory made shutters from manufacturing companies that have hot press and modern equipment. Samples shall be produced for approval.
13.2.6. Hollow Core Door Shutters Hollow core door shutters shall be fabricated at site in accordance with the provisions of IS 2191: 1983, Parts 1 or 2, respectively, as applicable for plywood face panels or particle board and hardboard face panels. The stiles, rails, etc. of the shutters shall be at least 25 mm thick and shall conform to the Drawings. Commercial or teak plywood shall be fixed with panel pins already pressed with an approved adhesive.
13.2.7. Wire Mesh Shutters The finished sizes of the components like styles, rails, mutins shall be as per the Drawings. The workmanship shall be of the best quality. The styles, rails, etc., shall be rebated 12 mm along the side to receive the wire gauge. The stainless steel wire mesh of 24 gauge of not more than 2.5 mm mesh shall be bent to 90º to 12 mm along both sides to rebate and fixed securely to the styles, rails and mutins by galvanized iron staples at about 150 mm intervals, staggered spacing. Fillets shall be of specified same timber neatly fixed with small screws, spaced about 75 mm centres. The exposed edges of fillets shall be neatly finished. The wire mesh shall be tightly stretched during fixing. The space between the fillet and the rebate where the webbing is bent shall be neatly finished with putty, so that cut end of webbing may not be visible. Each shutter shall be fitted with necessary fittings of approved quality as shown on the drawings. For wire mesh door shutters, expanded metal of 50 mm mesh shall be provided along with wire mesh.
13.2.8. Sanjhya (Nepali Wooden Grilled Window) Sanjhya window is Nepalese traditional carved wooden-grilled window including frame. The quality of the timber shall be as specified and workmanship shall be of the best quality with seasoned timber. The window shall be fixed as specified for wooden frames. The Sanjhya window shall be covered by polyethylene sheet or tarpaulin or any other means during cement related works undergoing nearby. Any unwanted damages during construction period shall be replaced or repaired or maintained as soon as possible as per the instructions of Engineer. Samples shall be produced for approval.
13.2.9. Iron Monger for Shutters Unless specifically mentioned in the Drawing or in the Bill of Quantities, following iron mongers shall be provided in each shutter. Hinges . Hinges shall be made up of brass of size and numbers as follows:
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 52
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
. For window shutter up to 0.2 sq. m, 2 nos. 50 mm size . For window shutter up to 0.3 sq. m, 2 nos. 65 mm size . For window shutter up to 0.7 sq. m, 2 nos. 90 mm size. . For window shutter up to 0.5 sq. m, 2 nos. 75 mm size. . For door shutters up to 1 sq. m, 2 nos. 75 mm size. . For door shutters up to 2 sq. m, 3 nos. 100 mm size. . For door shutters up to 3 sq. m, 3 nos. 150 mm size. . Special provisions shall be made for door shutters of area more than 3 sq. m.
Tower Bolts Tower Bolts shall be made up of brass. In each window shutter or a pair of window shutter, the following tower bolts shall be provided: . For ventilator, Top hung type, 2 nos. 50 mm size at bottom . For ventilator, Bottom hung type, 2 nos. 50 mm eye bolt at top. . For ventilator, Central pivot type, 2 nos. 50mm size at bottom . Window, Bottom 150 mm size for all . Window, Top 230 mm long for up to 178mm lintel height . Window, Top 300 mm for more than 178mm lintel height
Eye hooks . 75 mm size for all window shutters . 150 mm to 230 mm (as approved) for top hung ventilator for bottom hung ventilator
Stoppers and Cleats In doors where the shutters dashes the wall or another door, a wall type door stopper shall be provided in each door shutter, so that the door shutter does not touched the surface of the wall. Unless combined stop and holder is not provided to the doors, a standard type of door holder or cleat shall be provided to each door shutter so that the door can be kept completely open when required.
Door Spring Each door shutter shall consist of a 230 to 300 mm long door spring of type/make approved by the Engineer.
Locks A knob type or mortice type door lock with latch and dead bolt or 7 lever pad lock with 225 mm to 300 mm altroph (aluminium) shall be provided in each door shutter as per item. But for internal bolt room doors such locks shall be replaced by tower bolts. The locks manufacturer shall conform to Godrej or equivalent.
Handle All window shutters shall be provided with one 100 mm size handle of approved make and type. The material of the handle shall be of brass. Wherever handled knob type door lock is not provided, doors shall be provided with handle/push plate of approved type and make.
13.3. EXECUTION 13.3.1. Construction The material, construction and workmanship for door and window shutters shall conform to I.S. 1003: 2003, Parts 1 and 2, respectively. The finished dimensions of the doors or windows shall conform to the Drawings. The door or windows sizes shown on Drawings shall be the clear unrebated openings of the frame.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 53
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
13.3.2. Frames When included, the ventilator shall be provided by having full-length, one-piece posts for door or window and ventilator extending the frame on top of the head to the required extent. The unrebated edges of the frame in the opening shall be rounded or headed uniformly. When no sills are provided for doors, the vertical posts of the frame in the ground floor shall be embedded in the sill masonry for 5 cm. On upper storeys, the vertical posts shall be fixed in the floor slab or masonry by forming notches 18 mm deep. Holdfasts shall be fixed with iron screws as specified above. Any slight adjustment of spacing necessary shall be done to have the holdfasts in the joints of masonry courses. The frames shall be erected in position and held plumb with strong supports from both sides and built in sold in masonry as it is being built.
13.3.3. Shutters The shutters shall be of finished dimensions with ornamental mouldings and glaze and other components as specified on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer for the particular type but adjusted for the absence of rebates in the frames and shutters by reducing the glaze. The clearance between the finished shutter and the door frames and between the shutters themselves shall not exceed 3mm unless otherwise specified on the drawings. In case of double leaf door, no rebate shall be provided where they meet. Each door shutter shall be fixed with two double acting spring hinges and one blank hinge or butt hinge. The fixing and size of hinges shall be as shown on the drawings, by cutting the necessary recess to correspond to the thickness of the flaps, in the sides of the shutter style and the door frame, spring hinges shall be fitted at the upper and lower level and blank hinge in between window shutters.
13.3.4. Finishing All door and window frames and shutters that need to be painted or polished shall be filled with wood filler in the joints, planed properly with various grades of sand papers and cleaned properly.
13.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 13.4.1. Measurement Measurement for payment of timber door and window frames shall be made in cubic meter. The door and window shutters shall be measured in square meters.
13.4.2. Payment The rate shall include all labour, materials and equipment necessary to carry out the following operation: . Supply of the timber scantlings of the specified species of wood and of required dimensions and accessories such as holdfasts, fittings and fixture. . Preparing the frame and shutters to the specified dimensions, shape, workmanship and fixing the frames including shutters, holdfasts and other fittings and fixtures in the work in the correct position as shown on the drawings. . Finishing wood works and joints with masonry with labour charge for fixing glasses (as per the item). . Providing the necessary iron monger such as hinges, bolts, hooks, push bars (nondeco) etc. and expanded metal where specified.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 54
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
14. MILD STEEL WORKS 14.1. GENERAL 14.1.1. Scope This specification covers the furnishing and installing of mild steel grills, shutters, ladder, mild steel and stainless steel railings and all related necessary items.
14.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building: IS 806 . Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel: IS 816 . Code of procedures for inspection of welds: IS 822 . Manual for metal arc welding in mild steel: IS 823 . Methods for sampling of steel pipes, tube and fittings: IS 4711 . Dimensions for clearance holes for bolts and screws: IS 1821
14.1.3. Submittals The Contractor to identify the manufacturer that has an equipped laboratory and tests. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer the source of material being used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering testing, fabrication, welding, installation and finishing Seven days before the commencement of works, result of Tensile test as per IS 1608 and Bend Test as per IS 2329 and sample shall be shall be submitted to the Engineer.
14.2. MATERIAL 14.2.1. Steel Members Steel members used for all works shall be designed structurally to withstand the all loads to be carried out by the members during erection, fixing and functional use in design life. Mild Steel members subjected to corrosive environment (exterior faces of building, bathrooms etc) shall be galvanized. All screws used shall be stainless steel/zinc coated or as specified in drawings.
14.2.2. Chicken Wire Mesh Chicken wire mesh is formed by twisting two adjacent wires at least four times, forming a strong honeycomb mesh structure. Galvanized low carbon wire, annealed wire may be used forming the mesh size from 13 to 50mm. The mesh shall be made to the desirable size. Nails shall use to fasten it to the surface. Firstly nail it to one end of the surface, then tension tightly and beat at the other end, and nailed to the middle positioning. Nails shall be staggered at 100mm distance from each other. Nails shall be beat in wall about three quarter length, the rest folded and tightly clutching to the wall surface.
14.3. EXECUTION 14.3.1. Fabrication Shop drawings giving complete information for fabrication of the component parts of the structure including the location, size, length and details shall be prepared in advance of the actual fabrication and shall be approved by the engineer. The members shall be fabricated to the design and pattern shown in the drawings. All joints shall be made in best workman like manner with slotting and welding as required to the specified size and shape. The edge of the M.S. flats shall be suitably mitred before welding to get the desired shape. The joints shall be filled to remove excess stay after welding screws, nuts, washers, bolts, rivets and any other miscellaneous fastenings devices shall be of steel and shall be provided by the contractor. Manufactured M.S. Grills then be fixed in between the posts, balusters, M.S. frame work etc. to correct alignment. Any undulations, bends etc. found shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost. The complete assembly of railing so fixed shall be firm and there shall not be any lateral movements.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 55
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
14.3.2. Welding The work shall be done as shown in the shop drawings which should clearly indicate various details of joint to be welded, type of welds, shop and site welds as well as the type of electrodes to be used. As far as possible every effort shall be made to limit the welding that must be done after the structure is erected so as to prevent improper welding that is likely to be done due to heights. Surfaces which are to be welded together shall be free from loose mill scale, rust, paint, grease or other foreign matter, which adversely affect the quality of weld and workmanship.
14.3.3. Erection Members shall be erected without any damage to itself. Members shall be securely bolted.
14.3.4. Installation The approved members shall be fixed in position where specified and shown in drawings including in masonry walls, wood/metal frames, hand railings etc. Any damages to walls, frames etc. caused during fixing the grills shall be made good by grouting with cement mortar/packing /repairing properly at the contractor’s own cost. Shutters shall be fixed to the wall with sufficient clamps as shown in drawing. Pins shall be firmly welded to the pin clamp the other end of which shall be embedded in masonry be means of cement concrete block.
14.3.5. Finishing All surfaces which shall be painted, oiled or otherwise treated shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose scale and loose rust. Surfaces not in contact but inaccessible after shop assembly, shall receive the full specific protective treatment before assembly. A priming coat of approved steel primer such as Red Oxide Zinc Chrome primer conforming to IS 2074 shall be applied before any member of steel structure are placed in position.
14.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 14.4.1. Measurement Measurement of mild steel works for payment will be made only, as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The actual area of mild steel grills shall be measured in square meter. Shutters height and width shall be measured correct to a cm. and its area for payment shall be calculated in square meters correct to two decimal places. Railing shall be measured for payment in running metre. The lengths shall be measured along the top centre line of the hand rail and shall be measured between ends of balusters, newels, posts.
14.4.2. Payment Payment for grills and chicken wire mesh shall be made at the unit rates per square meter. Payment for MS member for ladder, door frames shall be made at the unit rates per kilogram. Likewise, payment for railing shall be made at the unit rates per running meter or kilogramme as mentioned in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include fabrication, leaving suitable pockets, grouting the same, providing a fixing suitable teak wood plugs, fixing, holdfasts, iron mongers, all labour, materials, transport, painting/polishing, finishing and scaffolding all complete.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 56
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
15. METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS 15.1. GENERAL 15.1.1. Scope The work of this section covers the furnishing and installing of aluminium and steel doors and windows and all related necessary items.
15.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Aluminium door, windows and ventilators: IS 1948 . Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys bars, rod and sections (general engineering purposes): IS 733 . Dimension for screw threads for general purposes: IS 1362 . Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal doors, windows and ventilators: IS 1081 . Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel: IS 816 . Code of procedures for inspection of welds: IS 822 . Manual for metal arc welding in mild steel: IS 823
15.1.3. Submittals The Contractor is to identify the manufacturer for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer in writing within 15 days after the Commencement Date, the source or sources i.e. the manufacturer and brand name of materials used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering the fabrication, installation, finishing and glazing works. Before starting the work, the contractor shall submit all the shop drawings and get prior approval from the Engineer.
15.2. MATERIAL Material, fabrication and dimensions of aluminium doors, windows and ventilators manufactured from extruded aluminium alloy sections and mild steel sections of standard sizes and designs complete with fittings, ready for being fixed into the building shall be as per IS 1948.
Steel frames Steel sections or flats to be moulded into required sections shall be of 2 mm thickness. Shop drawings for each type of doors/ windows/ ventilators etc. shall be prepared by using suitable sections based on architectural drawings, adequate to meet the requirement/ specifications and by taking into consideration varying profiles of metal sections by approved manufacturers. The welding shall be proper and continuous. The frame should come together with 3 number of welded hinges and 6 number of holdfasts. The shop drawings shall show full size sections of glazed doors, windows, ventilators etc. The shop drawings shall also show the details of fittings and joints.
Fire rated doors and frames Doors so indicated on the Drawings shall bear the Underwriters'’ Laboratories (UL) label, or equal, for the type of door listed. Class “A” doors shall have a 3 hour rating and 1210C maximum heat transmission in 30 minutes. Class “B” doors shall have a 1.5 hour rating and 1210C maximum heat transmission in 30 minutes. Frames for labelled doors shall bear a label with rating equal to that of the door.
Aluminium frames Aluminium sheets shall be of specified thickness fitted with panel pins as per drawings. Sections for door and window frames and panels shall be made out of anodized or powder coated aluminium, as specified, and shall have the dimensions specified in the Bill of Quantities or the drawings. The frame size, profile, sections and fittings shall be as shown in the drawings. Samples of the same shall be submitted for approval with joints ground smooth, fitted complete with fittings and accessories. This sample may be ultimately used in the
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 57
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works work. The workmanship shall be of the best quality. The surface of the frames shall not be scratched. Glass of specified type and thickness shall be fitted to the frames using approved rubber liners. Glass Panes Glass panes shall weigh at least 7.5 kg/m2 and shall be free from flaws, specks or bubbles. All panes shall have properly squared corners and straight edges.
Screws Screws threads of machine screws used in the fabrication of metal doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to IS 1362.
15.3. EXECUTION 15.3.1. Frame Work Actual measurement of openings left at site for different type of door/ window etc. shall be taken. The fabrication of the individual door/ windows/ ventilators etc. shall be done as per the actual sizes of the opening left at site. The frames shall be truly rectangular and flat with regular shape corners fabricated to true right angles. The frames shall be fabricated out of section which have been cut to length, mitred and jointed mechanically using appropriate machines. Mitred joints shall be corner crimped or fixed with self-tapping stainless steel screws using extruded aluminium cleats of required length and profile. All aluminium work shall provide for replacing damaged/broken glass panes without having to remove or damage any member of exterior finishing material.
15.3.2. Fixing of Frames The holes in concrete/masonry/wood/any other members for fixing anchor bolts/fasteners/screws shall be drilled with an appropriate electric drill. Windows/doors/ventilators etc. shall be placed in correct final position in the opening and fixed to Sal wood backing using stainless steel screws of star headed, counter sunk and matching size groove of required size at spacing not more than 250 mm c/c or dash fastener. All joints shall be sealed with approved silicone sealants. In the case of composite windows and doors, the different units are to be assembled first. The assembled composite units shall be checked for line, level and plumb before final fixing is done. Engineer in his sole discretion may allow the units to be assembled in their final location if the situation so warrants. Where metal framework comes into contact with stone masonry, brick work, concrete, plaster or dissimilar metal, it shall be coated with an approved insulation lacquer, paint or plastic tape to ensure that electrochemical corrosion is avoided. Insulation material shall be trimmed off to a clean flush line on completion. The contractor shall be responsible for the doors, windows etc, being set straight, plumb, and level and for their satisfactory operation after fixing is complete.
15.3.3. Fabrication For fixing mild-steel hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frame and the hinges inserted inside and may be riveted to the frame. The hinges shall normally be of the projecting type 67 mm wide. The pins for hinges shall be of stainless steel of non-magnetic type or aluminium alloy HR30. Irrespective of hinges being anodized or not, the aluminium alloy pins shall be anodized to a minimum film thickness of 0.025 mm shall be sealed with oil or wax. In case of mild steel frames, mild steel hinges shall be used and they shall be welded on the frame itself. The handle for shutters shall be of cast aluminium conforming to IS Designation A-5-M of IS 617 and mounted on a handle plate welded or riveted to the opening frame in such a way that it could be fixed before the shutter is glazed. The handle should have anodized finish with minimum anodic film thickness of 0.015 mm. The aluminium hinges for ventilators shall be either cast or fabricated out of extruded sections and shall be riveted to the fixed rail after cutting a slot in it. Cast of extruded aluminium alloy hinges for doors shall be of the same type as in the windows but of larger size. The hinges shall normally be of the 50 mm projecting. A suitable lock for the door operable either from inside or outside shall be provided. Outer frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections in the position. Moreover; any steel lugs coming in contact with aluminium should be either galvanized or given one coat of bituminous paint. Metal doors, windows and ventilators may be supplied in either matt, scratch-brush or polished finish. They may, additionally, also be anodized, if so required by the Engineer. If colour anodizing is to be done then only approved light-fast shades should be used.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 58
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylate or cellulose butyrate, shall be applied on metal doors, windows and ventilators by the supplier to protect the surface from wet cement during installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed.
15.3.4. Glazing Glazing shall be provided on the outside of the frames. If required, glazing clips may be provided as extra fittings. Four glazing clips may be provided per glass pane. In case of doors, windows and ventilators without horizontal glazing bars the glazing clips shall be spaced according to the slots in the vertical members, otherwise the spacing shall be 30 cm. All glass shall be of the best quality, free from specks, bubbles, smokes, veins, air holes, blister and other defects. The thickness of glass panes shall be uniform. After installation is complete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the doors and windows operate properly in accordance with the intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specification and the manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations. All finished work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
15.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 15.4.1. Measurement Measurement of metal doors and windows for payment will be made only as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The content shall be worked out in square meter.
15.4.2. Payment Payment for aluminium doors and windows shall be made at the unit rates per square meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities. Mild steel door and windows shall be measured in m along the frame. The shutters shall be measured in square meters. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, paints, materials and equipment required in the construction at all levels.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 59
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
16. POLISHED STONE FLOORING 16.1. GENERAL 16.1.1. Scope This specification covers marble / granite flooring and skirting.
16.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones: IS 1122. . Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones: IS 1124. . Marble (blocks, slabs and tiles): IS 1130 . Code of practice for external facing and veneers, Stone facing: IS 4101 (Part 1) . Specifications for structural granite: IS 3316 . Polished Building Stones (Part-1) Granite: IS 14223 (Part 1)
16.1.3. Submittals The Contractor to identify the manufacturer that has an equipped laboratory and tests batches of manufactured blocks and notify the Engineer in writing within 15 days after the Commencement Date. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering base preparation, laying and finishing of works. 7 days before commencement of works, the Contractor shall submit for every 100 m2, 1 set of test result for water absorption (as per IS 1124), hardness (as per Mho scale) and specific gravity (as per IS 1122).
16.2. MATERIAL 16.2.1. Marble Marble shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture with crystalline texture as far as possible. It shall generally be uniform in colour and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering. Marbles are metamorphic rocks capable of taking polish, formed from the re- crystallization of limestones or dolomitic limestones and are distinguished from lime stone by even visibly crystalline nature and non-flaggy stratification. Marble shall either be plain white or coloured as specified in the Bill of Quantities or as instructed by the Engineer. Plain white Raj Nagar (plain white) Marble shall be with coarse grains predominantly showing mica particles giving reflection in light.
16.2.2. Granite It shall be of any colour and size as directed by Engineer. Granite shall be plain machine cut and mirror polished. The stone shall be smooth and of even surface without holes or pits.
16.3. EXECUTION 16.3.1. Table Rubbed and Polished (Plain Work) Joints in staircase treads, kitchen platforms shall be permitted only at curvature or when width: length is more than 0.6: 2 m respectively. There shall not be more than 1 joint in each direction per 2 m. Additional joints due to curvature or for providing fixture shall be provided judiciously.
16.3.2. Dressing, Cutting and Rubbing Every marble stone shall be machine cut to the required size and shape, chisel dressed machine finished on all beds and joints, so as to be free from any waviness and to give truly vertical, horizontal, radial or circular joints as required. The exposed faces and sides of stones forming joints up to 6 mm from the face shall be fine-tooled and machine cut in such a way that a straight edge laid along the face of the stone is in contact with every point on it. All window sills, tread of steps, counters vanities moulding edges etc. shall be machine cut and polished to give high gloss mirror finish and approved by the Engineer. These surfaces shall then be rubbed smooth. All visible angles and edges shall be true, square and free from chipping. Beyond the
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 60
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works depth of 6 mm from face, the joints shall be dressed with a slight splay so that the thickness of joint increases, in an inverted V shape. The surfaces of the stones coming in contact with backing need not be chisel dressed. A sample of dressed and rubbed stone shall be prepared for approval and it shall be kept on worksite after being approved by the Engineer.
16.3.3. Mortar The mortar used for jointing shall be as specified.
16.3.4. Laying All marble slabs shall be floated on mortar and bedded properly in position with wooden mallets without the use of chips or under pinning of any sort. A minimum of 20 mm thick 1:2 cement sand mortar shall be laid, and then a 3 mm thick layer of neat cement on the cement mortar bed shall be laid for tight bonding of the slab and for filling the gaps between the slab and the mortar bed to control hollow sound of the slabs.
16.3.5. Finishing After the marble work is cured, it shall be rubbed with carborundum of different grades no. 60, 120 and 320 in succession or with electrical rubbing machines rubbed with carborundum items 0 to 6 nos. in succession, so as to give a plane true and highly smooth surface. It shall then be cleaned with a solution of oxalic acid, washed and finished clean. The surface shall be finally rubbed with approved wax polish to give a glazing surface before hand over.
16.3.6. Protection Green work shall be suitably protected from damage during construction.
16.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 16.4.1. Measurement Measurement of polished stone for payment will be made only to the neat lines, as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be measured correct up to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter as required. Any cut-outs for railing, pipes, etc. shall not be deducted nor paid additional. The measurement for payment for floors shall be done in square meter and skirting shall be done in running meter.
16.4.2. Payment Payment for polished stone of different variety shall be paid with the corresponding unit rate entered in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labourers, materials and equipment required in the construction at all levels, including furnishing and hauling cement, marble/granite their storage, protection, etc. all complete
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 61
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
17. TILING WORKS 17.1. GENERAL 17.1.1. Scope This specification covers providing and laying ceramic tiles, clay tiles, traditional Telia tiles, flagstone and concrete tiles.
17.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Method of measurement of Building and Civil Engineering work (Part 11): IS 1200-(Part XI ) . Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles: IS 1237- Edition . Concrete paving block M30: IS: 15658 (2006) . Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles: IS 1443 . Specification for sand stone (Slab & Tiles): IS 3622 . Acid and/or alkali Resistant tiles: IS 4457 . Methods of Testing of ceramic tiles: IS 13630 (Part-10 to 15) . Specification for ceramic tiles; definition, classification characteristic and marking: IS 13712 . Specification for pressed ceramic tile: IS 15622
17.1.3. Submittals The Contractor to identify the required tile make and get samples of (Grade A) for approval by the Engineer. Approved samples shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer and the tile supplied and used on the work shall conform to samples. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer in writing within 15 days after the Commencement Date, the source or sources i.e. the manufacturer and brand name of the tile to be used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering base preparation, laying and finishing of works. The test as specified in relevant IS code should be conducted and reports submitted to the Engineer, minimum 7 days before commencement of works:
17.2. MATERIALS 17.2.1. Pressed Ceramic Tiles The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS 15622. They shall be flat, and true to shape and free from blisters crazing, chips, welts, crawling or other imperfections detracting from their appearance. The tiles shall be tested as per IS 13630. Classification and Characteristics of pressed ceramic tiles shall be as per IS 13712. The tiles shall be square or rectangular of nominal size. Table 1, 3, 5, and 7 of IS 15622 give the modular preferred sizes and table 2, 4, 6 and 8 give the most common non- modular sizes. Thickness shall be specified by the manufacturer. It includes the profiles on the visible face and on the rear side. Manufacturer/supplier and party shall choose the work size of tiles in order to allow a nominal joint width up to 2 mm for unrectified floor tiles and up to 1 mm for rectified floor tiles. The joint in case of spacer lug tile shall be as per spacer. The tiles shall conform to table 10 of IS 15622 with water absorption 3 to 6%. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. Glaze shall be either glossy or matt as specified. The underside of the tiles shall not have glaze on more than 5% of the area in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. The edges of the tiles shall be preferably free from glaze. However, any glaze if unavoidable, shall be permissible on only up to 50 per cent of the surface area of the edges. The colour, texture and sizes of ceramic tiles shall be as approved by the Engineer.
17.2.2. Vitrified Tiles The tiles shall conform to Table 12 of IS 15622 (Tiles with water absorption E ≤ 0.08 per cent Group BIa) and the joint thickness in flooring shall not be more than 1 mm.
17.2.3. Stone Finish Ceramic Tiles Shall conform to standards mentioned in Pressed Ceramic Tiles, the top finish of the tile should be a replication of natural stone. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 62
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
17.2.4. Clay Roofing Tiles The Clay roofing tiles shall conform to IS 654: 1992 (reaffirmed 2002) and Clay ridge and ceiling tile shall conform to IS 1464- 1973. The tiles shall sampled and tested as per this IS 8920 - 1978 and test results submitted to the Engineer minimum 7 days prior to the commencement of works.
17.2.5. Clay Flooring Tiles The clay flooring tile (Telia) using 25 mm thick tile shall conform to NS 0776/2041 for burnt clay flat terracing tiles. The methods of sampling should conform to IS 8920 – 1978 and reports should be submitted to the Engineer minimum 7 days prior to the commencement of works.
17.2.6. Flag Stone Flooring Floor stone shall be of uniform colour free from cracks and other defects. Each of the four edges shall be trimmed to four straight lines with right angle to other edge. The size of the flagstone shall be of uniform in width of 45 cm and the variable length not less than 30 cm. Thickness of the slab shall not exceed more than 50 mm nor be less than 30 mm.
17.2.7. Concrete Paver Block Factory made precast paver block of M-30 or otherwise specified grade of the size and shape as shown in the drawings shall be used. The stone dust for bedding the blocks shall be approved before use by the Engineer.
17.3. EXECUTION 17.3.1. Ceramic Tiles Base concrete or the RCC slab on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding for the tile shall be with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand) or as specified. The average thickness of the bedding shall be 20 mm or as specified while the thickness under any portion of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm. Mortar shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion for the tiles to be set and to enable the mason to place wooden plank across and squat on it. Over this mortar bedding neat grey cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread at the rate of 3.3 kg of cement per square meter over an area up to one square meter. Tiles shall be soaked in water washed clean and shall be fixed in this grout one after another, each tile gently being tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible and in straight lines or to suit the required pattern. The joints in the tile work shall be accurately aligned with horizontal joints level and vertical joints plumb. Joints shall be maintained uniformly 1/16" wide or as directed aligning spacer lugs on tile edges if tiles are so manufactured or by use of wetted strings. Tiles shall be laid out in such a way that no tile less than half size occurs. Where tile must be cut at edges or penetrated the cut edges shall be carefully filed and neatly ground. Chipped, cracked or broken tile shall not be used and all defective work shall be replaced and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently checked with a straight edge about 2 m long, so as to obtain a true surface with the required slope. In bath, toilet W.C. kitchen, balcony or veranda flooring, suitable tile drop or as shown in drawing will be given in addition to required slope to avoid spread of water. Tile drop will also be provided near floor trap. Where full size tiles cannot be fixed these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size, and their edge rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter not less than 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado. After tiles have been laid surplus cement slurry shall be cleaned off. The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire/coir brush or trowel to a depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. Where spacer lug tiles are provided, the half the depth of joint shall be filled with polysulphide or as specified on top with under filling with cement grout without the lugs remaining exposed. During grouting all excess grout shall be cleaned off the tile surface with damp cloth or sponge. The floor shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet. All tile work finishing shall be adequately protected from damage during the progress of construction till completion and any damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Upon completion prior to final inspection of acceptance, the Contractor shall clean all tile work. Acids or other agents liable to damage the work shall be avoided. If tile surface show mass scratches, cracks or other imperfections which cannot be removed by cleaning; the Contractor shall remove the defective materials and replace with new material at no additional expense.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 63
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
The finally laid tile shall be given epoxy grout or a coat of white cement slurry as per the instruction of the Engineer to fill up the joints, which shall wiped off from the tiles.
17.3.2. Clay Roofing and Flooring Tiles Sample of clay tiles shall be produced before engineer for approval and the contractor shall procure only those tiles that clearly and definitely confirm with the approved sample. The roof tiles shall be laid in polymer modified, rigid, cementitious tile adhesive (Sika Tilofix or equivalent). Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and shall not exceed 6mm and all the joints are pointed with waterproof tile grout. The clay flooring tile (Telia) shall be laid on 1:2 lime surkhi bed. Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and shall not exceed 6 mm and all the joints are pointed with 1:1 Cement sand mortar. Laying shall start from one side in the slope as indicated in drawing or instruction. Under no circumstances shall the contractor insert small stone chips underneath the slab to raise its level to desired level. In case of flooring tiles, after the tiles are laid the mortar in the joints shall be raked to a depth of 12.5 mm to 20 mm. Joints flush pointed with 1:1 cement sand mortar. Special care shall be taken to protect the floor from walking over it before it is completely dry or in any event not earlier than 3 days.
17.3.3. Flag Stone Flooring Sample of floor stone shall be produced before site In-charge for approval and the contractor shall procure only those stone slabs that clearly and definitely confirm with the approved sample. At any case, the procured slabs shall be exhibited before using as floor slab. Stone slab shall be laid on 1:4 cement sand bed. Joints shall be kept as thin as possible and shall not exceed 6mm and all the joints are pointed with 1:1 Cement sand mortar. Laying shall start from one side in the slope as indicated in drawing or instruction. Under no circumstances shall the contractor insert small stone chips underneath the slab to raise its level to desired level. After the slabs of stone are laid, the mortar in the joints shall be raked to a depth of 12.5mm to 20mm. Joints flush pointed with 1:1 cement sand mortar. Special care shall be taken to protect the floor from walking over it before it is completely dry or in any event not earlier than 3 days.
17.3.4. Concrete Paver Block The formation for a width equal to that of the pavement shall be cut to the depth below the proposed finish level or as thickness mentioned in bill of quantity, equal to the thickness of the course of stone dust (due allowance being made for consolidation) and dress off in level to the finished profile. Stone dust layer shall be compacted by 1 ton roller or equivalent means or as per the instructions of the Engineer. After grade preparation, the Engineer shall approve the levelling and allow laying of interlocking blocks, the voids at pavement edges shall be filled with concrete of same grade and the joints shall be filled with stone dust. After concrete block laying the gaps should be filled stone dust and levelled, taking care to pack all joints firmly and removing excess and cleaning.
17.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 17.4.1. Measurement The measurement for payment shall be done in square meter and running meter as described in the item for respective thickness.
17.4.2. Payment Payment shall be made at the unit rates per square meter for tiling and in running meter for skirting in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, tiles, mortar, stone dust or sand base materials and equipment (excluding the compacted subgrade or subbase) required in the construction at all levels, including furnishing and hauling cement, tiles their storage, protection, etc. all complete.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 64
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
18. METAL TRUSS AND CGI ROOFING 18.1. GENERAL 18.1.1. Scope This specification covers providing, fabricating, assembling, erecting in position tubular truss, mild steel truss and CGI Sheet roofing works.
18.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Galvanised steel sheets (plain and corrugated): IS 277 . Structural steel standard quality: IS 228 . Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building: IS 806 . Glossary of terms relating to welding and cutting metals: IS 812 . Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel: IS 816 . Dimensions for clearance holes for bolts and screws: IS 1821
18.1.3. Submittals The Contractor to identify the manufacturer that has an equipped laboratory and tests. The Contractor shall then notify the Engineer the source of material being used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering fabrication, bolting, sealing, painting, assembling, laying and fixing and finishing of works as well as result of tensile test (IS 1608), bend test (IS 2329) and flattening test (IS 2328) conducted by the steel tube manufacturer.
18.2. MATERIAL 18.2.1. Structural Steel Section Structural steel section shall be as per IS specification, and steel tubes used in the truss shall be hot finished tubes confirming to the requirements of specified in IS 1161 - 1968 and IS 807 - 1968. Tubes shall be of grade heavy or medium unless instructed. Tubes shall be clean, finished and reasonably free from scale. They shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects.
18.2.2. CGI Sheet These shall be of the thickness 24 gauge or as specified in the BOQ of the item unless otherwise specified. The sheets shall be free from cracks, split edges, twists, surface flaws etc. They shall be clean, bright and smooth. The galvanizing shall be non-injured and in perfect condition. The sheets shall not show signs of rust or white powdery deposits on the surface. The corrugations shall be uniform in depth and pitch and parallel with the side.
18.2.3. Hooks or Rivets The galvanized coating on J or L hooks, rivets and bolts shall be continuous and free from defects such as blisters, flux stains, drops, excessive projections or other imperfections which would impair serviceability.
18.3. EXECUTION 18.3.1. Fabrication The fabrication of truss using steel tubes shall be done in accordance with IS 800 - 1962. Welding shall be done with reference to the IS 820 and IS 816 - 1956. The component parts of the structure shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor damaged. The members of the truss shall be assembled and welding done according to the detailed drawing. All materials before assembly shall be straightened, if necessary, unless required to be of a curvilinear form and shall be free from twist.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 65
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
18.3.2. Bolting Washers shall be specially shaped where necessary, or other means used, to give the nuts and the heads of bolts a satisfactory bearing. In all cases where the full bearing of area of the bolt is to be developed, the treaded portion of the bolt shall be not within the thickness of the parts bolted together and washers of appropriate thickness shall be provided to allow the nut to be completely tightened. Edges should be dressed to a neat and work-man like finish and be free from distortion where parts are to be in a contact metal-to-metal.
18.3.3. Sealing of Tubes Where the end of a tube is not automatically sealed by virtue of its connection by welding to another member, the end all be properly and completely sealed. Before sealing, the inside of the tube should be dried and free from loose scale. In tubular construction, the ends of tubes may be flattened or otherwise formed to provide for welded, riveted or bolted connections provided that the methods adopted for such flattening do not injure the material. The change of section shall be gradual.
18.3.4. Painting All tubes and part thereof shall unless specified otherwise, shall be painted with two coats of red oxide paint before erection at site.
18.3.5. Assembling After the members are cut into the required length, and welded to form a truss system by providing fish plate, anchor plates etc. fully butt welded, the fabricated members shall be assembled in ground to form a full scale truss for inspection by Engineer. The truss then be lifted to the required level and position where pre-fixed holding down bolts are prepared to receive such truss in position and alignment. All the bolts and nuts including holding down bolts are well tightened using required washers.
18.3.6. Laying and Fixing CGI Sheet The sheets shall be laid on the purlins to a true plane, with the lines of corrugations parallel or normal to the sides of the area to be covered unless otherwise required as in special shaped roofs. The sheets shall be laid with a minimum lap of 15 cm at the ends and 2 ridges of corrugations at each side. The above minimum end lap of 15 cm shall apply to slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and steeper slopes. For flatter slopes the minimum permissible end lap shall be 20 cm. The minimum lap of sheets with ridge, hip and valley shall be 20 cm measured at right angles to the line of the ridge, hip and valley respectively. These sheets shall be cut to suit the dimensions or shapes of the roof, either along their length or their width or in a slant across their lines of corrugations at hips and valleys. They shall be cut carefully with a straight edge chisel to give a smooth and straight finish. Sheets shall not generally be fixed into gables and parapets. The laying operation shall include all scaffolding work involved including ridge covering and drain water gutter with 24 gauge plain GI Sheet as per drawing. Sheets shall be fixed to the purlins or other roof members such as hip or valley rafters etc. with galvanized J or L hook bolts and nuts, 8 mm diameter, with bitumen and G.I. limpet washers or with a limpet washer filled with white lead. Alternatively, the sheets shall be fixed using galvanized steel rivets with a holing and riveting device as directed by the Engineer. While J hooks are used for fixing sheets on angle iron purlins, and L hooks are used for fixing the sheet to R.S. joists, timber or precast concrete purlins. The length of the hook bolt shall be varied to suit the particular requirements. The bolts shall be sufficiently long so that after fixing they project above the top of the nuts by not less than 10 mm. The grip of J or L hook bolt on the side of the purlins shall not be less than 25 mm. There shall be a minimum of three hook bolts placed at the ridges of corrugations in each sheet on every purlins and their spacing shall not exceed 30 cm coach screws shall not be used for fixing
18.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 18.4.1. Measurement Measurement of steel roofing works for payment will be made only as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The truss shall be measured to the nearest kilograms. For CGI sheet the length and breadth shall be measured correct to 10 mm. Area shall be worked out in square meter correct to two places of decimal. The superficial area of roof covering shall be
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 66
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works measured on the flat without allowance for laps and corrugations. Portion of roof covering overlapping the ridge or hip etc. shall be included in the measurements of the roof.
18.4.2. Payment Payment for trusses shall be made at the unit rates per kilogram and that for CGI sheet shall be made at the unit rates per square meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations described above including two coats of approved anticorrosive paints in trusses and the cost of CGI sheets, galvanized iron J or L hooks, bolts and nuts, galvanized iron seam bolts and nuts, bituminous and galvanized iron limpet washers, rivets, tools, scaffolding, etc.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 67
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
19. WATERPROOFING 19.1. GENERAL 19.1.1. Scope This specification covers the supply and application of cement based two component polymer modified waterproofing slurry in accordance with Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
19.1.2. Standards The material shall be conforming to Specifications for Integral Cement Water Proofing Compounds: IS 2645. Specifications for other material shall be as covered in other sections of the specifications.
19.1.3. Submittals The contractor shall identify the manufacturer and shall notify the Engineer with the brand of water proofing material being used. Once such notification is given, the sources of all materials shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering surface preparation, mixing, laying and finishing of works. The test for water and cement shall be conducted as per the mortar specification and report shall be submitted to the engineer before commencement of work.
19.2. MATERIAL Materials being used shall be of sound quality and confirming to the standards. The material used for this work shall consist of two coats of polymer modified, flexible water proofing slurry.
19.3. EXECUTION Concrete mortar and masonry surface shall be clear and free from grease, oil and loosely adhering particles. Steel and iron surfaces shall be free from scale, rust, grease and oil. All surfaces shall be as true and flat as possible, and the absorbent surfaces shall be thoroughly saturated. The consistency of the mix may be altered by reducing the amount of component A (liquid) to be used. Under normal circumstances, when the full quantities of both components are mixed together, a slurry consistency shall result. For a trowelable consistency, use only 90% of component A. Mix in a clean container by slowly adding the powder component to the liquid component and stirring with slow speed mixer. Whilst the surface is still damp from saturation, apply the first coat and leave to harden (2-6 hours). For slurry consistency apply with a hard plastic brittle brush or broom. For trowelable mortar use a notched trowel. Second coat should be applied after the first dries up. Overlapping of about 6" is essential to ensure elimination of joints. Each coat should be continued up to the top of the parapet wall to eliminate the chance of percolation of water. After the second coat has been applied finish by rubbing with a soft, dry sponge. The entire surface shall be allowed for air curing for 4 hours and later the surface shall be cured with clean water for 7 days.
19.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 19.4.1. Measurement Measurement of water proofing work for payment will be made only as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be measured correct up to 2 places of decimals of a meter and the quantity worked out correct to 2 places of decimal of a square meter.
19.4.2. Payment Payment for waterproofing work shall be made at the unit rates per square meter quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of materials, labours, preparation of surface, mixing, laying, curing all complete.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 68
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
20. PLASTER WORK 20.1. GENERAL 20.1.1. Scope This specification covers 12.5mm, 15mm or 20 mm cement plaster or lime plaster finishes to walls, columns ceilings and similar surfaces on background normally wet with, such as brick, or concrete (plain or reinforced).
20.2. STANDARDS The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . IS Code of practice for application of cement and cement- lime plaster finishes: IS 1661 -1972 . Specifications for sand for plaster: IS 1542 . Specification for coarse and fine aggregates for natural sources for concrete: IS 383 . Specification for 43 grade OPC: IS 8112-1989 . Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works : Part : XII - Plastering and Pointing: IS 1200
20.3. MATERIALS 20.3.1. Lime The lime shall comply with I.S. 712:1956. All impurities, ashes, or pieces improperly burnt shall be screened or picked out before slaking. The lime shall be slaked with water not less than one week or more than two weeks before use. The slaked lime shall be screened through I.S. 240 sieve for first coat and I.S. 120 sieve for second and third coat of plaster. The slaked lime shall be stored in a weather proof and damp proof closed shed with impervious storey and sides to protect it against rain, moisture, weather and extraneous materials mixing with it. The lime shall be used when fresh, i.e. within 14 days of its removal from kiln. All lime that has been damaged by rain, moisture, dirt, air slaking or any other cause shall be rejected and all rejected material shall be removed from the site forthwith. Sample of lime shall be approved by the Engineer who shall keep it in his site office for reference. Field test of lime shall be in accordance with IS 1624-1960.
20.3.2. Additives for Waterproofing For waterproof plaster the following additives to be added to the mortar mix: . Shrinkage compensating expanding grout additive (Sunplex/Excem C) : 0.66% by weight of cement (330 gm per bag of cement) . Acrylic modifier (Armourcrete) : 2% by weight of cement (1 Kg per bag of cement) . Multi-dimensional Monofilament Polypropylene Fibres (Stealth Fairfibre) : 0.15-0.25% by weight of cement (75-125 gm per bag of cement) optional.
20.3.3. Other materials Cement, sand, water and other materials required for plastering material shall be as specified elsewhere in these specifications.
20.4. EXECUTION 20.4.1. Preparation Tools and Accessories All tools shall be cleaned by scraping and working at the end of each day's work, or after use with different materials. Metal tools shall be cleaned and greased after each operation. All tools shall be examined and thoroughly cleaned before plastering begins.
Scaffolding Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. The supports shall be sound and strong and of steel tubular, wooden ballies, planks, trestles, G. I. Pipes, ply board and other scaffolding material. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 69
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
The vertical posts shall be tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks be fixed. The three sides of the scaffolding should be covered with l.0 m wide boards to protect the materials from dropping off while working.
Preliminary Work All materials for plastering shall be kept readily available at the site. Plastering operation shall not be started until and necessary fixings such as doors, windows, and fittings of light, sanitary plumbing and other services etc. are completed and all pipe and conduits to be embedded in the wall or plaster are installed A preliminary inspection shall be made to ensure that the surfaces are in a suitable condition for plastering, particularly as regards their planeness and dryness. If dubbing out is necessary, it should be done in advance, so that an adequate time interval may be permitted before the application of the first under coat.
Cleanliness The loose layer of dust on masonry shall be brushed away before the plaster is applied. A stiff bristle brush or wire brush may be used or, to be more effective, brushing may be combined with blowing of compressed air. Laitance on a freshly cast concrete surface shall be removed, The contaminated layer formed on concrete surface due to formation of soap by the reaction of resins with calcium hydrate or due to moils oils shall be removed by brush. Special care shall be taken in repairing for re-rendering an old plaster coat. Old layers of the plaster coats shall be completely removed and made good. Crumbled and frost- damaged parts shall be cut out and patched. Any trace of algae or moss formation shall be removed. If the background contains soluble salts, particularly sulphates, the application of plaster shall be done only after the efflorescence of the salt is complete, and efflorescence is thoroughly removed from the surface.
Roughness The roughness of the background may generally improve the bond of the plaster. A smooth surface may be roughened by wire brushing if it is not hard, or by hacking or bush-hammering if it is hard. Alternatively, to obtain a rough surface, a mortar may be forcibly dashed on to the surface (spatter dash treatment) by suitable means on to a hard surface like concrete. On a soft smooth surface, a thin coat of cement slurry 1:1 (cement and sand) may be applied for the purpose. After roughening the surface, care shall be taken to moisten the surface sufficiently before plastering, as otherwise the freshly exposed surface may tend to absorb considerable amount of water from the plaster. In addition to general roughness in the masonry, the joints shall also be raked to a depth of about 3 mm for providing key to plaster.
20.4.2. Plastering Mortar preparation Cement and sand (or any binding and supporting materials) shall be mixed dry thoroughly on clean approved platform or in a mechanical mixer and water shall then be added to obtain a mortar of the consistency of a stiff paste. Care being taken to add just sufficient water for the purpose. Mortar shall be used as soon as possible, after mixing and within 1/2 hours after cement is mixed wet. Mortar unused for more than 1/2 hours shall be rejected and removed (mixes of lime putty and sand can be kept for a period of 72 hours, provided it is kept damp and not allowed to dry). The well mixed mortar shall be transported from the mixing platform to the site of work in such a manner as to prevent formation of laitance or segregation.
Application Plastering is done by applying cement mortar in the ratio specified in BOQ items (1:3 and 1:4) on the surfaces and the plaster should be in straight line, level and plumb and the joint must be in right angle.
Sequence of Operations For external plaster, the plastering operation shall be started from the top storey and carried downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operation shall be started wherever the building frame and placing work are ready and the temporary supports of the ceiling resting on the wall or the storey have been removed.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 70
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Surface Damping The surface shall not be soaked but shall only be damped 24 hours before applying plaster. If the surface becomes dry in a spot, such areas shall be moistened again to restore uniform suction. A fog-spray shall be used for this purpose.
Evenness The background shall be even in order to avoid variations in the thickness of plaster. Any unevenness must be levelled before the plaster is applied. Local projections in brickwork shall be removed. For coat thick plaster work, the local projection shall not exceed 12 mm of the general surface as determined by the periphery of the surface concerned, and local depression shall not exceed 19 mm. For two coats of plaster, a local projection shall not exceed 12 mm and local depression 12 mm.
Application of Undercoat The undercoat shall be approximately 12 mm thick and carried to the full length of the wall or to the natural breaking points like doors, or windows. Before the undercoat hardens, it shall be deeply worked to provide mechanical key for the finishing coat. Masonry walls on which plaster is to be applied directly, shall be clean and dry with the joints raked to a depth of at least 10 mm. Before applying the undercoat, the surface shall be damped evenly to control suction. The undercoat shall be trowelled hard and tight, forcing it into surface depressing to obtain a permanent bond. On monolithic walls, the undercoat shall be dashed on unless the surface is sufficiently rough to ensure adequate bond for it when applied with a trowel. Rough surfaces that permit successful application with the trowel are produced by mechanical roughening. The dashing of the undercoat shall be done using a strong whipping motion at right angles to the face of the wall, or it may be applied with a plaster machine or cement gum. The undercoat shall be kept damp for at least two days immediately following its application. It shall then be allowed to become thoroughly dry. On metal reinforcements, the plaster shall completely embed the metal. This may easily be accomplished with the large mesh type of reinforcement, the openings of which are large enough to permit plaster readily to pass through them.
Application of Finishing Coat Before starting to apply the finishing coat, the second coat shall be damped evenly. Whenever possible, plaster shall be applied from top to bottom in one operation to eliminate joining marks. The finishing coat shall be applied with a trowel to a thickness or approximately 12mm and roughly levelled off. When the surface has begun to harden, it shall be levelled off with a straight grained wood float. At a later period during drying out, when the face is quite stiff and there is no moisture on the surface, the float shall be worked with a circular movement bringing the sand in the plaster to the face and producing a uniform texture. Alternatively, the facing shall be tapped gently with a wood float after the setting has commenced but before the plaster is dry, and care shall be taken that the tapping is even, uniform and is not overdone. As a final operation, to remove any float marks which may be left on the surface, a damp rubber sponge shall be applied with a circular motion on the face.
Cleaning and Curing Care should be taken that unwanted cement mortar on the frames and electric fittings should be cleaned immediately after finishing the plaster. Proper curing should be done at least for 7 days after the plastering is complete as it is the most important factor for maintaining the strength of plaster.
Moulding All moulding shall be worked true to template and drawn neat, clean and level. All exposed angles and junctions with door frames etc. shall be carefully finished.
20.4.3. Cement Plaster with Neat Cement Finish in Dado Whenever it is required, there shall be 3 mm thick film of neat cement finish of 1:1 mix or specified proportion. The neat cement finish, if required, shall be mixed with 3-12% of Colourcrete of specified colour and brand or as directed by the Engineer. The
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 71
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works neat cement finish shall be applied after completely setting the final layer of cement plaster. The neat finishing layer or film shall be trowelled smooth.
20.4.4. Decorative Plaster The decorative plaster of specified proportion shall be applied as specified in BOQ item. The design and workmanship quality shall be the same as that of existing finished decorative surface.
20.4.5. Wall Putty Preparation of Paste Take required quantity of Wall Putty in a pan. 35-40% water by volume is required to prepare paste of good consistency. Mix half of required water quantity into it. Knead/Mix the Putty & wait for few minutes. Mix remaining quantity of water to get desired consistency. Mix vigorously for 5-10 minutes for making a lump-free and uniform paste. Mix the product in such quantities that it should be used within 2 hours of preparation. Mixing may be done manually or by using a suitable electric mixer.
Application Ensure that surface is totally clean. Ensure that surface plastered or made with cementitious material. The surface should be moderately rough and in just-wet condition. Apply 1st coat of Wall Putty (1.5 mm thickness) using a blade / spatula on the wall with a "bottom to up" configuration. Apply 2nd coat of Wall Putty (1.0 mm thickness) preferably after 4 hours in summers and after 12 hours in winters. Second coat shall be applied "horizontally" to even out application marks of 1st coat, if any. Allow complete drying for 3 days and then use a fine emery paper to remove application marks, if any.
Curing Each coat shall be kept damp continuously for at least two days. Moistening shall commence as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently and is not susceptible to injury. The water shall be applied by using a fine fog-spray. Soaking of wall shall be avoided and only as much water as can be readily absorbed shall be used. Excessive evaporation on the sunny or windward sides of the building in hot dry weather, shall be prevented by hanging mattings or gunny bags on the plaster and keeping them wet. After the completion of the finishing coat, the plaster shall be kept wet for seven days and shall be protected during that period as mentioned above. If the work perishes through the neglect of watering or any other default, and if the work is not done as specified, the work shall be removed and redone at the Contractor’s expense. Curing of the plaster shall be so done as to avoid or minimize overflow or seepage to the existing surface below.
20.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 20.5.1. Measurement Measurement of plaster and putty punning for payment will be made only to the neat lines as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be measured correct up to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter as required.
20.5.2. Payment Payment for ordinary plaster and putty punning shall be made at the unit rates per square meter quoted for items PL1 and WF1, respectively, in the Bill of Quantities. And payment for decorative plaster shall be made at the unit rates per running meter quoted for item M43, in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials and equipment required in the construction at all levels, including furnishing and hauling material, its storage, protection, etc. all complete.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 72
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
21. PAINTING WORKS 21.1. GENERAL 21.1.1. Scope This specification covers different type of paintings on different surfaces in general and application of cement paint, enamel paint, dry or oiled distemper, plastic / acrylic emulsion paint /exterior paint / chapra polish, etc. in wall/ceiling surface in particular with a petroleum base/water base paint in roof.
21.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Shellac : Part I, Hand Made Shellac: IS 16 . Shellac : Part II, Machine Made Shellac: IS 16 . Linseed oil raw and refined: IS 75 . Linseed oil boiled for paints: IS 77 . Ready mixed paint, brushing, red lead, non-setting, priming: IS 102 . Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome: IS 104 . Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming plaster to Indian Standard Colour No.361, 631 white and off white: IS 109 . Ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing exterior, semi-gloss for general purposes to Indian Standards Colours: IS 117 . Enamel, Interior (a) under coating (b) finishing: IS 133 . Ready mixed paint, brushing, matt or egg shell flat, finishing interior to Indian Standard Colour as required: IS 137 . Ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous black, lead free, acid, alkali and heat resisting: IS 158 . Specification for cut back bitumen: IS 217 . Specification for Creosote and Anthracene Oil for use as wood protection: IS 218 . Coal tar black paint: IS 290 . Varnish, finishing interior: IS 337 . Black Japan, Types ‘A’, ‘B’ & ‘C’: IS 341 . Varnish, shellac for general purposes: IS 347 . French polish: IS 348 . Putty for use on window frames: IS 419 . Distemper, dry colour as required: IS 427 . Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required: IS 428 . Varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic air drying: IS 524 . Gum Spirit of Turpentine (oil of turpentine): IS 533 . Specification for building limes: IS 712 . Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works: Part : XIII — White Washing, Colour Washing Distempering and Painting of Building Surfaces: IS 1200 Pt- XIII . Methods of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works : Part : XV — Painting, Polishing: IS 1200 Pt- XV . Aluminium Paint for General Purposes, in Dual Container: IS 2339 . Enamel, synthetic, exterior (a) undercoating, (b) finishing: IS 2932 . Enamel, exterior (a) undercoating (b) finishing: IS 2933 . Cement paint: IS 5410 . Plastic Emulsion Paint Part I for interior use: IS 5411 . Code of Practice for white washing and colour washing: IS 6278
21.1.3. Submittals The Engineer shall prepare a colour schedule with samples for guidance of the painter and reserves the right to select, allocate and vary colours on different surfaces throughout the building subject to the limitation that no more than 10 percent of bright or deep colours will be selected. 2 months before the beginning of the painting work, the Contractor shall request the Engineer to provide colour codes for the paintwork. Within a month of receiving the colour codes the Contractor shall submit a complete list, in duplicate, of all materials proposed for use, together with manufacturer’s specifications. All paint and coating materials and products shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. The Contractor shall make 200 mm x 200 mm samples upon materials corresponding with those to be finished in the Works. He shall furnish sufficient samples until approval has been obtained. The approved samples shall be marked for identification and shall be retained by the Engineer. All work shall match the approved colours and samples. No claim by the Contractor concerning the unsuitability of any material specified or the Contractor’s inability to produce first class work with same will be entertained.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 73
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
21.2. MATERIAL The products to be used for different types of painting works shall conform to the following specifications: . Coal tar: Coal tar of approved brand. . Wood preservative: Solignum of Shalimar or any other reputed firm. . Lime: Fat lime of good quality as approved for lime washes. . Chapra polish: Made from turpentine and chapra properly screened. Tints as required may be added. . Linseed oil: Double boiled of approved make. . Water repellent paint: Silicone resin based colourless paint of approved make. . Waterproof cement paint: Sealed tins of paint from reputed manufacturer like Asian Paints or equivalent . Weather Coat: Paint such as Apex or equivalent weather coat. For exterior surfaces or substrates that are subjected to continuous seepage or dampness, Asian Paints or equivalent Smart Care Damp Proof, shall be used before the top coat application . Acrylic emulsion paint: Paint from reputed manufacturers like Asian Paints or equivalent . Plastic Emulsion Paint: Conforming to IS 5411 of approved brand and manufacture. . Synthetic enamel paint: Conforming to IS 2933 and from reputed manufacturers like British Paints India Ltd., Jenson and Nicolson India or any other superior brand . Cement Paint: Conforming to IS 5410 and from approved brand and manufacture. All painting and coating materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer’s original containers with labels intact and seals unbroken. They shall be kept in a locked, well- ventilated storage place assigned for this purpose. Receiving, opening and mixing of all paint and coating materials shall be done in this room. Storage space shall be kept clean and neat. Oily rags shall be removed and disposed of each day, and all other necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid danger of fires. Only ready mixed Paint (Exterior grade) as received from the manufacturer without any admixture shall be used. If for any reason, thinning is necessary in case of ready mixed Paint, the brand of thinner recommended by the manufacturer or as instructed by the Engineer shall be used.
21.3. EXECUTION 21.3.1. General Considerations Painting shall not be started until the Engineer has inspected the items of work to be painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to commence the painting work. Painting of external surface should not be done in adverse weather condition like hail storm and dust storm. Painting, except the priming coat, shall generally be taken in hand after practically finishing all other building work. The rooms should be thoroughly swept out and the entire building cleaned up, at least one day in advance of the paint work being started.
Preparation of Surface The surface to be painted shall be prepared as specified by the manufacturer of the paint. The surface shall be thoroughly sand papered and cleaned from dirt, dust, etc. by brushing and washing down with clean water. Any grease, oil paint or any other foreign material shall be removed by approved method. Rough coat and pebble dash surface shall be thoroughly sand papered brushed and washed to remove dirt and dust. Where efflorescence is observed the deposits may be brushed clean and washed. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours before any painting is done. The surface preparation shall include removing nails, making good holes, cracks, patches etc. This shall also include making good pitting in plaster with plaster of paris mixed with the colour to be used. The surface shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth.
Application Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the Paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its containers, when applying also, the Paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that its consistency is kept uniform. The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off, the latter in the direction of the grains of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with Paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 74
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works over and then brushing alternately in opposite direction, two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat. Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done by spraying. Spray machine used may be (a) high pressure (small air aperture) type, or (b) a low pressure (large air gap) type, depending on the nature and location of work to be carried out. Skilled and experienced workmen shall be employed for this class of work. Paints used shall be brought to the requisite consistency by adding a suitable thinner. Spraying should be done only when dry condition prevails. Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is applied. This should be facilitated by thorough ventilation. Each coat except the last one, shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper or fine pumice stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat is laid. No left over Paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the containers shall be kept properly closed. No hair marks from the brush or clogging of Paint puddles in the corners of panels, angles of moulding etc. shall be left on the work. In painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes must also be painted but care must be taken to see that no Paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces in similar hidden locations shall not be left out in painting. However, bottom edge of the shutters where the painting is not practically possible, need not be done nor any deduction on this account will be done but two coats of primer of approved make shall be done on the bottom edge before fixing the shutters. On painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets overlaps etc. The additional specifications for primer and other coats of Paints shall be as according to the detailed specifications under the respective headings.
Brushes and Containers After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of Paint and linseed oil by rinsing with turpentine. A brush in which Paint has dried up is ruined and shall on no account be used for painting work. The containers when not in use, shall be kept closed and free from air so that Paint does not thicken and also shall be kept safe from dust. When the Paint has been used, the containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, so that they are clean, and can be used again.
Weather and Temperature Surfaces shall be painted only when they are free from moisture. No painting on exterior surfaces shall be done less than 72 hours of actual drying weather after a rain, nor during periods of dew or fog. Receiving surfaces shall be properly dried out before proceeding with the work. No painting shall be performed when temperature is below 10o C, except when specifically directed or authorized otherwise in writing by the Engineer.
Scaffolding and Protection The Contractor shall furnish, maintain and remove all scaffolding, ladders and planks required for this work, and all drop cloths for the protection of concrete walkways, floors, pre-finished materials, building fixtures, etc. Painted and finished surfaces subject to damage or defacement due to other work on the building shall be properly protected and covered. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage to painted work and to that of other work caused by operations under this Section. The scaffolding shall be double according to requirements and shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense. For painting on all external exposed/plastered brick work or tile work, double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The scaffolding shall be erected with steel section or pipes, or bamboos of adequate strength to be safe for all operation. The Contractor shall test all measures to ensure the safety of the work and working people. Any instruction of the Engineer in this respect shall also be compiled with. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to property, or injury to persons resulting from ill erected scaffolding, defective ladders and materials or otherwise arising out of his default in this respect. Proper scaffolding shall be provided to allow easy approach to every part of the work. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage or scratches to walls. For white washing the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected. Overhead work shall not be allowed without proper scaffolding.
Protective Measures Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other parts of the building not to be white washed, shall be protected from being splashed upon. Splashing and droppings, if any shall be removed by the contractor at his own cost and the surfaces cleaned. During execution of painting works, damages if any, to furniture or fittings and fixtures shall be recoverable from the contractor.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 75
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Mock-up for Approval of Final Colours Final coat of paint for both exterior and interior work shall not be applied until the colours have been approved by the Engineer. To accomplish this, the Contractor shall paint a sample panel, approximately 2 m2, of the colours selected on every surface of the building to be painted. The Engineer shall approve the sample panels or direct changes as desired. The Contractor shall be on the job and be prepared to change sample panels to colours desired on the spot. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days in advance of when the Contractor shall be ready to receive approval for the sample panels. Such notice shall not be given, however, until permanent fluorescent and incandescent lights are installed and in operation in the rooms or areas where the sample panels have been painted; temporary lights at the same level and of the same type, intensity, and colour as the permanent lights will be permitted for viewing of sample panels.
21.3.2. Cement Paint Mixing The dry cement paint shall be thoroughly mixed with clean fresh water so as to produce paint of required consistency which for normal work shall be that of ordinary paint. In mixing and application, the Contractor shall follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Paint for application by brush shall be stained through paint strainer. The paint shall be kept stirred and used within the specified time of the manufacture. Hardened or damaged paint shall not be used. Cement Paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an hour of its mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish. Cement Paint shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of cement Paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be taken to add the cement Paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In all cases the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed meticulously. The lids of cement Paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by exposure to atmosphere the cement Paint rapidly becomes air set due to its hygroscopic qualities. In case of cement Paint brought in gunny bags, once the bag is opened, the contents should be consumed in full on the day of its opening. If the same is not likely to be consumed in full, the balance quantity should be transferred and preserved in an airtight container to avoid its exposure to atmosphere.
Application of Paint The paint shall be applied by means of brushes and in the manner specified by the manufacturer. For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coats of water proof cement paint as found necessary to get a uniform shade. For old work, the treatment shall be with one or more coats as found necessary to get a uniform shade. The number of coats to be applied should be higher of the one mentioned in the Bill of Quantities or above. The subsequent coats shall be applied after the preceding coat is properly cured and has thoroughly hardened, inspected and approved and as per manufacturer’s specification. The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24 hours. Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat shall not be wetted. Absorbent surfaces shall be evenly damped so as to give even suction. In dry weather, freshly painted surfaces shall be kept damp for at least two days and protected from direct sun.
21.3.3. Acrylic / Plastic Emulsion Paint Preparation of Surface The surface where paint is to be applied shall be cleaned and smoothly sand papered, all dust being removed. If the paint is to be applied on a wooden surface, suitable filler materials shall be applied and sanded off to achieve a clean and smooth surface. When painting a metal surface, all loose scales, rust, etc. shall be removed by the use of suitable sand paper.
Primer Two coats of cement primer, wood primer or metal primer as required shall be applied. Each coat shall be approximately 20- 30 microns when applied by brush. The primed surface shall be neatly and smoothly sand papered and cleaned.
Application of Paint The paint of approved shade shall be applied as per manufacturer's printed instruction by suitable brush. A minimum of two coats shall be applied to achieve a uniform painted surface. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 76
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
The number of coats shall be minimum 2 or more as stipulated in the item. The Paint will be applied in the usual manner with brush, spray or roller. The Paint dries by evaporation of the water content and as soon as the water has evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat can be applied. The time of drying varies from one hour on absorbent surfaces to 2 to 3 hours on non-absorbent surfaces. The thinning of emulsion is to be done with water and not with turpentine. Thinning with water will be particularly required for the under coat which is applied on the absorbent surface. The quantity of water to be added shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions. The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary more coats will be applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance.
Precautions . Old brushes if they are to be used with emulsion Paints, should be completely dried of turpentine or oil Paints by washing in warm soap water. . Brushes should be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept immersed in water during break periods to prevent the Paint from hardening on the brush. . In the preparation of wall for plastic emulsion painting, no oil base putties shall be used in filling cracks, holes etc. . Splashes on floors etc. shall be cleaned out without delay as they will be difficult to remove after hardening. . Washing of surfaces treated with emulsion Paints shall not be done within 3 to 4 weeks of application.
21.3.4. Synthetic Enamel Paint Preparation of Surface The surface where paint is to be applied shall be cleaned and smoothly sand papered, all dust being removed. If the paint is to be applied on a wooden surface, suitable filler materials shall be applied and sanded off to achieve a clean and smooth surface. When painting a metal surface, all loose scales, rust, etc. shall be removed by the use of suitable sand paper.
Primer When synthetic enamel paint is to be applied onto a cement plastered surface or concrete surface, two coats of suitable cement primer shall be applied to the clean prepared surface. When the paint is to be applied to a wooden surface, two coats of wood primer shall be applied to the cleaned prepared surface.
Application of the Paint Following the preparation of the surface and the application of the primer a top coat shall be applied. A second coat shall be applied after the first coat has dried. Care should be taken that dust or other foreign materials do not settle or otherwise disfigure the various coats. The same brand and same batch of materials shall be used for all coats. The paint shall be used and applied as per manufacturer’s printed instruction. The paint shall be applied with bristle brushes. Once the paints shall be applied in the thinnest possible layers with parallel drawings, no flow down shall be allowed.
21.3.5. Exterior Paint Preparation of Surface For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping, dirt dust, algae, fungus or moth, grease and other foreign matter of brushing and washing, pitting in plaster shall make good, Surface imperfections such as cracks, holes etc. should be repaired using white cement. The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the Engineer after inspection before painting is commenced.
Application Base coat of water proofing cement paint. All specifications in respect of base coat of water proofing cement paint shall be as described under Cement paint. Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its container, when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so that its consistency is kept uniform. Dilution ratio of paint with
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 77
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works potable water can be altered taking into consideration the nature of surface climate and as per recommended dilution given by manufacturer. In all cases, the manufacturer’s instructions & directions of the Engineer shall be followed meticulously. The lids of paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to atmosphere the paint may thicken and also be kept safe from dust. Paint shall be applied with a brush on the cleaned and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes shall be given, First and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks.
21.3.6. Coal tar or Wood Preservative The undressed surfaces of timber work shall be painted with bitumen paint or wood preservative as specified for various items like underside of door, window frame, timber rafter, purlin, under framing, underside of ceiling etc. This shall be applied in two coats.
21.3.7. Lime Wash The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar droppings and other stickings. Lime solution shall be prepared from screened lime putty mixed with 1 kg. of gum with 0.28 cu. m. of lime putty. The lime solution shall be screened through muslin cloth to obtain a clear solution. The holes etc. shall be filled with lime putty and rubbed smooth. The surface shall be sand papered smoothly. The lime coat shall be done with alternate application of horizontal and vertical making at one coat. Second coat shall be done after the drying of previous coat. The lime wash shall be finished to give an even and uniform surface without any patches, cracks or brush marks.
21.3.8. Colour Wash Colour of required shade and quantity shall be added in the lime solution to achieve the colour wash solution. Application and finish shall be as of lime wash.
21.3.9. Primer Paints In case of timber surfaces, the surface to be primed shall be sand papered smooth. The surface having knots, nail holes shall be filled with stopping and knotting materials which shall be allowed to dry and sand papered. In case of plaster surface, the surface defects shall be patched up with this paste of the same primer and after drying. In case of metal, de-rusting shall be done and properly cleaned after sand papering. After preparing the surface, the priming coat shall be applied with brushes. The plastered surface shall be water sprayed prior to application of cement primer. The primer to other surfaces like timber and metal shall be applied after cleaning the surfaces.
21.3.10. Linseed Oil This shall be applied on clean, sand-papered surface and allowed to dry.
21.3.11. Water Repellent Paint This paint shall be applied on the exposed surface of brickwork. Prior to application of silicone based colourless paint, the brickwork surface shall be cleaned of all dirt and patches of mortar, if any. This shall be applied in two separate coats, allowing at least 24 hours between coats. The printed instructions of the manufacturer shall be strictly followed. The approximate covering capacity shall be 1.85-2.3 sq. m. per coat litre on brick surfaces.
21.3.12. Silane Siloxane paint Preparation Make sure the wall is clean; heavy accumulations of atmospheric dirt interfere with proper penetration or adhesion of the coating and result in poor performance and shorter life. Allow sufficient time for curing and the moisture in the bricks to evaporate. The moisture content of the wall should be consistent with the manufacturer’s recommendation; check the moisture content at several locations. Observe the climatic conditions recommended by the coating manufacturer for application on clay brick substrates; typically, temperatures should be above 4°C and below 38°C. Apply the coating as per the manufacturer’s recommendations or minimum two coats with a gap 0f 24 hours between the two applications.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 78
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
Procedures The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering base preparation, laying and finishing of works.
21.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 21.4.1. Measurement Measurement shall be done in square meter. The measurements shall be as follows: Work description Measurement method Multiplying factor Panelled or framed Measured flat (not girthed) end of frame to frame 1.5 for each side Flush doors Measured flat (not girthed) end of frame to frame 1 for each side Fully glazed or wire gauged Measured flat (not girthed) end of frame to frame 0.5 for each side Partially panelled, glazed or gauged Measured flat (not girthed) end of frame to frame 1 for each side Fully ventilated or louvered Measured flat (not girthed) end of frame to frame 1.5 for each side
Nothing extra shall be paid for short width and surface of any shape, size. This shall include for two or more coats inclusive of materials, scaffolding, surface preparation, cleaning and labour all complete.
21.4.2. Payment Payment for plastic emulsion paint, Enamel paint, weather coat, and Chapra polish shall be made at the unit rates per square meter quoted respectively in the Bill of Quantities. The rate shall include all labours, materials and use of tools to carry out the following operations: . Supplying and mixing the paint as specified. . Scaffolding including erection and dismantling. g. Preparation of the surface before painting. . Application of paints as specified. . Curing and protecting the painted surface.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 79
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
22. LANDSCAPING 22.1. GENERAL 22.1.1. Scope This section covers the land development and landscaping internally and externally which includes supply of soil, cutting, refilling depressions and hollows, cutting of trees, removal of roots, plantation of trees, laying of turfs, civil works as per drawing or instruction of Engineer.
22.1.2. Standards The work specified in this section shall be in accordance with the following standards, or approved equal, except as they are modified and supplemented herein: . Stacking and storage of Construction Materials and Components at site-Recommendations: IS 4082 . Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones: IS 1129 . Polished Building Stones (Part-1) Granite: IS 14223 (Part 1) . Other materials shall be as defined in other sections under these specifications compendium
22.1.3. Submittals The Contractor shall identify the location for good quality of soil and turf. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer well in time with the sample of soil and turf being used before the commencement of work. Once the approval of the samples the source of material shall not be changed without prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer procedures covering dressing, trenching, uprooting weeds, supply, staking and spreading of sludge, turfing, plantation, and care of works. The tests for soil, cement, sand, aggregate, brick shall be conducted as per the Earthwork, Mortar works, Concrete works and Brick works specifications respectively and reports shall be submitted to the Engineer before commencement of work. Before starting the work, the contractor shall get samples of turfs and soil approved by the Engineer.
22.2. MATERIAL 22.2.1. Turfs Turfs shall be interpreted as grass that is seasonally dormant during the cold or dry seasons and is capable of renewing growth after the dormant period. The turfs shall be brought by the Contractor from areas where the topsoil is reasonably fertile and contains a high percentage of loamy topsoil. Turfs shall be cut or stripped from living, thickly matted turf relatively free of weeds or other undesirable foreign plants, large stones, roots or other materials which might be detrimental to the development of the turf or to future maintenance. Turf including the soil containing the roots shall be planted in a neat and systematic way. The strips of the turf shall be in uniform widths not less than 225 mm and length not more than 450 mm, but such lengths should be readily lifted without breaking, tearing or loss of soil.
22.2.2. Top Soil The top soil on which turfing is to be done shall be free of admixture of sub-soil, stone, gravel, clay lumps, plants or their roots, sticks or other extraneous materials exceeding 50 mm diameter. It shall be clay loam. The top soil shall be approved by the Engineer before being placed.
22.2.3. Civil Work Materials Civil materials such as cement, sand, aggregates, bricks shall be of approved quality as mentioned in respective chapters or as mentioned in drawing or as per instructions of Engineer.
22.3. EXECUTION 22.3.1. Rough Dressing of the Trenched Ground The trenched ground shall be levelled and rough dressed and if there are any hollows and depressions resulting from subsidence which cannot be so levelled, these shall be filled properly with earth brought from outside to bring the depressed surface to the level of the adjoining land and to remove discontinuity of slope and then rough dressed again.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 80
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part II, Civil Works
22.3.2. Spreading good Earth Good earth shall be removed from stacks by head load and spread evenly over the surface to the thickness ordered by the Engineer. It shall be spread with a twisting motion to avoid segregation and to ensure that spreading is uniform over the entire area. Manure shall be added and given sufficient time so that soil gets mixed with the manure. If any civil structure shall be constructed, the work shall be completed before the soil work or as instructed by the Engineer.
22.3.3. Turfing and Plantation The turfs shall be transplanted within 24 hours from the time it is stripped unless storing is a necessity. If stored, turfs shall be staked, kept moist and protected from exposure to the air and sun. Turfs shall be cut and moved only when the soil mixture conditions are such that favourable results can be expected. Turfing shall be performed only during the seasons when satisfactory results can be expected. Turfing may be transplanted during periods of drought with the approval of the Engineer, provided the turf bed is watered to moisten the soil to a depth of at least 100 mm immediately prior to laying the turf. The turf shall be carefully placed by hand, edge to edge with staggered joints, in rows at right angle to the slopes, commencing at the base of the area to be turfed and working upward. The turf shall immediately be pressed firmly into contact with the turf bed by tamping to provide a true and even surface. Screened soil of good quality shall be used to fill all cracks between turfs. The quality of fill solid shall not cause smothering of the grass. Plantation shall be done as per instruction of Engineer.
22.3.4. Care of Works The Contractor shall provide general care for the turfed area, protect against traffic and shall continue until final inspection and acceptance of the work. If the surface becomes gullied or otherwise damaged during the period, the affected area shall be repaved to re-establish the grade and condition as directed.
22.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 22.5. Measurement Measurement of landscaping for payment will be made only to the works, as shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer. The size shall be measured correct up to 10 mm, and the content worked out in square meter on the ground surface covered by landscaping work.
22.6. Payment Payment for landscaping shall be made at the unit rates square metre quoted for item LD1 and ELD5 in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rates shall include the cost of all labours, materials and equipment all complete as per drawing and instruction of the Engineer.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 81
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
ANNEX A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PART III, SANITARY WORKS
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page i
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
Table of Contents 1. Quality Control...... 3 2. Excavation Work ...... 7 3. Sanitary and Sewer Pipes ...... 9 4. SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAIN WATER PIPING ...... 11 5. WASTE PIPES FROM APPLIANCES ...... 13 6. SEPTIC TANK ...... 14 7. WATER SUPPLY………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..15
8. PIPE INSULATION ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………19
9. BATHROOM FIXTURES AND FITTINGS …………………………………………………………………………….20
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page ii
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
1. QUALITY CONTROL 1.1. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labour and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2. GENERAL Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, all the applicable codes and standards published by the international, national and Indian Standards and its subsequent revision and all other standards, which may be published by them before construction work starts, shall govern in respect of design, workmanship, quality and properties or materials and method of testing. (All materials shall confirm and bear stamps of the required Standard, specification or equivalent.) Some of these available standards are listed below: . IS: 778 Specifications for gun metal gate-, globe- and check-valves and for water, steam and oil only. . IS: 779 Specifications for flow meter for water only. . IS: 781 Specifications for cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services. . IS: 781E Specification for sand cast brass screw down bib taps and stop taps for water services. . IS: 1172 Basic requirements of water supply, drainage and sanitation. . IS: 1239 / NS: 199 Specifications for galvanised mild steel tubes, tubular and other galvanised wrought steel fittings. . IS: 1879 Specification for GI pipe fittings. . IS: 544 Specification for threads of GI pipe fittings (parallel female and taper male threads). . IS: 1703 Specification for ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including float for water supply purpose. . IS: 1726 Specification for cast iron manhole covers & frames. . IS: 1742 Code of practice for building drainage. . IS: 2064 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances. . IS: 2056 Code of practice for water supply in building. . IS: 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for building. . IS: 2556 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous China). . NS: 40 Specifications for high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe. . NS: 68 / IS: 4985 Specifications for rigid polyvinylchloride (uPVC) pipe. . IS: 5382 Specifications for rubber rings of rigid polyvinylchloride (uPVC) pipe. . BS: 4514 / DIN: 1953 Specifications for rigid polyvinylchloride (uPVC) pipe fittings. . DIN: 8078 General quality requirements and testing of polypropylene random copolymer (PP-R) pipes. . DIN: 8077 Dimensions of polypropylene random copolymer (PP-R) pipes. . DIN: 6962 Pipe joints and components for polypropylene random copolymer (PP-R) pressure pipes. . DIN: 16928 connections and components layout for polypropylene random copolymer pipe. . ASTM: D 1784 Specification for PVC materials for PVC schedule 40 pipe and pipe fittings . ASTM: D 1785 Specification for dimensions for PVC schedule 40 plain end pipe . ASTM: D 2466 Specification for dimensions for PVC schedule 40 pipe fittings . ASTM: D 2564 Specification for solvent cement for PVC schedule 40 pipe and pipe fittings . ASTM: D 2846 Specification for dimensions for C-PVC schedule 40 pipe and pipe fittings . ASTM: 493 Specification for solvent cement for C-PVC schedule 40 pipe and pipe fittings The Contractor will submit all samples to the Engineer for approval, together with Manufacturer's literature and installation instructions and obtain his full approval before placing any material orders or commencing the works. In cases where materials are not available in Imperial Measurements (as referred to) the nearest size metric units or vice versa shall be provided, with prior approval of the Engineer, at no extra cost to the contract.
1.3. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHOD All materials provided for the contract will be in strict accordance with the latest version of the applicable Indian Standards. All manufacturer's data, specifications and relative information together with samples will be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to being purchased, otherwise at the contractor's own risk.
1.3.1. Materials Trade Names Variations Tenders shall be based upon complete installations. Products required which are not shown or mentioned, or not specified herein as to manufacturer; quality, etc. shall be furnished of the highest quality. Materials shall be new and free from all defects.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 3
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
All materials, apparatus or equipment called for on the plans or in the specifications by trade names, or the name of a particular manufacturer, or by catalogue reference are the materials, apparatus, or equipment which should be allowed for in the Tender, or qualification submitted at the time of Tender submission.
1.3.2. Regulations The work shall be carried out in accordance with all rules, regulations, by-laws and requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. All changes and alterations required by an authorized inspector of any authority having jurisdiction should be carried out at no cost to the Owner.
1.3.3. Drawings and Specifications These specifications shall be considered as an integral part of the drawings, which accompany them. Neither the plans nor the specifications shall be used alone. Any item or subject omitted from one, but which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the other shall be considered as properly and sufficiently specified and therefore must be supplied by the contractor. Misinterpretation of any requirements of either the drawings or specifications shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility for properly completing his work. The contractor shall apply to the Engineer for any explanation, which he may require in regard to the meaning and intent of any clause in the specification and contract. He shall be held responsible for any errors or losses consequent upon failure to obtain such explanation The contractor shall consult with the Engineer to obtain detail drawings or instructions for exact location of equipment as work progresses, before installing fitting or equipment and will be responsible for coordination with all other work trades including finishes. Drawings show general location and routes to be followed by pipes, ducts, etc. where not shown, or shown diagrammatically, the contractor shall install them in accordance with best trade practices.
1.3.4. Shop Drawings The contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop and setting out drawings or diagrams necessary in order to make clear the work intended or to show its relation to adjacent work of other trades. The contractor shall make any changes in such drawings or diagrams, which the Engineer may require, consistent with the contract. Details of shop drawings submitted for approval shall show clearly the relations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made by the contractor and noted on the drawings before being submitted for approval.
1.3.5. As Built Record The contractor shall request a complete set of mechanical drawings (white) from the Engineer and use these for "As Built" records. "As Built" records shall be retained in the site office and kept up to date daily in regard to changes in actual installation from the plans and specifications. Alterations to duct work, piping services, etc. shall be noted and the revised arrangement drawn in accurately, complete with dimensions from column lines. Every precaution shall be taken to protect the drawings from damage and loss. The "As Built" records shall be made available to the Engineer upon request and made available at each site meeting. After no further alteration can be expected and the contract is nearing completion, the records shall be submitted for final approval. The contractor shall include on "As Built" records the dimensions location of all buried piping and valves, and during construction plainly mark location of exterior services and valves to prevent damage to these until the project is completed.
1.3.6. Cutting and Patching Openings not indicated on the Architectural or Structural drawings, which are required for bringing equipment into the building or for other temporary or permanent service, shall be approved by the Engineer. The contractor will provide maintain and restore these openings and shall pay for their provision and restoration. Ample notice shall be given of size and location of such openings.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 4
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
The contractor shall ensure that he does not undertake any cutting that may impair the strength of the building. No holes, except expansion bolts and small screws may be drilled into the structure without obtaining prior approval. Persons, skilled in the trades, shall do all cutting and patching work in a neat and workman like manner.
1.3.7. Painting All equipment supplied under this specification shall be delivered to the site with a factory applied prime coat of paint unless noted otherwise. All supports and hangers shall receive a prime coat of paint. Painting where required for pipe, duct services, equipment identification, including stencilling shall be carried out by a paint tradesman under this division in accordance with the workmanship and material specification. All factory prime-coated or finish coated equipment shall be touched up or repainted if equipment is marred during shipment or installation.
1.3.8. Expansion and Contraction Unless shown otherwise, the contractor shall be responsible for measures to control the thermal movement of piping and apparatus. Piping shall be erected in such manners that strain and weight do not come directly upon connections, joints or apparatus. Where possible, the effect shall be obtained by providing changes in direction and loops in pipe runs, supplemented by the necessary guides, anchors and limit stops.
1.3.9. Pipe Sleeves An adequate number of sleeves (pipe inserts) of mild steel shall be provided where pipes pass through concrete, masonry and similar work. The pipe inserts shall have a flange welded in the center around its circumference, in order to provide water tight and secure fixing into the structure. The sizes of the pipe sleeves (pipe inserts) shall be as per the drawings supplied and / or as given below. Sleeves through Exterior Walls below Grade . Sleeves in exterior foundation walls below grade shall project 25 mm beyond the outside surface of the wall and be flush with the inside surface. . The annular space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be caulked with un- tarred oakum and sealed with approved caulking compound. The sealing shall be 25 mm deep from each side. The pipe and sleeve surfaces shall be cleaned to enable good bonding. Allow 24 hours for setting of the compound. The contractor shall adhere strictly to the manufacturer's recommendation. Sleeves through Interior Wall, Floor and Ceilings: . Sleeves through interior masonry walls and partitions shall be set flush with finished wall surfaces. . Sleeves through floors in finished areas shall terminate 25 mm above the finished floor. . Sleeves through floors in service area (e.g., mechanical rooms) shall terminate 50 mm above the finished floor. . The annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be packed with Silicon Rubber. In Machine Room, the packing shall be finished at both ends of the sleeve with 6 mm deep caulking compound. In other areas the finishing may be on the room side only. . Pipe insulation shall be carried full thickness through pipe sleeves. Sleeves Size The sleeve size corresponding to outside diameter (if insulated, outside diameter including insulation) shall be as follows: . Outside Ø20 mm to 32 mm: sleeve Ø50 mm . Outside Ø33 mm to 50 mm: sleeve Ø65 mm . Outside Ø51 mm to 75 mm: sleeve Ø100 mm . Outside Ø76 mm to 110 mm: sleeve Ø125 mm . Outside Ø111 mm to 125 mm: sleeve Ø150 mm . Outside Ø126 mm to 160 mm: sleeve Ø200 mm . Outside Ø161 mm to 200 mm: sleeve Ø250 mm
1.3.10. Clean Up The contractor shall clean all exposed metal surfaces from grease, dirt or other foreign materials. Chrome plated and polished work shall be left bright and clean. All openings in pipes and fixtures shall be properly capped and plugged during construction. MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 5
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
Fixtures and equipment shall be properly protected from damage during the construction period and shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.3.11. Pressure Testing These clauses shall apply to all piping systems including water supply and drainage systems, which shall also be governed by the applicable requirements of the IS specifications: a) The contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of all tests. b) Tests of piping system or protection thereof shall include all apparatus forming part of the complete systems, except where such apparatus is factory tested prior to installation in the systems. c) All tests shall be performed before the application of pipe covering or before being concealed. d) For Drainage System, except where otherwise noted, all Soil, Waste, Rain Water, Vent and Fittings shall be tested by Smoke Test and left in working order after completion. The smoke test shall be carried out as stated below: e) Smoke shall be pumped into the drain pipes at the lowest level from a smoke machine, which consists of a blower and a burner. f) The materials usually burnt are greasy cotton waste, which form clear pungent smoke that is easily detected by sight as well as by smell, if leaking at any point of the drain. During testing if any joints are found leaking the same shall be rectified by the contractor at no extra cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. g) For Water Supply Line, except where otherwise noted, shall be tested by Hydraulic Test and the test pressure shall be two times the maximum working pressure of the systems, or 10 kgf per cm², whichever is greater. Test fluid shall be water, unless otherwise indicated. h) Piping systems may be tested in whole or in part. Each system to be tested shall be suitably isolated from existing or new systems using temporary blanks between flanges (thickness of blanks shall be approved by the Engineer), or caps. Where necessary for testing purposes, a pair of flanges shall be installed in the piping system for the installation of blanks. Tests shall not be performed against a closed valve. i) All drains valves, safety or relief valves and other pressure sensitive devices shall be removed prior to testing, and the openings capped or plugged. It is not permissible to plug or seal safety or relief valves. Air shall be removed from the highest points to the satisfaction of the Engineer before flushing vent openings. j) Temporary blanks or caps shall be removed when testing has been satisfactorily completed and drains, vents, safety or relief valves etc. replaced. k) At least four hours shall elapse after erection before any welded or brazed line is subjected to test pressure. l) When test pressure is attained, the test pump or compressor shall be disconnected and the connection capped. The test pressure gauge shall be left in the system. m) At least four hours shall elapse after test pressure is applied before the system is inspected for leaks. All joints, glands, connections etc. shall be carefully inspected for leaks and tightened as necessary. n) Test pressure shall be maintained without appreciable drop in pressure for a minimum period of 24 hours. o) Joints or connections, which continue to leak after tightening shall be completely dismantled, checked, cleaned (replace if necessary), re-assemble and retested. Opening, caulking or hemp shall not be used for leaking joints. p) All water shall be drained from system following testing to prevent damage. q) During testing, precautions shall be taken to prevent injury to persons or property as a result of sudden rupture of a piping system.
1.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The tasks related to quality control shall not be measured or paid separately. The associated costs shall be considered included in the unit rate of the corresponding work items quoted by the Contractor in his Bid.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 6
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
2. EXCAVATION WORK 2.1. GENERAL 2.1.1. Alignment and Grade The drainage, water supply and sewer lines are to be laid to alignment and gradients shown on the drawings but subject to such modifications as shall be ordered by the Engineer from time to time to meet the requirements of the works. No deviations from the lines, depths of cuttings or gradients of sewers shown on the drawings shall be permitted except by the express direction in writing of the Engineer.
2.2. EXECUTION 2.2.1. Excavation in Tunnels The excavation shall be open cutting unless the permission of the Engineer for the ground to be tunneled is obtained in writing. Where Sewer lines have to be constructed along narrow passages, the Engineer may order the excavation to be made partly in tunnel and in such cases the excavated soil shall be brought back later on for refilling the trenches or tunnels.
2.2.2. Opening out Trenches In excavating the trenches, etc. the soil, road metal, pavement, kerbing, etc. and turf is to be placed on one side and preserved for reinstatement when the trench or other excavation shall be filled up. The surface of all trenches and holes shall be restored and maintained the satisfaction of the Engineer and of the owners of the roads or other property traversed and the contractor shall not cut or break down any live fence or trees in the line of the proposed works but shall seek tunnel under them unless the Engineer shall order to the contrary. The contractor shall grub up and clear the surface over the trenches and other excavations of all trees, stumps, roots and all other in cumbrances affecting execution of the work & shall remove them from the site to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.3. Obstruction of Roads The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width of any road or street, and if sufficient space shall then be left for public & private transit, he shall remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when trench is required to be refilled. The contractor shall obtain the consent of the Engineer in writing before closing any road to vehicular traffic, and the foot-walks must be kept clear at all times.
2.2.4. Removal of Sewage All night soil, sewage or any other offensive matter met with during the excavation of the works, immediately after it is taken out of any trench, sewer or cesspool, shall not be deposited upon the surface or where it is likely to be a nuisance or passed into any sewer or drain but shall, at once be put into carts and removed to a suitable place to be provided by the contractor.
2.2.5. Excavation to be taken to Proper Depths The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth to allow that the sewers shall rest on concrete as described and so that the inverts may be at the levels given on the sections. In bad ground the Engineer may order the contractor to excavate to a greater depth than that shown on the drawings and to fill up the excavation to the level of the sewer with concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials. The contractor shall be paid extra at rates laid down for such works in the schedule if the extra work was ordered by the Engineer in writing, but if the contractor should excavate the trench to a greater depth than is required, without a specific order to that effect in writing of the Engineer, the extra depth shall have to be filled up with concrete at the contractor's own costs and charges to the requirements and satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.2.6. Backfilling After the sewer or other work has been laid and proved to be watertight the trench or other excavations shall be backfilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage shall be caused to the sewer and other permanent work. The filling in the trenches and up to 300 mm above the crown of the sewer shall consist of the finest selected materials placed carefully in 150 mm layers and consolidated, using approved methods. After this has been laid, the trench and other excavation shall be backfilled carefully in 150 mm layers with materials taken from the excavation, each layer being watered to assist in the consolidation.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 7
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
2.2.7. Contractor to restore Settlements and Damages The contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, make good promptly during the whole period the works are in hand, any settlements that may occur in the surfaces of roads, footpaths, gardens, open spaces, etc. whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his other excavations and he shall be liable for any accidents caused thereby. He shall also, at his own expenses and charges, repair and make good any damage done to buildings and other property. If in the opinion of the Engineer he fails to make good such works with all practicable dispatch he shall be at liberty to get the work done by other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid by the contractor or deducted from any money that may be or become due to him or recovered from him in any other manner according to the law of the land.
2.2.8. Disposal of Surplus Soil The contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, provide places for disposal of all surplus materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled the surplus soil shall be immediately removed, the surface properly restored and roadways and sides left clear.
2.2.9. Timbering of Sewer and Trenches The contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides of the sewer trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling and sheeting, and they shall be close timbered in loose or sandy strata and below the surface of the sub-soil water level. All timbering, sheeting and piling with their walling and supports shall be of adequate dimensions and strength and fully braced and strutted so that no risk of collapse or subsidence of the walls of the walls of the trench shall take place. The contractor shall be held responsible and accountable for the insufficiency of all timbering, bracing, sheeting and piling used for, all damage to persons and property resulting from improper quality, strength placing, maintaining or removing of the same.
2.2.10. Shoring of Buildings The contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures the stability of which is liable to be endangered by the execution of the work and shall be fully responsible for all damages to persons to property resulting from any accident to any of such buildings.
2.2.11. Removal of Water from Sewer and Trenches The contractor shall at all time during the progress of the work keep the trenches and excavations free from water which shall be disposed of by him in a manner as will neither cause injury to the public or private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the surface of any roads or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the public. If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width than specified cross-section of the sewer with its envelope, the full width of the trench shall be filled with concrete by the contractor at his own expense and charges to the requirements of the Engineer. The Engineer shall have power by giving an order in writing to the contractor to increase the maximum width in respect of which payment will be allowed for excavation in trenches for various classes of sewer, manholes, and other works in certain lengths to be specifically laid down by him, where, on account of bad ground or other unusual conditions, he considers that such increased width are necessary in view of the site conditions. Recommended width of trenches at the bottom of the trench for corresponding outer diameter of pipes shall be as follows: . Up to Ø110 mm: 450 mm . From Ø111 to 160 mm: 550 mm . From Ø161 to 250 mm: 600 mm . Above Ø250 mm: 750 mm Minimum width of the bed concrete shall also be as above. No additional payment is admissible for widths greater than specified.
2.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement and payment shall be as specified in Part I, Section 4.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 8
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
3. SANITARY AND SEWER PIPES 3.1. GULLY TRAPS Gully traps shall be as per the drawing supplied. Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:3:6 and a brick masonry chamber 350 mm x 350 mm inside in cement mortar 1:3 with 150 mm x 150 mm grating inside and 600 mm x 600 mm CI sealed cover and frame weighing not less than 7.3 kg to be constructed as per standard drawings.
3.2. SEWER DRAINAGE AND SITE DRAINAGE The work covered under this section comprises of the supply and installation of: a) Night Soil and Waste Water drainage system complete. b) Strom Water drainage system complete Pipes for these works shall be as follows: a) Up to Ø110 mm should be of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe having working pressure of 4.0 kgf per sq cm in accordance with Nepal Standard NS: 40 and carried out as described herein. b) From Ø110 mm to 250 mm should be of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe having working pressure of 2.5 kgf per sq. cm in accordance with Nepal Standard NS: 40 and carried out as described herein. c) Over Ø250 mm, should be of Centrifugally Spun Reinforced Cement Concrete Pipes (RCC or Hume Pipe) with separate collar as per schedule NP-2 or NP-3 in accordance with Indian Standard IS: 458 and carried out as described herein.
3.3. EXECUTION 3.3.1. HDPE Pipe All High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe in accordance with NS: 40 for Sewer Drainage lines passing under buildings, floors, roads or paths with heavy traffic or in exposed positions above ground shall be in but welded joints. The position of such pipes shall generally be shown on the drawings or details. HDPE Pipes shall be in thermal fusion but welded joints. The jointing of pipes and fittings shall not be made with different kinds of pipes and proprietary systems, but only by but welded joints. Trenches, beds, surrounds and backfilling will be carried out as described herein this specification, and as detailed in the Drawings or as directed by Site-in-Charge to suit the site conditions as necessary.
3.3.2. RCC Pipe RCC (Hume) Pipes shall be laid and jointed as per the code of practice of cement concert pipes of Indian Standard (IS): 783. After setting out the pipe to correct grade/ alignment, the collars shall be centred over the joints and filled in with the tarred spun yarn, till the sufficient space is left around the collar to receive the cement mortar. The space shall then be filled with cement mortar in ratio of 1:1 (1 cement; 1 washed coarse sand) and chalked by means of proper tools. All joints shall be finished at an angle of 45º to the longitudinal axis of the pipe around the collars. The joints shall be cured for at least 4 days. The joints shall be t4ested to a head of 2.5 metre of water column. The majority of Sub Soil Drainage and Surface Water Drainage are routed in to nearby drainage system running along the boundary wall and / or in to the water stream near the area. The Contractor will allow for all work outside the site boundary, including public protection, for the whole period of work while making the final connection. The existing pavement, if broken up, will reinstate to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. When sufficient approved material has been placed around and over the pipe, a further bed of coarse aggregate (average 40 mm in size) will be placed of a depth of 150 mm, prior to back filling the trench with excavated materials. "Loose Compaction" only shall be carried out in 300 mm layers up to the required level.
3.3.3. Manholes and Grease Trap Collection Chambers Manholes and Chambers shall be constructed as shown in Detail Drawings, and where shown on Site Services layout. Materials shall be of not less than 225 mm Brickwork, cast-in-place concrete, or pre-cast concrete. Concrete shall be M20 strength. All brickwork shall be plastered in cement, sand (1:2). Gratings, lids and castings in general shall be in Cast Iron in accordance with IS 5961 and built in or fixed as detailed. All manholes designated to be constructed shall be as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 9
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
All manholes shall be supported on a base of cement concrete of such thickness and mix as given in the Schedule of Quantities or shown on the drawings. Where not specified, internal dimension of manholes shall be as per the following corresponding depths: . Up to 450 mm depth: 450 mm x 600 mm . From 450 mm to 600 mm depth: 600 mm x 600 mm . From 600 mm to 1200 mm depth: Ø900 mm or 900 mm x 900 mm . From 1200 mm to 3000 mm depth: Ø1200 mm or 900 mm x 1200 mm All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching in 1:2:4 mix. The benching shall have a slope of 100 mm towards the channel. The depth of the channel shall be the full diameter of the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a floating coat of neat cement. The manhole chamber covers and frames shall comply with the following ratings: . Category Light, outer dimension 27”X27”, inner dimension 24”X24” or 500 mm, weight 78.5 kg . Category Heavy, outer dimension 27”X27”, inner dimension 24”X24” or 600 mm, weight 216 kg All manholes shall be plastered with 12 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) and finished inside with a floating coat of neat cement. Manholes shall be plastered outside as above cut with rough plaster. All manholes shall be provided with cast iron covers and frames and embedded in reinforced cement concrete slab weight of cover and frame thickness of slab shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities or given above.
3.3.4. Making Connections Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting the walls, benching and restoring them to the original condition. A new channel shall be cut in the benching of the existing manhole for the new connections; contractor shall remove all sewage and water if encountered in making the connection without additional cost.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 10
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
4. SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAIN WATER PIPING 4.1. SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES 4.1.1. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes and fittings All soil, waste, vent and rain water pipes shall be Un-Plasticized Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) soil, waste and rainwater (SWR) pipes unless specified otherwise. All pipes shall be straight and smooth and inside free from irregular bore and other manufacturing defects. Pipes shall be as per Nepal standard conforming to NS: 68 (or IS: 4985). All fittings shall conform to Standard DIN: 19531 or BS: 4514. Fittings shall be of the required degree with or without access door. All access doors shall be made up with rubber gasket, while screw cover to make the fitting air and water tight. The recommended joints of uPVC pipes shall be solvent cement joints or with rubber ring socket joints. The rubber rings shall confirm to Indian Standard IS: 5382.
4.2. EXECUTION 4.2.1. Storage and Handling uPVC Pipes: The pipes should be given adequate support at all time. Pipes should be stored in a reasonably flat surface free from stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported throughout its length. In storage, pipes racks should provide continuous support and sharp corners of metal racks should be avoided. Socket and spigot pipes should be stacked in layers with socket end placed at alternate ends of the stacks to avoid top sided stacks. It is recommended not to store pipe inside another pipe. On no account pipes shall be stored in a stressed or bent condition or near the source of the heat. Pipes should not be stacked more than 1.5 metres high and pipes of different sizes and classes should be stacked separately. The ends of pipes should be protected from abrasion and particularly those specially prepared for jointing either by spigot or socket solvent cement joints. If due to unsatisfactory storage of handling a pipe becomes 'kinked' the damaged portion should be cut out completely. 'Kinking' is likely to occur in very thin walled pipes.
4.2.2. Method of Jointing UPVC Pipes Solvent Cement Joints The technique is used with spigot and socket type joint, in which the socket is made specially to form a close fit on the pipe end and with injection moulded fittings. Solvent Cement of Supreme Industries Ltd. or equivalent make shall be used as per the recommendations of the manufactures. The dust, oil, water grease etc. should be wiped out with dry cloth from the surface to be coated with solvent cement. The coating of solvent cement shall be applied evenly on the inside of the fittings for full length of insertion and then on the outside of the pipe end up to the marked line and the pipe twisted to a quarter of a turn to spread the cement evenly at the same time ensuring the pipe, pushed home fully into the socket. The pipe should be pushed into the rifting socket and held for one to two minutes as otherwise the pipes comes out of the fitting due to slippery quality of cement and the tapering inside bore of the fitting. The surplus cement on the pipe surfaces shall be wiped out. In most of the cases the pipe inserted should be up to the marked line and in no case shall be less than 2/5 of the diameter of the pipe and up to marked line. When the joint is made, the remaining cement on the pipe surfaces shall be wiped off immediately without fail as the continued action of solvent cement will weaken the wall on the pipe and cause failure under pressure. For warm place in summer month joints shall be made preferably early in the morning or in the evening, when it is cooler and for cold place in winter joints shall be made preferably during the day (sunny) when it is warm. Since solvent cements are inflammable they should not be used near the naked flames. In certain cases fumes given off from solvent cement may be a source of danger if not carried in a ventilated area. When not in use, containers of solvent cement should be kept closed tightly to avoid loss of solvent or entry of dirt. Cement, which has gelled or hardened, should be discarded.
Rubber Ring Joints or 'O' Ring Shrink Joints (Shaft Piping) uPVC pipe and uPVC pipe fittings may be jointed with approved rubber ring to provide the watertight seal. The ring may be housed in groove formed in the socket housing. The rubber is compressed and makes a seal between the pipe and the housing. It is advisable to use uPVC Lubricant for proper sliding of the pipe end to the rubber socket piece.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 11
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
Cast Iron (CI) Fitting For Rain Water Pipe Line, the uPVC Pipe End at the roof level where rain water enters the uPVC Pipe should have Cast Iron (CI) Pipe Fitting (CI Tee if possible otherwise CI Bend). The CI Fittings can be connected to the uPVC pipe or uPVC Pipe Fitting by inserting the end of CI pipefitting inside the bell mouth end of uPVC pipe or uPVC pipe fitting. Both pipe ends to be connected should be heated and the bell mouth of the uPVC pipe or uPVC pipe fitting should be slide over the portion of the CI pipe fitting and should be pressed by hand uniformly all around till both the pipes cool down. The uPVC should be heated by hot air blower not naked flame.
4.2.3. Fixing to Supports The pipes and specials (fittings) before being laid of fixed shall be examined to see that there are no cracks or defects. The pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and dirt. After laying or fixing the pipes in position they shall be arranged in such a way that centre line of pipes coincide with the centre line of the alignment. Fittings, cleanout and floor drains shall also be laid in their position as stated above uPVC Pipes shall be fixed vertically in shaft by means of uPVC clips anchored to walls using uPVC washers, Galvanized Screws and Plastic dowels. In case of pipes laid horizontally, pipe shall be supported on M.S. Brackets/ Hangers of approved design clamped with uPVC Clips. All pipes laid shall have its open ends securely closed with appropriate plugs during progress of work. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed by using proper approved holder bat clams and special hangers. The pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or in a line as directed or as shown in the drawings. The pipes, lay vertically or horizontally shall have the supporting clamps, hangers, Brackets, etc., as per the specification or as directed by the site in charge. uPVC bat clamps holders shall be used to fix all vertical uPVC pipes in truly vertical position. Branch pipes shall be connected to the stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. Each stack shall be terminated at top for vent. Horizontal pipes running below the ceiling shall be fixed on structural with adjustable clamps. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope as mentioned in the drawings and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on them. As per the site condition, if required or directed by the site in charge, pre- fabricated semi-circular made out of Plain GI Sheet of proper thickness shall be provided below the horizontal running pips along with above-mentioned adjustable clamps.
4.2.4. Testing All uPVC Soil, Waste, Vent, Rain Water (SWR) pipes and uPVC pipe fittings shall be tested by smoke test and left in working order after completion. The smoke test shall be carried out as stated below: . Smoke shall be pumped into the SWR pipes at the lowest level from a smoke machine, which consists of a blower and a burner. . The materials usually brunt are greasy cotton waste which form clear pungent smoke which is easily detectable by sight as well as by smell if leaking at any point of the drain. During testing if any joint is found leaking the same shall be rectified by the Contractor at no extra cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.3. NAHANI OR FLOOR TRAPS 4.3.1. Material Nahani or floor traps shall be UPVC or Cast Iron, deep seal with an effective seal of 50 mm. As per drawing, Waste pipes may be discharged over the trap. The trap and waste pipes shall be set in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on the structural floor. The blocks shall be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate) and extended 35 mm below finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centering for the blocks. Size of the block shall be 300 mm x 300 mm and of the required depth.
4.3.2. Execution Pipes shall be fixed and tested as building work proceeds. Contractor shall provide all necessary sleeves, holes and chases in structural members as building work proceeds. Wherever holes are cut or left originally they shall be made good with cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate) and the surface restored as in original condition. No additional payment shall be made for cutting and making good of holes.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 12
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
5. WASTE PIPES FROM APPLIANCES 5.1. MATERIAL 5.1.1. Pipe Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash-basins, shower, bath tub, sinks, drinking fountain, urinals, water closets, etc. shall be of uPVC as given in the Schedule of Quantities or drawings. "Galvanized or Black Wrought Iron Pipes or Pipe Fittings should not be used for Soil Pipes, Waste Pipes, Rain Water Pipes, Anti-Siphon Pipes, Vent Pipes or Drain Pipes from any appliances." All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the out fall drain. Pipes inside a toilet room shall be chased unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Where required pipes may be run at ceiling level in suitable gradient as mentioned in the drawing or directed by the site in charge and supported on structural clamps.
5.1.2. Clean Outs Clean-outs shall be full pipe size up to 110 mm and a minimum of 110 mm on larger pipe. A clean out shall be installed at, or as close as possible to, the base of every vertical waste, soil and drain stack. A clean out shall be installed at the up-slope of each pipe at which a building drain or branch changes direction by more than 45°. Clean-outs in horizontal drainage piping shall be at intervals not greater than: . 15 m where the piping is of dia 100 mm and smaller. . 30 m where the piping is of large than dia 100 mm. . 6 m where waste pipes are horizontally connected to sinks. Nickel-bronze or stainless-steel floor plates with frames shall be installed on finished floors for access to clean-outs. Clean- outs on horizontal lines in finished areas shall be as per IS specifications.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 13
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
6. SEPTIC TANK 6.1. MATERIAL Until unless specified Sintex Septic Tank of prescribed size to be installed. For conventional type, the soil generated in the building shall be treated in the septic tank, effluent from which is disposed to the public sewer. Surface and sub-soil water should be excluded from finding way into the septic tank. The septic tank shall be provided with RCC cover with opening cover of C.I. of Heavy class. The cover and frames shall be of minimum 450 mm diameter. The septic tank shall have a layer of water proof compound protected with plaster and punning. The septic tank shall be provided with ventilating pipe of 110 mm diameter. The top of the pipe shall be provided with a suitable cage of mosquito proof wire mesh. The ventilating pipe shall extend to a height which would cause no smell nuisance to any building in the area. Generally the ventilating pipe may extend to a height of about 2 m, when the septic tank is at least 15 m away from the nearest building and to a height of 2 m above the top of the building when it is located closer than 15 meters. The ventilating pipe may also be connected to the normal soil ventilating system of the building where so desired. The sludge from septic tanks may be delivered into covered pit or into a suitable vehicle for removal from the site. Spreading of sludge on the ground in the vicinity shall not be allowed.
6.2. EXECUTION The tank shall be installed at the line and level provided by the Engineer. It may have to be fully- or partially underground or even on fill material. In all the cases, the earth in the foundation needs to be compacted and a sand bed of thickness 300 mm to be provided. The connections of all the inlets, outlets, vents shall be as specified by the manufacturer of the tank and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6.3. TESTING Before the tank is commissioned for use, it shall be tested for water-tightness by filling it with water and allowing it to stand for 24 hours. It shall then be topped up, if necessary, and allowed to stand for a further period of 24 hours during which time the fall in the level of the water shall not be more than 1.5 cm.
6.4. COMMISSIONING The tank shall be filled with water to its outlet level before the sewage is let into the tank. It shall, preferably, be seeded with small quantities of well digested sludge obtained from septic tanks or sludge digestion tanks. In the absence of digested sludge a small quantity of decaying organic matter, such as digested cow-dung, may be introduced.
6.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Tanks of different capacities shall be measured separately and paid as per the unit rate quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities. The payment shall include the cost of tank, transportation, handling at site and making connections, etc. Earthwork in excavation and/or compaction, brick bat or gravel bed sand fill, and other civil works shall be considered included in the unit rate for the tank.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 14
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
7. WATER SUPPLY 7.1. MATERIAL 7.1.1. Galvanised Mild Steel (GI) Pipe and Fittings Hot Dip Galvanized (GI) Electric Resisted Welded (ERW) Mild Steel Tubes/ Pipes conforming to IS: 1239 of class specified, when class is not specified they shall be Class-B (Medium) of approved brand. Pipe Fittings shall be Hot Deep Galvanized Malleable Cast Iron confirming to IS: 1879 of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are Sockets / Couplings, Elbows, Bends, Tees, Reducers, Unions, etc. Manufacturer's Trademark and ISI Mark should be stamped on the GI Pipe Fittings. GI Pipe and GI pipe Fittings shall have threaded joints as per the manufactures specifications with TEFLON Tape. After cutting the threads in the pipe, care shall be taken to remove burr from the end of the pipe with appropriate tools.
7.1.2. Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe and fittings Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Tubes / Pipes of Class 13.5 in Copper Tube Size (CTS) dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 2846 of approved brand. Pipe Fittings shall be of Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) of Class 11 in Copper Tube Size (CTS) dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 2846 of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are Couplings, Elbows, Bends, Tees, Transition Coupling, Transition Bushings, etc. Manufacturer's Trademark should be stamped on the CPVC Pipe Fittings. CPVC Pipe and CPVC Pipe Fittings shall have cold weld joints by CPVC Solvent cement confirming to ASTM: 493. After cutting the pipe, care shall be taken to remove burr from the end of the pipe with appropriate tools. Only with TEFLON tape, threaded Fixtures shall be fitted with CPVC Threaded Adopters.
7.1.3. Lead-free polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings Lead-free polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubes/ pipes of Schedule: 40, dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 1785 and Materials conforming to ASTM: D 1784 of approved brand. Pipe Fittings shall be of Lead Free Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) of Schedule: 40, dimensions conforming to ASTM: D 2466 of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are Couplings, Elbows, Bends, Tees, Transition Coupling, Transition Bushings, etc. Manufacturer’s Trademark should be stamped on the CPVC Pipe Fittings. PVC Pipe and PVC Pipe Fittings shall have cold weld joints by PVC Solvent cement confirming to ASTM: D 2564. After cutting the pipe, care shall be taken to remove burr from the end of the pipe with appropriate tools. Only with TEFLON tape, threaded Fixtures shall be fitted with PVC Threaded Adopters.
7.1.4. Poly-propylene random copolymer (PP-R) pipe and fittings Poly Propylene Random Copolymer (PP-R) Tubes / Pipes and Pipe Fittings conforming to DIN: 8077 / 8078 of Class as specified (if not specified should be of PN 20 Series) of approved brand. The Pipe Fittings are Couplings, Elbows, Bends, Tees, Transition Coupling, Transition Bushings, etc. Manufacturer's Trademark should be stamped on the PP-R Pipes and Pipe Fittings. PP-R Pipes and PP-R Pipe Fittings shall have hot fusion welding process at 260º C as per the manufacturer’s specifications, instructions and guideline. Only with TEFLON tape, threaded Fixtures shall be fitted with PP-R Threaded Adopters.
7.1.5. Di-Electric Unions Dielectric unions shall be installed at every connection between iron / steel and coppers / brass / bronze.
7.1.6. Unions Adequate number of unions shall be provided on all pipelines to enable to dismantle later. Unions shall be provided near each valve, stopcock, and check valve and in case of GI Pipe - at an interval of 6 m (20 ft.) on straight runs.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 15
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
7.1.7. Flanges Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes over NB 1½" GI Pipe line. Connections shall be made by the correct number and size of nuts and bolts and made with 3-mm thick insertion rubber washer.
7.1.8. Valves Shut-Off Valve Gate Valves shall be heavy gunmetal full way type conforming to IS: 778 (Class: II). Valves shall be tested at manufacturer's works to 21 kg / sq. metre and shall have manufacturer's name stamped on it.
Check (Non-return) Valves Check Valves / Non Return Valves shall be heavy gunmetal Swing Type conforming to IS: 778 (Class: II). Valves shall be tested at manufacturer's works to 21 kg / sq. metre and shall have manufacturer's name stamped on it. The Engineer shall approve all valves before installation work up to 65 mm and small shall be gunmetal
Isolating Valves Isolating valves shall be provided on all branch lines to enable isolation of groups of fixtures and sections of building and as shown on drawings.
Drain Points Drain valves shall be installed in all liquid carrying systems at the low points to facilitate complete drainage of the system.
Hose Bibs Hose bibs in the building shall be cast brasses with a leather disc, screwed pipe end, 20 mm pipe hose tread. Hose bibs in finished areas shall be chromium plated.
7.2. EXECUTION 7.2.1. Excavation Generally, external water mains pipe shall be laid a minimum of 600 mm below ground level. Excavation for trenches shall be done as specified elsewhere, but the depth of the trenches shall be as follow: . Ø15 mm to 50 mm: width 300 mm, depth 750 mm . Ø65 mm to 100 mm: width 450 mm, depth 1000 mm
7.2.2. Laying All Pipes and fittings shall be of class specified in BOQ manufactured under respective Standards. The pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and dirt. After laying or fixing the pipes in position they shall be arranged in such a way that centre line of pipes coincide with the centre line of the alignment, fittings, valves, etc., shall also be laid in their position as stated above. CPVC or PVC pipes shall be fixed by push fit before any solvent cement is applied and when cleared by the site in charge then only permanent joints to be made. The installation of pipe line shall be properly carried out and should be completely watertight. All fixtures and fittings shall be properly installed and checked against leaks at designated pressure. Expansion of hot water pipes shall be compensated for by flexible piping layouts and/ or by utilizing bends in pipe line. Necessary pipe sleeves in the wall, floor, etc. as well as pipe supports, clamps, brackets, etc. should be provided as per the specification and instruction of the site in charge. All main supply pipes and other pipes to be laid under the ground shall be laid over a minimum of 600 mm sand bedding or selected granular material compacted as described herein this specification. The water main shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, and connections at the required locations and all valves and stems plumb.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 16
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance for the work. All pipes, valves and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by hand ropes or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to water main materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall water main materials be dropped or dumped into the trench. Valves, valve covers, meters, tapping sleeves and other accessories shall be installed as per the manufacturer's recommendations and in conjunctions and compliance with the requirements of the Local Government or Public Service Authority specifications. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish and install all proper size pipe bends for both horizontal and vertical deflections that are required to construct the water main to the line and grade as shown and specified.
7.2.3. Jointing The jointing shall be made in accordance with the instructions of the pipe and fitting manufactures. The pressure pipe shall be tested to a minimum of 10 kg / sq. cm. pressure. The setting and arrangement of pipes shall be as per the working drawings. Pipes are cut to size and ends are squared. The pipes and fittings shall be inspected at the site before use. Where the pipes have to be cut, the end shall be carefully plugged so that no obstruction to bore is affected. The pipe shall be cleaned and cleared of all foreign matters before being laid. For joining, the outside of pipe (thread for GI pipe line) and the inside of the socket shall be cleaned. Care should be taken that all pipes and fittings are properly joined so as to make the joints completely watertight. After lying, the open ends of the pipe shall be temporarily plugged to prevent access of water, soil or any other foreign materials. Jointing of pipes shall be made according to the different kind of pipes by thread screwing, cold welding, flanges, or flexible joints etc. Joints between dissimilar materials, e.g. copper shall be by means of copper-alloy unions or union ferrules, etc. Care shall be taken to ensure that all piping and fittings are clean internally and free from particles of sand, soil, metal, plastic, filings and chips, etc.
7.2.4. Clamping All pipes laid shall have its open ends securely closed with appropriate plugs during progress of work. Pipes and pipe fittings shall be fixed by using proper approved holder bat clams and special hangers. The pipes shall be fixed perfectly vertical or in a line as directed or as shown in the drawings. The pipes laid vertically shall have supporting, the clamps at 1.5 metres centre to centre and the pipes laid horizontally, the clamps at every 1.2 metres centre to centre as shown in the Drawing or as directed by the site in charge. MS bat clamps holders shall be used to fix all vertical pipes in truly vertical position. Horizontal pipes running below the ceiling shall be fixed on structural with adjustable clamps. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope as mentioned in the drawings and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on them. As per the site condition, if required or directed by the site in charge, pre-fabricated semi-circular made out of Plain GI Sheet of proper thickness shall be provided below the horizontal running pips along with above-mentioned adjustable clamps. No Iron hooks shall anchor pipes in wall chases.
7.2.5. Testing Water Service Lines The water service lines shall be hydrostatically tested. Test pressure shall be 10 kg / sq. cm. and the pipes shall be tested for the specified pressure for 24 hours. Defective pipes, pipe fittings and pipe joints shall be replaced or repaired immediately and retested.
7.2.6. Backfilling Backfilling of trenches shall not commence until the pipes therein have been tested and approved by the site in charge. Under non-paved areas selected excavated materials free from large stones refuse, or organic material as approved by the Engineer shall do the backfill.
7.2.7. Pipe Supports and Hangers All the internal horizontal and vertical run pipes should be supported to walls with the help of PVC pipe clamps that should be anchored by galvanized screws and plastic dowels. In case of pipes laid horizontally under ceiling, pipe shall be supported on M.S. brackets/ hangers of approved design. . GI pipe for water supply: spacing of support 2.0 m . CPVC/ PVC/ PR pipe for water supply: spacing of support 1.25 m MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 17
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
. uPVC pipe for waste water: spacing of support 1.5 m
7.3. PAINTING All GI Pipe Line above ground shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive paints of approved quality and then two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and colour. All pipes in chases shall be painted with two coats of anti-corrosive paint of approved quality and then two coats of bitumen paint. All pipes below ground shall be covered with a tape of bitumen felt 15-kg/sq. m over a layer of cold applied bitumen and then a final layer of bitumen shall also be applied.
7.4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7.4.1. Measurement GI, uPVC, CPVC, Lead Free PVC and PP-R Pipe Line above ground or underground shall be measured per running meter and the rate shall be inclusive of all fittings including unions, Hangers, Brackets, Clamps, Pipe Sleeves, cutting chases, etc on wall, ceiling, floor and making good the same and testing of pipes and fittings, making good. GI pipes below ground shall be measured per running meter and the rate shall be inclusive of all fittings including unions, except the excavation for trenches refilling and disposal of surplus earth and testing of pipes and fittings, making good. Other Fixtures such as Gunmetal valves, non-return valves, ball cocks, foot valves, stop cocks, bib cocks, etc., shall be measured by number.
7.4.2. Payment The payment as per unit rate stated in the Bill of Quantity include the payment for material, joining, clamping, hanging, testing and painting. However it excludes excavation and backfilling.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 18
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
8. PIPE INSULATION 8.1. MATERIAL All hot water supply and hot water return pipe lines shall be insulated (if required) with extruded synthetic rubber polymer compound, pre-formed tubular sectioned pipe insulation. The pipe insulation shall be fixed using proper adhesive and self- adhesive tapes as per the manufacturer’s specifications. Specialist skilled workmen trained in the trade shall apply all insulation strictly as per manufacturer recommendations. Before applying insulation, all pipe work and fittings shall be brushed clean, all dust, dirt and oil removed. Each length of piping to be insulated shall be tested for its performance requirements. Only such pipe lengths, which are free from defect, shall be insulated. After testing the pipe lengths shall be dried out. All insulation on ducts and piping shall be continuous and full thickness and as specified where passing through walls, floors, partitions and pipe sleeves.
8.2. PROTECTION OF INSULATION Where insulation is liable to be damaged, it shall be adequately protected as desired by the Engineer. The protection shall consist of a 20 mm thick cement plaster (1 cement: 6 coarse washed sand) applied continuously over the GI wire mesh on the pipe. The plaster shall be finished smooth to receive painting and other finishes.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 19
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
9. BATHROOM FIXTURES AND FITTINGS 9.1. MATERIAL All bathroom fixtures, Ceramic and CP fittings shall be supplied as per schedule 1 and install in position including transportation to site of work. No allowances shall be made for theft, breakage and defective materials after taking delivery of the materials.
9.2. INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES The fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete the item in satisfactory working conditions, whether specifically mentioned or not in the Schedule of Quantities, Specifications and Drawings. The Bathroom fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer, and shall fully meet with the aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the Engineer. All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching the tiles or interior finish as per Engineer requirements. Wherever necessary, the fittings shall be cantered to dimensions and pattern as called for. Skilled workman shall install fixtures with appropriate tools according to the best trade practice. Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed for the installation of fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height, mounting as called for on the drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment.
9.3. MOCK UP AND TRAIL ASSEMBLY The installation of the bathroom fixtures and fittings shall be as per the shop drawings approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall assemble on trial basis at least one set of each type of bathroom fixture and fittings in order to determine precisely the required supply and disposal connection. Relevant instructions from manufacturers shall be followed as applicable. This trial assembly shall be developed to facilitate determining the location of punctures, holes, holding devices etc. that will be required for final installation in position of all bathroom fixtures and fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to final approval by the Engineer. The fixtures in the trial assembly can be reused for final installation without any additional payments for fixing or dismantling of the fixtures.
9.4. SUPPORTING AND FIXING DEVICES The contractor at his own cost shall where required, provide all fixtures and fittings securely in position. The fixing devices shall be rigidly anchored into the building structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and shall be so fixed that they do not present an unsightly look in the final assembly. These shall be installed complete with appropriate washers and gaskets, jointing Materials and Screws etc. as per manufacture manuals.
9.5. FINAL INSTALLATION The contractor at his own cost shall install all bathroom fixtures and fittings in their final position in accordance with approved trail assemblies and as shown on drawings. The installation shall be complete with all supply and waste connections. The connection between built-in piping system and the bathroom fixtures shall be through proper couplings, unions and flanges to facilitate removal / replacement of bathroom fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. All couplings, unions and flanges shall match in appearance with other exposed fittings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and true to alignment. The outlets of water closet bowls and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other causes. Overflows shall be arranged as to give visible warning and discharge. A check shall be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices have been provided for supporting Water Closets, Wash Basins, Sinks and other appliances.
9.6. PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGE AND THEFT The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all bathroom fixtures and fittings issued to them against damage, misuse, crazing, staining, breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement till the completion and handing over of the installation. At the time of handing over, the contractor shall clean, disinfect and polish all fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked, chipped, stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be installed at his own cost to complete the work.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 20
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
9.7. TESTING All fixtures and fittings shall be tested for their proper performance by the Contractor thoroughly to satisfy the Engineer that they are in order, before applying for virtual completion.
9.8. MISCELLANEOUS WORK 9.8.1. Identification Colour Code All piping systems shall be suitably painted or otherwise colour identification of pipes as per IS: 2065 (code of practice for water supply in buildings). The identification colours and letter symbols for various services shall be as follows: . Black or brown (S): Soil, Waste and Vent Piping and all drains (except for PVC and HDPE pipe) . Green (CWS): Water supply line . Red (HWS): Hot water supply . Orange (HWR): Hot water return . Golden yellow (Gas): Gas line . Blue (FH): Fire-hydrant line The letter symbols shall either be legibly painted or affixed in an appropriate manner to be read conveniently. Locations where painting cannot be done, fastening self- adhesive PVC tapes of appropriate colour in an approved manner shall identify the piping system. The tapes varying in 15 mm to 50 mm wide strips depending on the size of pipe on which the tapes are fastened shall be applied at regular intervals on continuous runs and at all bends junctions and tees.
9.8.2. Painting The Contractor shall supply all materials, labour tools and other equipment necessary for carrying out painting work. Painting as described herein shall be applied to all surfaces requiring painting. Paint materials used in the work shall be of approved make of ready mixed variety supplied to site in manufactures original containers. Thinning where necessary shall only be done as per manufactures instructions. All surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned free of all dirt and dust before painting is started. Painting shall only be started after the receiving surfaces are in a condition fit to receive painting as certified by the Engineer. Properly qualified, skilled and experienced painters shall be employed to painting work.
9.8.3. Preparation of Surfaces All steel and iron surfaces to be painted shall be washed with mineral spirits to remove all dirt and grease. Where rust or scale is present, the surfaces shall be wire brushed to remove such rust. The cleaned surfaces shall be given one coat of approved phosphate before priming coat is applied. All galvanized metal to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with naphthalene and treated with a solution of 20 litres of 36% acetic acid, 1.35 kg of blue vitriol and 1.35 kg. Of powered alum dissolved in 225 litres of water.
9.8.4. Painting Finishes The Painting Finishes shall consist of the operations briefly mentioned below: . All cast iron soil, waste vent pipes, manhole covers, gratings and frames shall be painted with three coats of bituminous base paint. . All cast iron mains pipes shall be painted with one coat Zinc Chromate primer followed by three coats of synthetic enamel paint. . All non-galvanized steel surfaces shall be painted with one coat of Zinc Chromate primer followed by three coast of synthetic enamel paint. . All galvanized surfaces shall be coated with galvanized metal primer after washing with galvanized metal cleaner. The surface shall then be painted with three coats of synthetic enamel paint. . Pipe surface of the HDPE, uPVC, CPVC, Lead Free PVC, PP-R Pipes and Pipe Fittings shall not be painted with Synthetic Paints unless otherwise instructed. . All painted finished surfaces shall be smooth throughout and retain a consistent uniform shade all through. Where in the opinion of the Engineer, the painting is not consistent in application or appearance; the contractor at his own cost shall redo the painting to his satisfaction.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 21
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
9.8.5. Disinfecting the Piping System The water pipes shall first be filled with water and thoroughly flushed out. The storage tanks shall then be filled with water again and disinfecting chemical containing chlorine added gradually while tanks are being filled to ensure through mixing. Sufficient chemical shall be used to give the water a dose of 50 parts of chlorine to one million parts of water. If ordinary bleaching powder is used, the proportions will be 150 gm of powder to 1000 litres of water. The powder shall be mixed with water in the storage tank. If a proprietary brand of chemical is used the proportions shall be as specified by the makers. When the storage tank is full, the supply shall be stopped and all the taps on the distributing pipes opened successively working progressively away from storage tank. Each tap shall be closed when the water discharge begins to smell of chlorine. The storage tank shall then be filled up with water from supply pipe and added with more disinfecting chemical in the recommended proportions. The storage tank and pipe shall then remain charged at least for three hours. Finally the tank and pipes shall be thoroughly flushed out before any water is used for domestic purposes.
9.8.6. Connections to Mechanical Equipment Supplied All inlets, outlets, valves piping and other incidental work connected with installation of all mechanical equipment supplied by other agencies shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings, requirements for proper performance of equipment manufactures instruction and the directions of the Engineer. The equipment’s to be supplied by the other agencies consist mainly of water treatment plant, hydro-pneumatic system and boiler for hot water, pumps, kitchen equipment and laundry equipment. The connections to the various equipment shall be connected through proper unions/ flanges and isolating valves. The work of connections shall be executed in accordance with the requirement of equipment suppliers, under the directions of the Engineer. The various aspects of connection work shall be executed in a manner similar to the work of respective trades mentioned elsewhere in the specification.
9.9. SAFETY CODE . First aid appliance shall be maintained in a readily accessible place including adequate supply of sterilized dressings and cotton wool. . An injured person shall be taken on a public hospital without loss of time, in cases where the injury necessitates hospitalization. . Suitable and strong scaffolds should be provided for all works that cannot safely be done from ground. . No portable single ladder shall be over 8 meters in length. The width between the side rails shall not be less than 30 cm (clear) and the distance between two adjacent runs shall not be more than 30 cm. When a ladder is used an extra labourer shall be engaged for holding the ladder. . The excavated materials shall not be placed within 1.5 meters of the edge of the trench or half of the depth of trenches whichever is more. All trenches and excavations shall be provided with necessary fencing and lighting. . Every opening in the floor of a building or in working platform be provided with suitable means to prevent the fall of persons or materials by providing suitable fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be one metre. . No floor, roof or other part of the structure shall be over loaded with debris or materials as to render it unsafe. . Workers employed on mixing and handling materials such asphalt, cement mortar or concrete and lime mortar shall be provided with protective foot wear and rubber hand gloves. . Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder's protective eye- shields and gloves. . No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used. . Suitable facemasks should be provided to the workers when the paint is applied in the form of spray or surface having lead paint dry rubbed and scraped. . The Contractor to the painter shall supply overalls and adequate facilities shall be provided to enable the working painters to wash during the periods of cessation of work. . Hoisting machines and tackle used in the works, including their attachments, anchorage and supports shall be in perfect condition. . The ropes use in hoisting or lowering material or as means of suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate strength and free from defects.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 22
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
SANITARY SCHEDULE - 1
Inlet Size Outlet S N Description Size Model N0. Make Remarks Cold Hot Size 1.00 Water Closet Set: 1.10 Type: 'WC1' consisting of: 1.11 White glazed vitreous china porcelain floor mounted close coupled `S' trap water closet basin - # CO209 + # C0769 + "INDUS" Parryware, India ½" - 100 mm with duel flushing (3/6 lts) cistern and double flap, solid section, white seat with cover, hinges, # E8308 etc 1.12 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for cistern - # G3453A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½" 1.13 CP flexible connection hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 1.14 CP bib cock long body with CP wall flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - - 1.15 CP Robe Hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, India - - -
1.20 Type: 'WC2' (Stainless-steel for differently-abled) consisting of: 1.21 Grade 316 (17% Cr, 12% Ni, 2mm thick) stainless-steel floor mounted close coupled `P' trap - # FME WC 202 + # FME Stainless Steel ½" - 100 mm water closet basin with duel flushing (3/6 lts) cistern, grey seat with cover, hinges, etc C0769 + # E8308 1.22 Concealed flushing cistern 80 mm thick including WC outlet bend with WC connector pipe, WC - # C821099 "LINEA-N" Parryware, India ½" - 40 mm fastening bracket, threaded bolts, integrated stop valve with r½" water supply connector pipe 1.23 CP twin actuator plate (with square push buttons - satin finish) for above concealed cistern - # C821499 "LINEA-N" Parryware, India - - - 1.24 CP health faucet with 7 mm dia x 1 m long flexible tube and wall bracket - # ALD-CHR-585 Jaquar, India ½" - - 1.25 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # CQT-23059 Jaquar, India ½" - ½" 1.26 CP toilet paper holder with flap - # ACN-1151N Jaquar, India - - - 1.27 CP twin robe hook - # ACN-1161N Jaquar, India - - - 1.28 Bathroom accessories for WC 1.281 Drop down support arm type: 'SA-1' having a pair of ABS / stainless steel foldable hinged arms 600 mm long # C8153 Parryware, India - - - (drop down support arm) 1.282 Hand rail / grab bar type: 'HR-1' having a pair of ABS / stainless steel hand rail of Ø32 mm 600 mm long # C8154 Parryware, India - - -
1.30 Type: 'WC3' (Porcelain for differently-abled) consisting of: 1.31 White glazed vitreous china porcelain wall hung `P' trap water closet basin and also double flap, - # CO209 + # E8308 "INDUS" Parryware, India - - 100 mm solid section, white seat with cover, hinges, etc 1.32 Concealed flushing cistern 80 mm thick including WC outlet bend with WC connector pipe, WC - # C821099 "LINEA-N" Parryware, India ½" - 40 mm fastening bracket, threaded bolts, integrated stop valve with r½" water supply connector pipe 1.33 CP twin actuator plate (with square push buttons - satin finish) for above concealed cistern - # C821499 "LINEA-N" Parryware, India - - - 1.34 CP health faucet with 7 mm dia x 1 m long flexible tube and wall bracket - # ALD-CHR-585 Jaquar, India ½" - -
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 23
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
1.35 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # CQT-23059 Jaquar, India ½" - ½" 1.36 CP toilet paper holder with flap - # ACN-1151N Jaquar, India - - - 1.37 CP twin robe hook - # ACN-1161N Jaquar, India - - - 1.38 Bathroom accessories for WC 1.381 Drop down support arm type: 'SA-1' having a pair of ABS / stainless steel foldable hinged arms 600 mm long # C8153 Parryware, India - - - (drop down support arm) 1.382 Hand rail / grab bar type: 'HR-1' having a pair of ABS / stainless steel hand rail of Ø32 mm 600 mm long # C8154 Parryware, India - - -
2.00 Squatting (Asian) Pan Set: 2.10 Type: 'SP1' consisting of: 2.11 White glazed vitreous china porcelain floor mounted squatting (Asian) pan with PVC 'P' trap 500 x 400 x 210 mm # C0123 + 'P' Trap (110 Parryware, India 1¼" - 100 mm mm) 2.12 White glazed plastic duel flushing cistern with necessary fittings, installation kit, flush bend pipe, 3/6 lts # E8177 "SUPERIO" Parryware, India ½" - 1¼" etc. 2.13 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # G3453A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½" 2.14 CP flexible connection hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 2.15 CP bib cock long body with CP wall flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - -
2.20 Type: 'SP2' (stainless-steel for differently-abled) consisting of: 2.21 Grade 316 (17% Cr, 12% Ni, 2mm thick) stainless-steel floor mounted squatting (Asian) pan with 500 x 400 x 210 mm # FME SP 251 + 'P' Parryware, India 1¼" - 100 mm PVC 'P' trap Trap (110 mm) 2.22 White glazed plastic duel flushing cistern with necessary fittings, installation kit, flush bend pipe, 3/6 lts # E8177 "SUPERIO" Parryware, India ½" - 1¼" etc. 2.23 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # G3453A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½" 2.24 CP flexible connection hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 2.25 CP bib cock long body with CP wall flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - -
3.00 Wash Basin Set: 3.10 Type: 'WB1' consisting of: 3.11 White glazed vitreous china porcelain wall hung lavatory basin (counter not included) lavatory 450 x 330 X 145 mm "FLAIR" # C0461 Parryware, India ½" - 1¼" basin including fixing bolts 3.12 CP bottle trap, 32 mm size with wall connection pipe, wall flange, washer, etc. 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼" 3.13 CP half thread waste coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9910A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼" 3.14 CP pillar cock for wash basin - # G3402A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - - 3.15 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # G3453A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½"
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 24
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
3.16 CP flexible connection hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 3.17 CP robe hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, India - - - 3.18 CP soap dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, India - - -
3.20 Type: 'WB2' (for differently-abled) consisting of: 3.21 White glazed vitreous china porcelain wall hung lavatory basin including fixing bolts 520 x 465 "PAL" # C8441 Parryware, India - - 40 mm 3.22 CP bottle trap with internal partition, 32 mm size with 250 mm, 190 mm long wall connection 250 x 190 # ALD-769 Jaquar, India 40 mm - 40 mm pipe, wall flange and washer 3.23 CP half thread waste coupling 32 mm size, - # ALD-709L130 Jaquar, India 40 mm - 40 mm 3.24 CP pillar cock for wash basin - # CQT-23021 Jaquar, India ½" - - 3.25 CP regulating valves CP regulating valve long thread with CP wall flange for water feeder pipe - # CQT-23059 Jaquar, India ½" - ½" line 3.26 Flexible braided connector tube with nut and washer 450 mm long # ALD-805B Jaquar, India ½" - ½" 3.27 CP hand towel rail for wash basin 300 mm long # ACN-1101N Jaquar, India - - - 3.28 CP soap dish - # ACN-1131N Jaquar, India - - - 3.29 A pair of ABS / stainless steel foldable hinged arms (drop-down support arm) 600 mm long # C8153 Parryware, India - - -
3.30 Type: 'WB3' consisting of: 3.31 White Glazed Vitreous China Porcelain Corner Basin including fixing Bolts 450 x 330 X 145 mm "Corner Basin" # Co408 Parryware, India ½" - 1¼" 3.32 CP Bottle Trap, 32 mm size with Wall Connection Pipe, Wall Flange & Washer, etc. 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼" 3.33 CP Half Thread Waste Coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9910A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼" 3.34 CP Pillar Cock for Wash Basin - # G3402A1 "AMBER” Parryware, India ½" - - 3.35 CP Regulating (Angle) Valve Long Thread with CP Wall Flange for Health Faucet - # G3453A1 "AMBER” Parryware, India ½" - ½" 3.36 CP Flexible Connection Hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 3.37 CP Robe Hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, India - - - 3.38 CP Soap Dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, India - - -
4.00 Sink Basin(SB) Set: 4.10 Type: 'SB1' consisting of: 4.11 Rectangular masonry hand wash trough (HWT) (as per Drawing) having 1¼" dia outlet for waste Local Fabricated (Civil Work) as per Drawing coupling 4.12 CP bib cock long body with CP wall flange x 2 sets - # G3406A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - - 4.13 CP bottle trap, 32 mm size with wall connection pipe, wall flange, washer, etc. 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼" 4.14 CP full thread waste coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9911A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼"
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 25
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
4.15 CP towel hook x 2 - # T6006A1 Parryware, India - - - 4.16 CP soap dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, India - - -
5.00 Urinal Set:
5.10 Type: 'UR1' consisting of: 5.11 White glazed vitreous china porcelain wall mounted flat back urinal basin having top inlet, CP 305 x 305 x 440 mm Flat Back Parryware, India ½" - 1¼" anchorage bolts/ brackets, etc. # C0501 5.12 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # G3453A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½" 5.13 CP flexible connection hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 5.14 CP bottle trap, 32 mm size with wall connection pipe, wall flange & washer, etc. 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼"
5.20 Type: 'UR2' (stainless steel) consisting of: 5.21 Grade 316 (17% Cr, 12% Ni, 2mm thick) stainless-steel wall mounted flat back urinal basin 305 x 305 x 440 mm Flat Back Parryware, India ½" - 1¼" having top inlet, CP anchorage bolts/ brackets, etc. # FME 5.22 CP regulating (angle) valve long thread with CP wall flange for health faucet - # G3453A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½" 5.23 CP flexible connection hose 450 mm long # T991299 Parryware, India ½" - ½" 5.24 CP bottle trap, 32 mm size with wall connection pipe, wall flange & washer, etc. 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼"
6.00 Shower Unit Set: 6.10 Type: 'SH1' consisting of: 6.11 CP concealed valve for head shower etc - # G3411A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - ½" 6.12 CP head shower with CP short arm and CP wall flange dia 105 mm # T9901A1 + Parryware, India ½" - - G0132A1 6.13 CP bib cock long body with CP wall flange x 2 sets - # G3406A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - - 6.14 CP robe hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, India - - - 6.15 CP soap dish - # T6003A1 Parryware, India - - -
7.00 Stainless Steel Sink Set: 7.10 Type 'S1' (for Kitchen / Pantry) consisting of: 7.11 Stainless steel sink bowl only (450 x 400 x 200 mm deep) with folded edge and gloss finish 450 x 400 x 200 mm # C852099 Parryware, India - - 1¼" deep 7.12 CP full thread waste coupling 32 mm size 32 mm # T9911A1 Parryware, India - - 1¼" 7.13 CP bottle trap, 32 mm size with wall connection pipe, wall flange, washer, etc. 250 x 190 mm # T3201A1 Parryware, India 1¼" - 1¼" 7.14 CP sink cock with swivel spout and CP wall flange - # G3406A1 "AMBER" Parryware, India ½" - - 7.15 CP towel hook - # T6006A1 Parryware, India - - -
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 26
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part III, Sanitary Works
8.00 Floor Trap Set: 8.10 Type: 'FT1' consisting of: 8.11 uPVC multi floor trap 110 x 75 mm - Panchakanya 110 - 75 8.12 Stainless steel anti-cockroach floor grating with frame 5" size - Neelkantha, India 5" - -
9.00 Water Transfer Pumping Set: 9.10 Type: 'WP-1' consisting of: 9.11 Electrical multi-stage centrifugal pump of 0.75 kW (1.0 HP) having capacity to discharge 35 IPM 0.75 kW (1 HP), 220 - Sharp, India NB 1" NB 1" of clear water at 15 m head (including suction + delivery + friction loss of the pipe) with NB 25 V, Discharge 35 lpm mm (1") suction, delivery pipe sizes, etc at 15 m head
9.00 Sump Pump Set for Basement: 9.10 Type: 'SP1' consisting of: 9.11 Electrical stainless steel submersible vortex sump pump of 0.6 kW with float switch to transfer 0.6 kW, 220 V, Head Model # TC 40/10 Wilo Mather and Platt India (Subsidiary - - 1½" dirty water from the sump of the basement to sewer manhole having a capacity to discharge 35 5 m & Discharge 35 of Wilo, Germany) litres per minute of sump water with soft solid up to 30 mm dia at 5 m head (delivery + friction lpm loss in the pipe) with NB 1½" delivery pipe (flexible), etc
10.00 Over Head Water Storage Tank: 10.10 Type: 'WT1' consisting of: 10.11 Moulded high density polyethylene water storage tank having lockable cover and necessary 1'000 lts - Hilltake / Nepatop, Nepal - - - connection for inlets, outlets, drain pipe line, etc (1,000 litre capacity)
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 27
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
ANNEX A: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, PART IV, ELECTRICAL WORKS
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page i
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
Table of Contents
1. General Specifications ...... 3 1.1. Scope ...... 3 1.2. Requirements ...... 3 1.3. Measurement and Payment ...... 4 2. Technical Specifications ...... 5 2.1. Codes and Standards ...... 5 2.2. Pvc Insulated Electric Cables ...... 5 2.3. Main Distribution Board ...... 6 2.4. Bus Bar ...... 6 2.5. Circuit Breakers ...... 7 2.6. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) ...... 7 2.7. Distribution Board ...... 8 2.8. Wiring and Accessories ...... 8 2.9. Junction and Pull Boxes ...... 9 2.10. Installation ...... 9 2.11. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps ...... 10 2.12. Earthing ...... 10 2.13. Steel Tubular Poles ...... 10 2.14. Measurement and Payment ...... 11 2.15. Completion Tests and Guarantee ...... 11
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page ii
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1. SCOPE These specifications covers the general technical requirements for the complete supply and installation of the electrical system for the project including all necessary supervision, labour, tools, equipment and accessories, miscellaneous materials, testing, and putting in acceptable operation of the electrical system. The electrical system shall be implied as the works related to lights, power sockets, fans, telephone sockets, air-conditioning system, supply intake system, power cables etc.
1.1.1. Abbreviation Used LT - Low Tension HT - High Tension MDB - Main Distribution Board DB - Distribution Board kV - Kilo Volt kVA - Kilo Volt Amp kA - Kilo Amp PVC - Poly Vinyl Chloride SWG - Standard Wire Gauge (British) IS - Indian Standard TPN - Three Phase Neutral DP - Double Pole MCB - Miniature Circuit Breaker MCCB - Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
1.2. REQUIREMENTS 1.2.1. General The Contractor shall supply and install all the electrical system works as per BOQ complete with all accessories including materials, fixtures, electrical equipment and appliances etc. All equipment shall be complete and operative in all details and shall be left in a satisfactory working condition. The miscellaneous materials include, but are not limited to, all conduit wires, sub distribution boards, junction boxes, fittings, supports, main distribution panel, cables, metal clad switch fuse unit, fans, call- bells, and other accessories required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the lighting system. The Contractor shall perform the following work in addition to furnishing and delivering of the equipment, materials and accessories: . Erection and complete installation . Testing of all equipment . Commissioning of all equipment prior to trial operation . Trial operation and all necessary adjustments prior to initial operation. . Obtaining the Engineer's approval and written acceptance for satisfactory operation.
1.2.2. Workmanship All work shall be done in a first-class, neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in the trade involved. They shall rectify then and there the defects pointed out by the Engineer during the progress of work. The work shall be carried out in the best workmanship and any defect or minor changes in design/construction if pointed out shall be carried out by the contractor without any extra charges.
1.2.3. Materials All materials shall be new, of the best of their several kinds, and without imperfections and blemishes. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be of same manufacturer. Materials which are defective or damaged during the progress of work shall be replaced or repaired in approved manner at the expense of the contractor.
1.2.4. Quantities All quantities mentioned in the bill of quantities are close to actual quantities and the contractor will get paid according to measurement of actual work. The schedule of quantities is liable to alteration by deletion or addition as required.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 3
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
1.2.5. Drawings The Drawings provided are design Drawings and generally are diagrammatic. They do not show offsets, bends, pull box, which may be required for the installation. The Contractor shall follow the Drawings as closely as possible and shall provide necessary bends, pull box etc. A set of the up-dated and approved Drawings shall be available at the site at all times for inspection by the Engineer.
1.2.6. Shop drawing The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval detailed Shop Drawings of all installations not detailed on the Drawings provided. Some modification in design, drawing can be done during the construction time in order to overcome practical difficulties, provided the modification is approved by the Engineer. Prior to commencing the electrical works, the Contractor shall provide a set of drawings to the scale 1:50 showing detailed conduit layout and wiring drawings showing all details such as the route and size of the duct, number and size of cables in the conduit, location of outlet boxes, openings or duct outlets in civil works if required etc. This Drawing shall be prepared in complete coordination with and understanding of the civil and architectural works which will actually be undertaken. The Drawing shall be immediately architect modified and approved if any changes in design are undertaken and a record of such amendments shall be kept. The work shall be carried in accordance with the drawing enclosed with the tender and also in accordance with modification there to from time to time approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall prepare the detail Shop Drawings of the following items and get approval from the Engineer before manufacturing, fabricating or installing of the items. . Detail of main distribution boards and sub-distribution boards. . The run of various main and sub-main cables
1.2.7. Site Condition The equipment and materials to be installed should be suitable for the site conditions. It is estimated that the maximum temperature at site will be 48OC.
1.2.8. Cutting and Patching Cutting and patching required for the proper installation and completion of works including plastering, masonry work, concrete work and painting shall be done by the contractor himself and skilled labour shall be provided for the same.
1.2.9. Sample Prior to commencing procurement, the Contractor shall submit for approval technical description, related catalogue or brochures and a sample item each of all cable, conduit, accessories, switches, power outlets, lamps, fluorescent tubes, fixtures etc. which are to be procured and installed.
1.2.10. Coordination with Civil and other Contractors Whatever recessed electrical fittings are required to be installed, the electrical contractor shall be responsible or informing the civil contractor to keep necessary recesses in the slab and in the false ceiling.
1.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The rate quoted in the tender shall include all charges of materials, installation, testing, commissioning, labour, tools and equipment, auxiliary materials required to complete the particular item of work, shed for material store, transferring all material from place of availability to the site, all taxes, contingencies, breakage, wastage and maintenance of installation for one year. The rate in the original contract shall determine the values of the extra work where such extra work is of a similar nature and has been executed under similar conditions. Wherever the extra work is not of a similar nature, the rate for the same shall be determined prior to the execution of work and established on the approval of the Clint after recommendation by the Engineer.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 4
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1. CODES AND STANDARDS Equipment supplied and the construction work shall conform to the relevant IS (IS:732 - Code of Practice of Electrical Wiring Installation System voltage not exceeding 650 V), BS, DIN and the latest National Code of Practice published by HMG/N, Ministry of Water Resources. Notwithstanding the stipulation of above Standards, local electrical codes for electrical services in buildings, where such exist Code (Nepal Standard) shall also be followed. Adequate consideration shall be given to compliance of the equipment and works with local environmental conditions such as temperature, altitude, humidity, duct, vermin, attitude of personnel who will occupy the premises etc.
2.1.1. Relevant Standards Following Specifications and Codes or their latest revision shall apply under all circumstances. . Low Voltage Moulded Case Circuit Breaker- IS 2516, 1977 . Transformer - IS 2026, 1962 . Earthing - IS 3043, 1966 . Wiring installation - IS 732, 1963 . PVC Cable - IS 1554, 1964 . Distribution boards - IS 2675, 1966
2.1.2. Standard Make The standard make of the light fixtures, switch, socket, circuit breaker etc shall be as indicated below or equivalent as approved by the Engineer. . MCCB: Legrand/ Siemens/ L&T MCB Legrand/ Siemens/ L&T . Wiring cable: Nepalese cable with NS Mark . Light switch unbreakable: Legrand Modular, Clipsal . Switch socket unbreakable: Legrand Modular, Clipsal . Telephone socket /LAN socket: Honeywell, Clipsal, Siemens or equivalent . Light fixtures: Philips . Incandescent light fixtures: Philips . Power Cable: Nepalese cable with NS Mark Samples of the items whose standard make are not indicated shall be submitted and get approved by the Engineer before installation
2.1.3. Colour Code Colour codlings, as per internationally accepted rule, shall be followed for phases (Red/Yellow/Blue), neutral (Black) and earth wire (Green) everywhere, even including inside the main panel board, distribution board, main switch.
2.1.4. Tools and Appliances The Contractor shall propose two complete, new and unused sets of all special tools and gauges which will be required for normal operation and maintenance. The Contractor shall furnish the list of tools and appliances and their prices under price schedule of the tender document. To the greatest extent possible, the tools for each specific operation shall be stored in a single, lockable, portable steel box suitably and clearly marked for convenient identification.
2.2. PVC INSULATED ELECTRIC CABLES 2.2.1. General The electric cable shall be of 650/1100 volt insulation grade armoured / unarmoured power cables. The cables shall be used for mains supply, walkway lighting, garden lighting or facade lighting etc. The cables shall be of 4, 3 1/2, 2 or 1 core copper conductors for LT application and 3 core aluminium conductor for HT application.
2.2.2. Cable laying The LT underground power cable and cable from transformer pole to MCP shall be laid through an earthen trench of 1 m depth. The bottom of the trench shall be laid with a layer of 4 inches dry sand and cable shall be laid through HDPE pipe over the
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 5
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works sand, then the cable shall be covered by dry sand again up to 4'' over the cable. Brick top cover shall be provided before the trench is back-filled with earthwork. The earthwork shall be well compact to give original finish of the ground surface. Wherever cable crosses road or drains, or enters the building HDPE sleeves pipes (6 kg pressure) of approved diameter shall be provided. The cables shall be so laid that they shall not interfere with underground structures. All water pipes, sewerage lines or other underground structures which come exposed by excavation shall be properly supported and protected from injury until the filling has been rammed perfectly in places and around them. Cables routes shall be indicated in the as built drawing and shall be submitted to the Engineer. If two or more cables are laid in the same trench, they shall have sufficient gap to avoid de-rating of the cable. All the cables following the same routes shall be laid in the same trench. Cables shall not be allowed to cross each other as far as possible.
2.2.3. Tests Cable shall be tested for insulation resistance before and after installation. The insulation resistance between each conductor and against earth shall be more than 20 M-ohm
2.3. MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD 2.3.1. General The LT main distribution board shall be suitable for alternating current 3-phase 4-wire 400/ 230V, 50 Hz supply. It shall be pad- mounted. All the incoming and outgoing feeders shall have appropriate sizes of MCCB and MCB mentioned as per BOQ. The board shall also consist of CT, voltmeter, ammeter, indicating lamp assembly, fuses with fuse blocks, copper terminal blocks etc. It shall also in-house the copper earth terminal with multi-way provisions.
2.3.2. Material and Painting The main panel board shall be fabricated of sheet steel of not less than 16 SWG thickness. The steel sheet should undergo aciditation and phosphatation process before two coats of red oxide primer are applied, then two final coats of enamel paint of approved colour shall be applied.
2.3.3. Type The main panel board shall be of cubical type, indoor type, totally enclosed dust and vermin proof suitable for pad mounting. The steel members shall be welded together to form a rigid self-supporting structure. The board shall be dead front type. All switches, circuit breakers, etc. shall be operable from the front. Ample room shall be provided for the wiring. It shall be designed to facilitate cable entry from bottom. Removable plates shall be furnished with compression type cable glands to make entry dust-tight and no weight is transferred on the terminal.
2.3.4. Clearance The minimum clearance of the power terminal lug from the bottom plate shall be maintained as 200 mm. The minimum gap between two MCCB shall be 40 mm. Arrangement shall be made at the bottom of the control panel for receiving incoming cable. Space for outgoing cables shall be properly designed as per requirement.
2.4. BUS BAR 2.4.1. Material and Size The bus bar shall be made from highly conductive electrolytically pure copper bar strips of sufficient cross sectional area so that maximum current density of 1.2 A/sq. mm shall not be exceeded. The neutral bus bar shall not be less than 50% of the phase bus cross section. The main bus bars shall be single length without joint up to the incomer MCCB. The bus bars shall be sufficiently supported by insulator so that insulation resistance shall not be less than 20 M-ohm.
2.4.2. Supports The bus bar shall be carried on either bus bar insulators or other insulating materials and the supports shall be sufficiently closed together to prevent bus bar sag and enabling the bus bar chamber to withstand the effects of "Short Circuit" current.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 6
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
The interconnection of cable to the bus bars, MCCB shall be done with heavy-duty crimping type chromium plated copper double compression type cable shoe of suitable size. The connections from the main bus bars to the incoming as well as outgoing MCCB shall be done by copper strips having sufficient cross-section. All the contact surfaces in copper bus bars and strips shall have coating of silver by electroplating. All the outgoing MCCB shall be marked by the tag covered by transparent PVC pocket permanently fixed on the inner cover. The bus bars shall be covered by heat shrinkable PVC sleeve and the bus bar chamber shall be covered by a protecting transparent acrylic sheet.
2.5. CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.5.1. General The moulded case circuit breaker shall be Triple Pole and of panel mounting type. It shall have all the live parts enclosed in a moulded case and all contacts shall be silver-plated. The breaker shall be trip free and with quick-make/break operating mechanism. It shall be provided with magnetic short circuit protection and thermal overload device. It shall have a common trip, causing an overload on one pole to trip all other poles.
2.5.2. Operation The circuit breaker shall be of inverse time and instantaneous trip type, with static trip release. A push trip shall be provided on the cover to test the MCCB mechanically. The 'on', 'off' and 'trip' positions shall be clearly marked on the enclosure.
2.5.3. Rating The MCCBs shall have a breaking capacity as indicated in the BOQ at 400 volts for incoming and outgoing circuits. The circuit breaker shall be operated by a toggle type handle and shall have a quick make, quick break trip free mechanism.
2.6. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) 2.6.1. General The miniature circuit breaker shall be magnetic short circuit and thermal overload trip low voltage automatic circuit breaker. Miniature circuit breaker shall have short circuit breaking capacity of 9kA or higher. The body of circuit breaker shall be made of fiberglass reinforced nylon pouring. The mechanism of the MCB shall be trip free also it shall ensure opening of contacts under fault condition even if the operating knob is held in `ON' position. In case of multiple units of MCB's, tripping of one pole should automatically open the other poles.
2.6.2. Accessories The separate chamber of the main panel board shall consist of the accessories: . Voltmeter (0-500 Volt) . Ammeter with selector switch . Indicating lamps . Fuse blocks The CT shall be in-housed in the bus bar chamber. The CT shall be plain ring type with round windows. It shall be wound with the best non-ageing material. The windings of ring transformer shall be evenly distributed around the core. The cores of current transformers shall be either silicon steel stamping, grain oriented steels or high permeability alloys. The ratings and features for CT are: . rated voltage: 400 V . maximum system voltage : 660 V . rated frequency: 50 Hz . rated secondary output: 5 A . rated output: 10 VA . accuracy class: BM refer to BS 81 . rated short time current (thermal,1 sec): 40 x In A . rated continuous thermal current: 1.2 x In A . polarity: subtractive . applicable standard: BS 81 and BS 2046, IEC, or
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 7
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
2.6.3. Tests Routine tests of main panel board shall be conducted in accordance with IS specifications. Type test certificates and results, as per relevant IS specification for the main panel board shall be furnished. The panel board shall be completely assembled, wired adjusted and tested for operation under simulated conditions to ensure correctness of wiring and proper functioning of all equipment. All component parts such as MCCB, MCB, meters, etc. shall be tested in accordance with relevant IS specifications. Type test result of identical equipment shall be acceptable.
2.6.4. Installation . A trench of appropriate dimension shall be made to lead the cable from the bottom of panel board. Sufficient space shall be provided to avoid sharp bending and for easy connection. . The main panel board shall be ground mounted with all necessary accessories. . All the outgoing feeders shall be brought out from the top of the board and all remaining holes must be plugged. . Interior wiring should be neat and handy. . The location of the main panel board shall be in the ground floor unless otherwise instructed.
2.6.5. Drawing and Documents The drawings in general are diagrammatic only and whilst every effort is made to show the full extent of the work, proper allowance must be made when measuring from these drawings to allow for rises and falls in the runs. The Contractor will be held responsible for the accuracy of all measurements and for the quantities of materials required in connection with the work. Any discrepancies must be referred to the Bid, and claims later for extra payment on account of misinterpretation of the specification or drawings will not be allowed. The following drawing with details shall be furnished, among others, for shop drawings: . space required in the front and back . power cable entry/exit points . bus bar clearance between phase to phase and phase to neutral . configuration of bus bars . location of MCCB and MCB's . compartments for metering/indicating accessories
2.7. DISTRIBUTION BOARD 2.7.1. General The low-tension distribution board shall be suitable for alternating current 3-phase 4-wire 400/230 V, 50 Hz and 1-phase 230 V supply. For the line isolation and circuit protection MCB shall be employed. All the distribution boards shall be flush mounted.
2.7.2. Construction Distribution board shall be made with 16 SWG mild steel-sheet cubical, concealed mounting with double cover having openable hinges and locking arrangement. The mild steel sheet shall be painted with two coats of red oxide primer, and the two final coats of enamel of approved colour. The bus bar used shall be made from highly conductive electrolytically pure copper bar strips of sufficient cross sectional area so that maximum current density of 1.2 A/sq. mm shall not be exceeded. Neutral bus bar shall not be less than 50% of the phase bus cross section. The interconnection of cable inside SDB shall be done with crimping type cable shoe of appropriate size. The incomer MCCB shall have breaking capacity as indicated in the BOQ at 400 V and the outgoing MCBs shall have breaking capacity of 9 kA or higher at 230 volts. All the outgoing MCB shall be properly marked on the inner cover.
2.8. WIRING AND ACCESSORIES 2.8.1. General The scope of this specification is the design and constructional aspects of electrical wiring including the accessories. Wiring for lights, convenience outlets, fans, call bells, telephones, etc. shall be carried out by distribution and looping tem as shown in the electrical drawings. Accessories shall be of best quality. No alteration which shall affect the structural building shall be done unless sanction of the site-engineer in charge. All chassis, holes etc. required in connection with the electrical works shall be provided when the building is in progress.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 8
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
2.8.2. Wires All the wiring conductor shall be of soft drawn annealed copper with PVC insulation rated for 600 V. The sizes of the wires shall as per following: . 3/22 PVC insulated copper wire for light circuit . 7/22 sq.mm insulated copper wire for power socket wiring . 3/22 PVC insulated copper wire for earth wire along with the above wiring. . All wiring conductors shall be single length without joint except in the junction box. No cable joint shall be allowed in the pull box. . PVC insulated wire of different colours shall be used so that phases and neutral wires can be distinguished.
2.8.3. Wiring and Conduiting Circuit conductors shall extend to the outlets shown. Circuiting basically shall be as shown in the electrical drawings provided. An arrow indicating to sub-distribution board is a complete circuit i.e. consisting of one phase conductor, one neutral conductor and one earthing conductor with colour codes (if necessary), in a suitable conduit with wire sizes defined by the type of circuits. Request for deviations in methods of circuiting and conduit branch circuit distribution shall be submitted in shop drawings for approval to the engineer. The capacity of circuits shall be such that a light circuit shall not have the load more than 1000 W and a power circuit shall not have more than three points i.e. 3000 W unless otherwise specified. All wiring and conducting of cable shall be concealed inside ceiling slab and wall. All the wiring conductors shall be of soft drawn annealed copper with PVC insulation rated for 600 V. The cable shall be drawn in HDPE conduits of size mentioned in the bill of quantity. The minimum wall thickness of HDPE conduit shall be 2 mm. Maximum 4 nos of 3/22 PVC insulated copper wire along with an earth wire shall be allowed through a 16 mm internal dia PVC conduit and maximum of 2 nos 7/22 PVC insulated copper wire along with an earth wire shall be allowed through a 16-mm internal dia PVC conduit. All the PVC conduits shall be single lengths without joint except in the junction box and pull-box. Single conduit length above 15m shall be provided with a conveniently located pull-box. Pull-box also shall be provided at the sharp bending of conduit. The outlet box for light point shall be made of rigid HDPE and the 16mm internal dia conduit shall be tightly fixed to this box. All the wiring conductors shall be single length without joint except in the junction box. No cable joint shall be allowed in the pull box.
2.9. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 2.9.1. Outlet Box The outlet box for light point shall be made of rigid PVC and the 16 mm internal dia conduit shall be tightly fixed to this box.
2.9.2. Junction box Junction box for branch circuit shall not be less than 6"X4"X2" made of 18 SWG GI metal sheet. The box shall be installed 180 mm below the ceiling/ RCC beam and shall be covered by 6"X4" MS plate (18 SWG) with enamel of colour matching with the wall.
2.9.3. Metal Box The metal box for switch and socket shall be made of 18 SWG GI sheet.
2.10. INSTALLATION Switches shall be fixed at the wall 1.5 m above the finished floor and at the locations shown in the drawings. Power, telephone and call-bell sockets shall be fixed at the walls 20 cm above the finished floor and they shall be as shown in the drawings.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 9
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
2.11. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 2.11.1. General This specification shall cover the lighting fixtures and the lamps including all necessary accessories. The contractor shall furnish and install all the fixtures with lamps and accessories as per following specifications and drawings. The location of the fixture shall be as per electrical layout plan drawings and as per the instruction of the Engineer. The quality of the materials and installation shall be up to the satisfaction of the supervisor in charge. Fixture shall be provided on ceilings, walls carefully aligned and levelled. Adequacy of support system and alignment shall be approved. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of final completion of work; every item shall be in proper working order. Fixtures shall be protected from dirt, dust, paint, debris, etc. Manufacture's catalogue number and/or description in the "Fixture Schedule" shall establish quality, style, finish etc; similar fixture, which shall meet the exact specification, or quality features and alike appearance shall be submitted for prior approval.
2.11.2. Requirement Fitting shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation under tropical climate. All outdoor fittings shall be weatherproof and rainproof type. The fittings shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including cleaning, replacement of lamps/ starters etc. Connections between different components shall be made in such a way that they will not work loose by small vibration. For each type fluorescent type and mercury type of lightning fitting the contractor shall supply the utilization factor to indicate the proportion of the light emitted by the bare lamps which falls on the working plane. All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps suitable for operation on a supply voltage and the variation in supply voltage up to ±10%. Normal supply voltage shall be 3 phase, four wire 400/230 V, 50Hz neutral solidly grounded system. The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rise. The temperature rise above the ambient temperature shall be as indicated in the relevant standards. All mercury vapour lamp fittings shall be complete with accessories like lamps, ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors, starters wherever applicable etc. These shall be mounted as far as possible in the fitting assembly only. If these cannot be accommodated inside then a separate metal enclosed box shall be included to accommodate the accessories and in addition with a fuse and a terminal block suitable for loop-in, loop-out connections. Outdoor type fittings shall be provided with outdoor type weatherproof box.
2.12. EARTHING 2.12.1. Requirements GI rod grid earthing shall be carried out as per drawing with 2m long 50mm dia GI solid rod electrodes buried vertically with their tops 1m below the general ground level. 50mm X 4mm GI strip with welded joint shall be used for the interconnection of electrodes and 25mmX3mm GI strip shall be used to connect the grounding grid to the equipment. The earthing grid should be at least 2 meters away from the building foundation. The earth resistance in no case shall exceed 10 Ohms. Contractor shall be responsible to bring down the value of earth resistance in case measured value comes more than 10 Ohms. Plate earthing shall be made of 600mmX600mmX3mm copper plate buried vertically 1.5 m below the general ground level. 10 SWG bare copper wire shall be used to connect the plate and the equipment. The 10 SWG bare copper wire shall be connected to the plate by heat joint. Provision of watering chamber shall be provide as per the drawings. Separate earthing electrode shall be provided for the following system and equipment: . Transformer Neutral . Transformer body . DG body . DG neutral . Main control Panel
2.13. STEEL TUBULAR POLES 2.13.1. Requirements The steel tubular poles for LT lines and HT lines shall confirm to IS 2713 (Part I and II) 1980. The poles shall be swaged type and made from steel having breaking load of 451Kg. The dimension of the pole shall be as described below. The pole shall be complete with a cast iron, beset type cap with 3 Nos. of equally spaced screws. The poles shall be complete with 6 mm thick 300 mm x 300 mm mild steel base plate welded at the larger end. The poles shall be painted throughout inside with a bituminous
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 10
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works preservative compound and outside shall be painted with a coat of zinc chromate primer and two coats of aluminium paint. At the bottom of the pole 2 m coal tar vanish shall be painted over the outer surface.
2.13.2. Dimension 9 m high steel tubular pole . Bottom section: 127 mm outer dia, 4.5 mm thick, 5 m length . Middle section: 108 mm outer dia, 3.65 mm thick, 2 m length . Top Section: 76 mm outer dia, 3.25 mm thick, 2 m length
11m high steel tubular pole . Bottom section: 165.1 mm outer dia, 5.4 mm thick, 5.6 m length. . Middle section: 139.7 mm outer dia, 4.4 mm thick, 2.7 m length . Top Section: 114.3 mm outer dia, 3.65 mm thick, 2.7 m length
2.14. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2.14.1. Measurement . All the items of work shall be measured in the unit specified in the BOQ. . A set shall be considered as a complete set of the item of work described in the BOQ including all the necessary fixing accessories to complete that item of work. . A light point wiring includes the cost of HDPE conduit, wire, junction box, pull box, other fixing accessories to complete the wiring from DB to a light point via junction box and switch. A light fixture set shall be counted as a point, which shall include the wiring to junction box and switch. Junction box and switch shall not be counted as a point wiring. . A power socket point wiring includes the cost of PVC conduit, wire, junction box, pull box, other fixing accessories to complete the wiring from DB to a socket point via pull box. A power socket shall be counted as a point. . All the main cables, except point wiring, shall be measured in running meter.
2.14.2. Payment Payment shall be as per the unit rate entered in the Bill of Quantities. This shall include all cost for material, consumables, labour, rental for tools and equipment. The payment also includes associated civil works for example: drilling, nailing, breaking, making furrow and rectification through plastering.
2.15. COMPLETION TESTS AND GUARANTEE 2.15.1. Completion Tests After completion of work, following tests shall be performed before commissioning the system. Testing Insulation Resistance between Line and Earth The insulation resistance between a line and earth shall be checked by a 500 Volt megger. The phase conductor is connected to the terminal marked "Line" on the megger and terminal marked "Earth" is connected to the earth continuity conductor or an efficient earth. This test shall be performed with all fuse links in place, all switches 'ON' and all lamps in position. The result must not be less than 50 mega ohms divided by number of outlets. The test shall be performed for all outgoing circuits of main control panel, Feeder Post, MDB and DB.
Testing Insulation Resistance between Line to Line: This test shall be performed with all lamps removed and all switches 'ON'. The result must not be again less than 50 mega ohms divided by numbers of outlets. This test also shall performed for all outgoing circuits of main control panel, feeder post, MDB and DB. Test should made to verify that all single pole switches are on phase conductor and not on the neutral or earth conductor. All the above tests shall be performed by the contractor in the presence of the Engineer. All the necessary instrument and materials required shall be arranged by the contractor and no additional charges will be given to the contractor for performing the tests. If the above results tests are not satisfactory, the contractor shall rectify the faults, at his own cost until the require results are obtained. These tests shall be carried out, without any charge, by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 11
Annex A: Technical Specifications, Part IV, Electrical Works
2.15.2. Guarantee The contractor guarantee by his acceptance of the contract that all work installed will be free from any and all defects that all apparatus will developed capacities and characteristics specified and that if during the period of one year from the date of completion and acceptance of work any such defects on workmanship, materials, performance, replaces, repair or otherwise correct the defects with no additional cost to the owner within a reasonable time. In the event of default on this guarantee by the contractor, the owner may have work done as required and deduct the cost from the contractor’s retention deposit.
MIPP/NPL/CPB-6/RFP-2016-008 Page 12